Home

RX USER`S MANUAL

1. Parameter f Default ie No Function name Monitor or data range Lana during Unit Page i 9 operation 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 No 02 Automatic operation hese Energy saving A086 response accuracy 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Yes adjustment A092 Acceleration time 2 10 00 A292 2nd acceleration 10 00 time 2 A392 3rd acceleration 10 00 time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 Yes S a A093 Deceleration time 2 10 00 Cc 2 3 A293 2nd deceleration 10 00 S time 2 S A393 3rd deceleration 10 00 time 2 2 o 2 step acceleration amp A094 deceleration 00 2 selection 00 Switched via multi function input 09 2CH 2 01 Switched by setting No _ 437 o 2nd 2 step 02 Enabled only when switching forward 2 A294 acceleration reverse 00 2 deceleration a selection 8 2 st lerati E aggs 2Step acceleration 0 00 Zz frequency gt a 2nd 2 step No Hz A295 _ acceleration 0 00 frequency 0 00 to 400 00 A096 2 step deceleration 0 00 frequency 2nd 2 step No Hz A296 deceleration 0 00 frequency A097 Acceleration pattern 0p Line 01 No S selection 01 S shape curve 02 U shape curve 4 38 aogg Deceleration pattern 03 Inverted U shape curve 01 No selection 04 EL S shape curve 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs f
2. LIUVNIOQUOQUONUONOOUOOUONUORUONUOOUOUUOOUOU OOOO CUT EUTUTUINT 700 300 390 268 7 13 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX B411K B413K 2 12 LUUDTUONAOONOOUTOATOOTOOT OT EOUUTOATOEUOOTOULOTLOTUOTL TTA EUTEAT 710 740 AMINTIT y 380 480 suonesoads 270 7 14 B Specifications 7 3 Options 7 3 Options Braking Unit AX BCRO000000 TE Dimensional Drawing B S wi O OVERCURRENT ACTIVE POWER x DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE H1
3. p Weeee Y As aB le Dimensions Reference B B1 H H1 T S AX BCR4015045 TE 82 5 40 5 150 138 220 6 AX BCR4017068 TE AX BCR2035090 TE AX BCR2070130 TE 130 64 5 205 193 208 6 AX BCR4035090 TE AX BCR4070130 TE AX BCR4090240 TE 131 64 5 298 280 300 9 WESpecifications Specifications Voltage Reference Lermanent SEAS Minimum Brak Brak connectable Pry tary Current A KVA Current A KVA resistor Ohms AX BCR2035090 TE 35 13 90 32 4 100 200V AX BCR2070130 TE 70 25 130 47 2 8 125 AX BCR4015045 TE 15 11 45 33 16 50 AX BCR4017068 TE 17 13 68 51 11 63 400V AX BCR4035090 TE 35 26 90 67 8 5 100 AX BCR4070130 TE 70 52 130 97 5 5 125 AX BCR4090240 TE 90 67 240 180 3 2 250 7 15 7 3 Options Braking Resistor AX REMOOKOOOOD IE Dimensional Drawing AX REMO0K1200 400 IE AX REM00K2 4 6000 IE 92 o S H e Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM00K2070 IE 70 200 AX REM00K2120 IE 120 200 105 27 36 94 0 2 AX REMO00K2200 IE 200 200 AX REM00K4075 IE 75 400 AX REM00K4035 IE 35 400 200 27 36 189 0 425 AX REMO00K4030 IE 30 400 AX REMO00K5120 IE 120 500 260 27 36 249 S 0 58 AX REM00K6100 IE 100 600 320 27 36 309 0 73 AX REMOOK6035 IE 35 600 7 16 oe Specifications 7 3 Options AX REMOOK9O
4. Book Type Dimensions Voltage Inverter model Model Dimensions H X Filter type weda ba 3x200 V Specifications 3G3RX A2004 3G3RX A2007 3G3RX A2015 3G3RX A2022 3G3RX A2037 AX FIR2018 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 3G3RX A2055 3G3RX A2075 3G3RX A2110 AX FIR2053 RE 312 212 56 296 110 M6 Footprint 2 0 2 5 3G3RX A2150 3G3RX A2185 3G3RX A2220 AX FIR2110 RE 3G3RX A2300 AX FIR2145 RE 3G3RX A2370 3G3RX A2450 AX FIR3250 RE 3G3RX A2550 AX FIR3320 RE 455 110 240 414 80 Book type 8 0 8 6 13 2 3x400 V 3G3RX A4004 3G3RX A4007 3G3RX A4015 3G3RX A4022 3G3RX A4040 AX FIR3010 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 3G3RX A4055 3G3RX A4075 3G3RX A4110 AX FIR3030 RE 312 212 50 296 189 M6 3G3RX A4150 3G3RX A4185 3G3RX A4220 AX FIR3053 RE 451 252 60 435 229 M6 3G3RX A4300 AX FIR3064 RE 598 310 70 578 265 M8 Footprint 1 9 2 2 4 5 7 0 3G3RX A4370 AX FIR3100 RE 3G3RX A4450 3G3RX A4550 AX FIR3130 RE 455 110 240 414 80 3G3RX B4750 3G3RX B4900 AX FIR3250 RE 3G3RX B411K 3G3RX B413K AX FIR3320 RE 386 260 135 2
5. 265 310 195 SUOIedIIN9dS B Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2370 A2450 A4370 A4450 A4550 7 11 ONNA 2 12 HUTT OQOOOO ie o o o o 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2550 2 12 670 700 2 LOOIUDOIIIOINUONITONIUOOITORIITONITIOINIIIITII ITOT ITOI INDIT N 380 480 O00000 K y suonesoads 250 7 12 B S Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing HE3G3RX B4750 B4900 2 12
6. Output unit etc Inverter Output unit etc Inverter 24V DC 24V DC 2 D 2 x op i tput unit etc Output unit etc Inverter Output unit ig Inverter 24V D kK 24V DC 2 D 8 5J Kz 0 E E Selecting the Sequence Output Method Sink Source Logic Sink logic Source logic Inverter Inverter 2 22 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Wiring the Digital Operator e The RX Series Inverter can be operated with the optional 3G3AX OP01 or AX OPO5 E as well as the standard Digital Operator e To use the Digital Operator apart from the Inverter body place an order for the optional cable 3G3AX CAJOP300 EE 3 m e The optional cable should be 3 m or less Using a cable longer than 3 m may cause malfunction Conforming to EC Directives Conforming Standards EMC directive EN 61800 3 2004 e Low voltage directive EN 61800 5 1 2003 Concept of Conformity EMC Directive OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or manufacturing equipment For this reason we make efforts to conform our products to their related EMC standards so that the machines or equipment which have incorporated our products should easily conform to the EMC standards The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN 61800 3 by following the installation and wiring method as shown below Your machines or equipment
7. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Reduced voltage startup disabled 01 to 255 Reduced voltage startup 01 Short approx 6 ms b036 6 selection i 255 Long approx 1 53 s Related functions b082 FW o Starting frequency EES A b082 Output frequency Output voltage Display Selection e You can change the items to be displayed on the Digital Operator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 00 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display __ho No allocation U001 to U012 User selection d001 to P131 Select the code you want to no display Among all codes Note that P100 to P131 cannot be used 4 53 4 2 Function Mode Windividual Display of Functions e f a specific function is not selected its relevant parameter is not displayed e For details on the display requirements refer to the following table No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met 1 A001 01 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 2 A001 10 A141 to A143 3 A002 01 03 04 05 b087 4 A017 01 ea d027 P100 to P131 Note that P100 to P131 cannot be 5 A041 01 A046 A047 6 A044 00 01 A041 A
8. 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 30 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default as No Function name Monitor or data range eetin during Unit Page i 9 operation A101 Ol start frequency 0 00 No Hz 2 0 00 to 400 00 A102 Ol end frequency 0 00 No Hz gt i F 8 A103 Ol start ratio 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No o 4 14 A104 Olend ratio Ol start ratio to 100 100 No r B A105 otse selaon _ 97 82 0 start frequency A101 00 No A111 O2 start frequency monea 0 00 No Hz 2 00 to wy A112 O2 end frequency 0 00 No Hz 5 E A113 O2 start ratio 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No 3 8 4 15 Cc S A114 O2 end ratio O2 start ratio to 100 100 No T D x lt ui S A131 Acceleration curve 02 No w parameter D o D Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 S 4432 Deceleration curve 02 No S w parameter 2 eb 3 lt i 00 Digital Operator F001 A141 Operation frequency 01 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 No i input A setting Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 Input O 03 Input Ol ea o and 04 RS485 communication S argo peration requency 95 Option 1 03 No o 4 41 fa input B setting 06 Option 2 a 07 Pulse train frequency 5 00 Addition A
9. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P012 V2 control mode selection 01 APR pulse train position control mode 00 Mode 0 pulse train with 90 phase difference a0 P013 Pulsetrain mode selection 01 Mode 1 forward reverse command E pulse train 02 Mode 2 forward pulse train reverse pulse train Position read 010 10000 P017 a Set a value equivalent to encoder x4 5 range setting aa multiplication 4 128 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P018 F osition ready 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 s delay time setting P019 Electronic gear setting 00 FB feedback side 00 _ position selection 01 REF command side P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 _ numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 o denominator P022 Positi n control 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 feedforward gain P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 rad s P024 Position bias amount 2048 to 2048 0 Multi function inputs 47 PCLR position deviation clear C001 to C008 hs 48 STAT pulse train position command 1 to 8 selection nae input permission Frequency reference for the pulse train position control mode is calculated with the following formu la P Number of motor poles g i T 6 4 x P x Kv AP Kv Position loop gain requency reference Hz ENG 355 E
10. 2501h 0 Standard 2502h 2nd motor parameter H202 R W 1 Autotuning data 0 1 selection 2 Auto tuning data with online auto tuning 2503h 20d motor capacity H203 Rw e selection 0 2P 2nd motor pole number TAE 2504h p H204 R W 2 6P selection 3 8P 4 10P H205 2505h HIGH R W 2nd speed response ene 1 to 80000 0 001 2506h LOW R W 2507h 2n9 stabilization H206 RW 0to 255 1 parameter 2508h to Not used 2514h H220 2515h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R1 per 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 2516h LOW R W H221 2517h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R2 TF 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 2518h LOW R W 4 214 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function pede Function name Pulse R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code H222 2519h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter L TE 1 to 65530 0 01 mH 251Ah LOW R W H223 251Bh HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter lo Boas 1 to 65530 0 01 A 251Ch LOW R W 251Dh noes R W HIGH 0 001 2nd motor parameter J 1 to 9999000 2 251Eh noes R W ama LOW 251Fh to Not used 2523h 2524h ET R W 2nd motor parameter R1 1 to 65530 0 001 Q auto tuning data H230 2525h LOW R W 2526h ny R W 2nd motor parameter R2 1 to 65530 0 001 Q auto tuning data H231 2527h LOW R W 2528h nen R W 2nd motor parameter L 1 to 65530 0 01 mH auto tuning data H232 2529h L
11. Parameter Default Mie Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C134 Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 O 5 C135 Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C136 Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No s 4 106 oO o C137 Output 14 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 bs C138 Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C139 Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 os 6 c141 Relay output OFF 9 9 to 100 0 0 0 delay C142 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 oon oie o are ie 010R 0o p 02 XOR C145 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 z Logic output signal 2 00 AND 5 ae P A oni DEOR 0o a 02 XOR No 4 100 C148 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C149 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 exclu
12. Parameter Default Gremgee N Function name Monitor or data range ji during Unit Page o setting operation bgg RUN ime ower ON Iy teres5a5 o No h 4 52 time setting o Rotation direction 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled 2 b035 limit selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 No 4 52 fe 02 Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to z pase startup selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time large Ne a Fos 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 00 No 4 53 03 Data comparison display o 04 Basic display D ma bose sareen 000 to 202 001 No 456 selection User parameter ae b039 automatic setting o0 peas 00 No 4 57 i 01 Enabled function selection 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch 4 57 b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 No 4 59 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 Torque limit 1 i 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW _ po41 Four quadrant mode 9 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No p 457 forward power S aeh 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running Z Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b042 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No le ey reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabled O He Fe mode 2 19 200 04 to S5 kM m b043 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No reverse power key 4 59 no Torque limit disabled
13. 2 Pressing the key the cursor will appear in the function code Then use the A lt or OENE 2 key to select the function that will be changed 3 After that pressing aJ key the cursor will appear in the parameter value Use the A or y key to select the value to be set e To store the parameter value press the key e Pressing the 3 11 key changes will be cancelled FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL 3 4 Operation 7 Trip Mode 1 Select the CJ or 2 layer pel key to select trip mode at the navigation PRG Syntax 2 Pressing the key the past trip information 6 trip errors and the warning information 1 time that are recorded on the inverter will be displayed Trip information is composed in two pages For change from page 1 P1 to page 2 P2 press the _ J or _2_ key uoie19do PRG Syntax Pressing 6 times the key it will be displayed the Warning Mode BO82 gt Note When a trip happens ALARM LED will be light on Press the key to reset the inverter 3 12 Operation 3 5 Read Write function and operation 3 5 Read Write function and operation LCD digital operator can read and save inverter parameter settings and copy them to another inverter Specifically LCD digit
14. 01 No limit selection Input phase loss 00 Disabled pene protection selection 01 Enabled 0 No z SAG 5 Frequency matching 4 42 2 bOO7 lower limit frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 68 o setting 4 85 5 00 Trip 2 01 0 Hz start 53 02 Frequency matching start D BODE Trip retry selection 03 Trip after frequency matching oe ne E 4 42 deceleration stop g 04 Active Frequency Matching restart O a i gt b009 Undervoltage retry 00 16 times 00 No n 5 time selection 01 No limit E Overvoltage b010 overcurrent retry time 1 to 3 3 No Time 4 42 selection b011 Trip retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 32 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level b312 3rd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced torque characteristics 01 Constant torque characteristics 02 Free setting
15. Extended function mode P lt L P196 d001 Monitor mode d104 F001 Function mode F004 3 20 uoeiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List 3 9 Parameter List Monitor Mode d e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 Changes a Function name Monitor or data range Para during Unit Page o setting operation door OVtput frequency 4 99 to 400 00 Yes Hz 4 1 monitor doo2 Output current 0 0 to 9999 0 ws A 41 monitor p FWD Forward doos Rotation direction STOP Stop 4 1 REV Reverse doo4 PID feedback value 0 00 to 999000 00 4 1 monitor Enabled when the PID function is selected Example MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL Multi function in ut Ee FW Multi function input terminals Ta TON d005 i p F m m mm m m m ee ee i Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF 4 2 ii HLAL ELLIE z Foo _O00 0FF L 1 4006 Output Multi function output terminals 12 11 ON doos Multi function O pe eee eee Relay output terminal AL2 Multi function 4 2 output monitor H l output terminals 15 14 13 OFF h Al215141312 IT I La L FELL f Output frequency 9 99 to 39960 00 d007 monitor Yes 4 2 Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 after c
16. MExplanation of Each Function Code lt Reading Coil Status 01h gt Reads out the coil status ON OFF Example Read multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 8 Refer to the following table for the multi function input terminal status Once A 2 3 4 5 6 Coils 13 and 14 are OFF Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field name a No Field name ae 1 Slave address 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Number of data bytes 01 4 Coil start number LSB 06 4 Coildata 17 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 CRC 16 MSB 12 6 Number of coils LSB 3 06 6 CRC 16 LSB 1A 7 CRC 16 MSB 5C 4 Transfers data by the number of data bytes 8 CRC 16 LSB 90 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 When specifying the value of 0 or over 32 for the number of reading coils the error code 3h is replied The data received as the response shows the status of coils 7 to 14 The data received here 17h 00010111b should be read with coil 7 as LSB as follows Coil No 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Coil status OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON If the read coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data such c
17. 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monitor output 1440 Hz Rated current Yes A 4 107 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 44 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default oa 7 No Function name Monitor or data range AA during Unit Page 9 operation Multi function output C031 terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output C032 terminal 12 contact E selection E D Multi function output C033 terminal 13 contact 00 Q 3 selection 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 No 4 94 S Multi function output 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 5 C034 terminal 14 contact 5 selection 5 Multi function output C035 terminal 15 contact selection Relay output AL2 C036 AL1 contact 01 selection Light load signal 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C038 aa ut ie constant speed 01 No P 01 Enabled only during constant speed 4 104 C039 Light load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current verload war i 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C040 sianal output bee constant speed 01 No 9 p 01 Enabled only during constant speed 5 0 0 Does not operate 4 49 z Overl
18. 06 08 no No 4 79 1 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 21 Appendix 1 Parameter List Changes P ae Function name Monitor or data range ek during Unit Page i g operation Cott Multi function input 1 00 operation selection C012 Multi function input 2 00 operation selection Multi function input 3 cots operation selection 93 Cc Multi function input 4 2 oon operation selection oe 2 Multi function input5 00 NO E pois operation selection 01 NC pg i a i 5 Multi function input 6 2 cole operation selection ai oar eee co17 Multi function input 7 00 operation selection C018 Multi function input 8 00 operation selection FW terminal ots operation selection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 22 xipueddy Multi function output terminal Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes duri
19. C Inside the Inverter e te O Default value C036 01 Example When the relay output terminals are used for alarm el Resistance load i C036 SEB Inductive load Inverter set Power Max valies status AL2 AL1 contact 250VAC 2A 250V AC 0 2 A ALO ALO 30 V DC 8 A 30 V DC 0 6 A AL2 capacity ALO Min Abnormal Closed Open contact 100 AG 10 MA 5 V DC 100 mA capacity ON vax 250VAC 1A 250V AC 0 2 A 00 Normal Open Closed contact 30 V DC 1A 30 V DC 0 2A AL1 capacity lt Min 100 V AC 10 mA OFF Open Closed contact 5 V DC 100 mA capacity Abnormal Open Closed 01 ON Default Normal Closed Open OFF Open Closed 4 97 4 2 Function Mode Signal During RUN relay output terminal Output frequency fw tL FW RUN Shs Frequency Arrival Signal When the output frequency reaches the set level a frequency arrival signal is output e While the Inverter is running this signal is output via multi function output terminals 11 to 15 or the e Allocate 00 RUN to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 e This signal is also output during DC injection braking Below is the time chart i Function name Data Peels Unit o setting Arrival frequency during C042 acceleration 0 00 Does not output arrival signal during acceleration 0 01 to
20. Precautions for Correct Use Binstallation e Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product s longer sides upright The material of the wall has to be noninflammable such as a metal plate Main Circuit Power Supply e Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage Error Retry Function e Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start MNon Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption e Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection 6050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command e Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed e When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product Warning Labels Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration Be sure to follow the ins
21. gt be A OF 1 i Sinise THE SS E c ii El MLE oe SA Volt Reference Fi Dimensions oltage I g AX RC SA slelo E F jfaHiy S 10700032 DE 96 1 22 06750061 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 03510093 DE 02510138 DE 116 1 95 01600223 DE 1 108 135 124 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 20 01110309 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 00840437 DE 146 6 00 200V 7 00590614 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 2 00440859 DE 182 6 14 3 00301275 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5 185 10 00231662 DE 196 123 25 5 00192015 DE 2 188 109 34 0 00162500 DE 240 198 200 228 119 12 38 0 00133057 DE 228 149 42 0 43000020 DE 96 1 22 27000030 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 14000047 DE 10100069 DE 116 1 95 06400116 DE 1 108 135 133 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 70 04410167 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 7 03350219 DE 146 6 00 02330307 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 7 2 400V 01750430 DE 182 6 14 3 01200644 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5 185 10 00920797 DE 196 123 25 5 00741042 DE 188 109 34 0 00611236 DE 198 119 38 0 240 200 228 00501529 DE 2 42 0 228 149 Sea 00372094 DE 12 48 8 00312446 DE 67 0 216 133 _ 00252981 DE 300 250 288 67 0 00213613 DE 236 153 79 0 7 21 7 3 Options Specifications Voltage inventer Type ero NET Reference Current value A Inductan
22. Default Greng N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Brake control 00 Disabled ple selection 01 Enabled o0 o p121 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s release p122 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s acceleration p123 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s stopping 4 75 p124 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s confirmation b125 Brake release 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated 0126 Brake release current 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current No _ fei 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency protection tunction 00 Disabled 2 b130 p i A 01 DC voltage kept constant 01 No selection during S 02 Acceleration enabled fo deceleration a ees 200 V class 330 to 390 380 No y p P 400 V class 660 to 780 760 during deceleration big2 Overvoltage 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s 4 76 protection parameter Overvoltage p133 Protection 0 00 to 2 55 050 Yes proportional gain setting Overvoltage b134 protection integral 0 000 to 65 535 0 060 Yes s time setting Auto return initial 00 OFF 9163 display 01 ON 00 Ko _ Data Read Write 00 Read Write OK 6166 selection 01 Read Write Protected o No _ z he ts 00 No action b180 Initialize trigger 01 Initialize 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17
23. 162Ch Not used 162Dh Not used 162Eh DeviceNet comm Watch bo44 Rw 0 00 to 99 99 s dog timer 0 Trip i 1 Trip after deceleration stop 162Fh OPeration setting at P045 R W 2 Ignore communication error 3 Free run 4 Deceleration stop 1630h Output assembly instance P046 R W 0 to 20 bot No setting 0 Trip f 1 Trip after deceleration stop 1632h OPeration setting at idle P048 R W 2 Ignore mode detection 3 Free run 4 Deceleration stop 4 209 4 4 Communication Function BIS Function name Fumeiion R W Monitor and setting parameters Ree olt No code tion 0 OP 1 2P 2 4P 3 6P 4 8P 5 10P 6 12P 7 14P 8 16P Polarity setting for rotation 9 18P 1633h speed P049 R W 10 20P 11 22P 12 24P 13 26P 14 28P 15 30P 16 32P 17 34P 18 36P 19 38P 1634h to Not used 1638h 1639h Pulse train frequency P055 R W 10 to 500 l 0 1 kHz scale Input frequency at maximum frequency ean vee train frequency fiter Sase l RAW 4 io200 0 01 s time constant 463Bh Pulse train frequency bias posz Rw 100 to 100 1 amount 163Ch Pulse train frequency limit P058 R W 0to 100 1 163Dh Not used 163Eh POBO R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 0 P060 163Fh LOW R W 1640h pee R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 1 P061 1641h LOW R W 1642h ae R W M
24. Power External Applicable cable brakin Circuit device Motor mm Ground ING Terminal 7 Tightening Applicable resistor Crimp break Earth output Inverter model RoS T CEE between Screw terminal forage eror leak kW U V W mm PD stand S Nem ue eaKage PD 1 RB 2 breaker P N a ELB 0 4 3G3RX A2004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 fave 8 30 A 0 75 3G3RX A2007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 meee a s 30 A 1 3 1 2 Q 1 5 3G3RX A2015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 eE E 30A 1 5 2 2 3G3RX A2022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 ae i T 30A 3 7 3G3RX A2037 3 5 3 5 3 5 M4 3 5 4 a 8 30 A 5 5 3G3RX A2055 5 5 5 5 5 5 M5 R5 5 5 4 a 100 A 7 5 3G3RX A2075 8 8 8 MS FBS a 100A 2 4 0 max E k 4 0 5 11 3G3RX A2110 14 14 14 M6 R14 6 D 100 A gt 4 4 max a g 4 5 3 15 3G3RX A2150 22 22 22 M6 22 6 4 9 PA 125 A a 5 oe 18 5 3G3RX A2185 30 22 30 M6 38 6 omax 125A 9 22 3G3RX A2220 38 30 38 M8 38 8 8 ae 2 125A 30 3G3Rx A2300 30 Ms 60 8 B S 25A 22 x 2 8 8 max o 37 3G3Rx A2370 100 38 ms 100 8 ot E 2235A 38 x 2 20 0 max 100 P 8 1 T 45 3G3RX A2450 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 Boom 250 A 150 19 6 55 3G3RX A2550 60 x 2 60 M10 150 10 23 0 mak 300 A 2 18 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Power External Applicable cele brakin Circuit claves Motor mm Ground SIN
25. Provides shockless start stop as with the S pattern but the intermediate section is linear 4 39 4 2 Function Mode Pattern Curve Parameter Curve Factor e Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target Target Target frequency frequency frequency 100 gt 100 gt 100 gt 96 9 eae 82 4 375 68 4 64 6 65 35 35 4 31 6 12 5 17 6 6 25 3 1 0 39 25 50 75 f Time 25 50 75 N Time 25 50 75 Time Acceleration time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 e The S pattern has an intermediate section where acceleration deceleration time is shortened lf LAD cancel LAC is selected for a multi function input and that input is turned on the acceleration deceleration pattern is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency HEL S Curve Ratio If the EL S pattern is used you can set a curve ratio A151 to A153 individually for acceleration and deceleration If all settings are 50 the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S curve Output frequency ratio 100 Curve ratio 2 during Curve ratio 1 during acceleration A151 deceleration A152 50 Curve ratio 2 during deceleration A153
26. Use or L key to move the cursor to the function code F001 in this case and use the A or key to change the fu 3 Use the key to access to the function code value With the A or key the value can be changed The changes will be stored MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL nction code after pressing the key or cancelled pressing the key 3 9 3 4 Operation 5 Monitor B Display Mode 1 Please select the Display Mode Monitor B using the or key at the navigation layer 2 After pressing the key the cursor will appear on the first row of the four d group inverter parameters Use the A or key to move between the four Monitor B inverter parameters 3 Pressing the key the cursor will appear on the function code of the d inverter parameters selected Use the A or key to select other function code e Pressing the key the function code is selected and then displayed on the Monitor B display Mode e Pressing the key the change will be cancelled MONITOR B M1 STOP ALL MONITOR B M1 STOP ALL Output FO 00Hz u 3 10 uoeiado Operation 3 4 Operation 6 Function Mode 1 Please select Function Mode by using the _ or 2 key at the navigation level
27. 0 3G 10 to 55 Hz Q O Location At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without corrosive gases or dust 2 Feedback option Sensor vector control 2 6 Digital input option 4 digit BCD 16 bit binary Other options Braking resistor AC reactor DC reactor Digital Operator cables Noise filter Braking unit etc Complies with the test method specified in JIS C0040 1999 Note Insulation distance complies with UL CE standards 7 6 suoleoiineds B Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 62 7 7 7 2 Dimensional Drawing M3G3RX A2055 A2075 A2110 A4055 A4075 A4110 210 189 2 07 e ea o i TRl D Ss lt gt Ss 0 Co aes C 72 Ke o Pe D CD ag O t tt if T 6 e B Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Draw
28. 1024 Pulse Set the number of actual encoder pulses Note Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Motor gear ratio numerator D Motor gear ratio denominator lt Example gt Encoder 1024 pulses eWhen the motor to encoder rpm ratio is 1 10 set the following data Number of encoder pulses P011 1024 Motor gear ratio numerator P028 10 Motor gear ratio denominator P029 100 In this case the orientation stop position is defined as 4096 divisions of the encoder s one rotation Note that the concept of the stop position is inverted from the description in Orientation stop position conceptual drawing page 4 135 Position Bias Function Set this function to apply position command bias in the pulse train position control mode The set number of pulses is added to a change value at 2 ms internals This is used for adjusting the phase of synchronization points during synchronous operation Set an addition value in position bias amount P024 A positive value adds the value in the forward direction Related functions P024 4 133 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Speed Bias Function This function applies speed command bias in the pulse train position control mode Set a bias value in frequency addition amount A145 and select a sign in frequency addition direc tion A146 Allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function
29. B w A143 Operator selection 01 Subtraction A B 00 No a 02 Multiplication A x B Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 Ae Hg Frequency addition 00 Add A145 value to output frequency 4 41 A146 PAS y 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 No frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 31 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Gineng N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Eliaso ES Cue rato T iasi 10 No during acceleration o r E as ES euveraudE g jga 10 No D during acceleration Q 4 39 Siia e RTN i gE 10 No during deceleration 2 T E A Baisa Ee Ue tale igan 10 No lt x during deceleration 00 Alarm 01 0 Hz start T i S b001 Retry selection 02 Frequency matching start o No z 03 Trip after frequency matching a deceleration stop l 4 42 04 Active Frequency Matching restart 5 Allowable momentary 2 b002 power interruption 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 No s 5 time b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 85 5 Momentary power 00 Disabled b004 interruption 01 Enabled 00 No gt g undervoltage trip 02 Disabled during stop and deceleration g during stop selection stop 4 42 s Momentary power b005 interruption retry time on 16 times 00 No
30. Locations subject to exposure to combustibles Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration MTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals e Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Operation and Adjustment Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement EN Precautions for Correct Use
31. MONITOR A Monitor A mode MONITOR B Monitor B mode FUNCTION Function mode Display Mode TRIP Trip error mode WARNING Warning mode Alarm OPTION LCD Configuration Mode M1 Motor 1 SET multifunction OFF Motor selected M2 Motor 2 SET multifunction ON STOP Stopped Inverter RUN Status FWD Forward running REV Reverse running ALL Display all UTL Function individual display Display Selection b037 USR User setting display CMP Data compare display BAS Basic display 3 4 uoiei9do Operation 3 3 Test Run Procedure 3 3 Test Run Procedure Item Description RelStence page Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions 2 1 e Make sure that the installation conditions are met y Wiring and Connection Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices 2 6 e Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications and wire correctly y Power On Check the following before turning on the power e Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly e 3G3RX A20 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC 3G3RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correctly e Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control te
32. Note When b098 01 PTC enabled the motor temperature monitor is disabled Life Assessment Monitor d022 e This monitor indicates a life assessment result The following two items can be monitored 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan rom reduction MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL d022 Life C F f H001 00 OFF Note 1 The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes If the Inverter is turned on off frequently within this interval the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed Note 2 While the cooling fan is stopped with b092 set to 01 the cooling fan rpm is judged as being normal Program Counter d023 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 0 to 1024 Program Number d024 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 0 to 9999 Drive Programming Monitor UMO to UM2 d025 to d027 Refer to Drive Programming Manual Display 2147483647 to 2147483647 4 1 Monitor Mode Pulse Counter Monitor d028 You can monitor a total pulse count of multi function input function pulse counter 74 PCNT Display 0 to 2147483647 Position Command Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode d029 You can monitor a position command in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Display 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is selected 268435456 to 2684354
33. P023 Position loop gain 2 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 rad s Note Below are the block diagrams of the electronic gear function First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain Speed P019 00 FB Position command command Position feedback First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain P019 01 REF Speed command Position command Position feedback 4 130 suonun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 1 It is recommended that position control feedfoward gain adjustment should be started with P022 2 00 To reduce the position deviation between the main and sub motors increase the feedforward gain If motor hunting occurs reduce the feedforward gain 2 It is recommended that position loop gain adjustment should be started with P023 2 00 To increase positioning accuracy and holding power increase the position loop gain If an increased position loop gain causes hunting reduce the position loop gain 3 Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 D Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 Example Synchronous Operation Master Inverter Slave Inverter AP BP A SAP SBP AN BN SAN SBN EG5 EAP EBP EAP EBP EAN EBN EAN EBN For the Inverter master Inverter on the main motor side you can select either the speed control
34. Proportional gain setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes 4 60 b056 Integral time setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 000 to 65 535 0 100 Yes 4 60 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 36 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter F Default oa 7 N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Set an upper limit level b060 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 100 Yes O upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 5 ne O lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 0 xes R width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator imit eves b062 mpa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes O hysteresis width ate ee ty Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level b063 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 l 100 Yes 4 63 Ol upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 pues Ol lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 9 ues 4 width x 2 Set a hyste
35. Tempera temperature has risen in the main E210 Installation check z ture error circuit because of the high ambient i Is the ambient temperature high temperature Decrease the ambient temperature Is there any large electrical noise source Gate arra around ay Trips when a fault is detected in Countermeasures against electrical communi E ations communication behavior between E23 0 noise errar the built in CPU and the gate array Has any internal cable been disconnected Check the connector 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 3 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy sae Prevents Inverter damage due to Is there any input power supply phase input phase loss when the input loss Input open phase loss protection selection is F240 Check the input wiring phase trip enabled b006 01 and trips Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or Trips when the phase loss time is Mg approximately 1 s or more Replace MCCB Mg Is there any large electrical noise source around Trips when the gate array cannot Countermeasures against electrical Main circuit confirm IGBT ON OFF because of a noise main element failure a load short Has the main e
36. Transmission command 2 bytes 0B Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 160 Negative response Refer to page 4 160 HPositive Negative Responses lt Positive Response gt e Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 160 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 161 lt Negative Response gt Response frame Frame format STX Station No NAK Error code BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Control code KAR Negative AcKnowledge 1 byte DAROT Error code Communication error status 2 bytes 3 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Error Code List Error code Description 01H Parity error 02H Checksum error 03H Framing er
37. b131 eae ae ep ass a0 10280 380 760 v nng 400 V class 660 to 780 deceleration Overvoltage protection 0 10 1030 00 b132 ge p Set the acceleration rate applied when this 1 00 s parameter e function is enabled Overvoltage protection 0 00 10 E9 b133 rO sti aa settini Proportional gain for DC voltage constant 0 50 prop g 9 control b130 01 only Overvoltage protection 0 000 1065 535 b134 Integral time for DC voltage constant control 0 060 s integral time setting b130 01 only Example 1 When b130 01 Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage protection level b131 Output frequency Hz DC voltage kept constant Example 2 When b130 02 Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage protection level b131 Time s Output frequency Hz Time s Accelerates according to b132 Note 1 With this function enabled the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value Particularly with b130 02 if b131 is set too low the Inverter may not decelerate Note 2 Even if this function is enabled an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and load condition Note 3 When using this function the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor load and takes a long time to stop Time s Time s 4 78 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode 1 If the b131 set value is lower than the incoming voltage or equ
38. e By using the teaching function you can set the position command while running the machine e By allocating 73 SPD to a multi function input you can switch between the speed and position controls For data with many digits e g position command only the higher 4 digits are displayed Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V conitolimode 02 APR2 absolute position control P012 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position 00 selection control P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 rad s Po60 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 E command 0 to Position range setting forward side Multi step position Position range setting reverse side P061 i 0 command 1 to Position range setting forward side P062 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 2 to Position range setting forward side P063 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 i command 3 to Position range setting forward side P064 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 o command 4 to Position range setting forward side Po65 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 o command 5 to Position range setting forward side Po66 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 o command 6 to Position range setting forward side P067 Multi step position Position
39. if 0 4 to 55 kW x E 10025 Overload limit level 2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No 8 75 to 132 kW current gt il bones Sveroaa lint 0 10 to 30 00 100 No s O parameter 2 Overcurrent 00 Disabled poe suppression function 01 Enabled go ne Fal 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Active Frequency 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 4 43 b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No s 4 71 parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 No Matching restart 02 Set frequency 00 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed x when terminal SFT is ON S a 9 post Sof lock selection 02 Data other than b031 cannot be changed OI Ne fal 03 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 14 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Gremgee N Function name Monitor or data range ji during Unit Page
40. running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled 9043 selection 01 Enabled 0g No gt vee 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 35 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b046 Reverse rotation prevention selection 00 01 Disabled Enabled 00 No 4 59 b049 Dual rate selection 00 01 Constant torque Variable torque 00 No b050 Selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption 00 01 02 03 Disabled Enabled deceleration stop Enabled without recovery Enabled with recovery 00 No b051 Starting voltage of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 No b052 Stop deceleration level of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 360 720 No Others b053 Deceleration time of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 No b054 Deceleration starting width of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No b055
41. 0 4 180 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Trip factor high order factor Trip factor low order Inverter status Name Code Name Code Overcurrent protection during constant speed 1 During stop 1 Overvoltage protection during deceleration 2 During deceleration 2 Overcurrent protection during acceleration 3 During constant speed 3 Overcurrent protection during stop 4 During acceleration 4 Overload protection 5 Operates at frequency 0 5 Braking resistor overload protection 6 During startup 6 Overvoltage protection 7 During DB 7 EEPROM error 8 During overload limit 8 Undervoltage protection 9 During SON FOC 9 CT error 10 CPU error 11 External trip 12 USP error 13 Grounding protection 14 Incoming overvoltage protection 15 Momentary power interruption protection 16 Power module abnormal temperature 20 during FAN stop Power module abnormal temperature 21 Gate array communications error 23 Input phase loss protection 24 Main circuit error 25 IGBT error 30 Thermistor error 35 Brake error addition 36 Emergency shutoff error 37 Low speed range electronic thermal 38 Option 1 errors 0 to 9 60 to 69 Option 2 errors 0 to 9 70 to 79 lt Holding Register Number List Monitor gt Steal Function name pe en R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution o code 1001h WE Output frequency monitor J001 R 0 00
42. 0055 is excessively increased when the difference between b051 and b052 is large the Inverter may accelerate immediately after this function starts resulting in overcurrent 5 When b050 02 03 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain b055 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip e Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time b056 but if too short the same situation may occur e If the proportional gain 0055 is too small the voltage drops immediately after this function starts resulting in an undervoltage trip 4 65 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 Main circuit P N voltage Vpn V Main circuit DC voltage Output frequency Hz b050 02 03 Deceleration stop Power recovery Note The main circuit DC voltage level while the function is running may fall below the b052 set value depending on the proportional gain and integral time settings DC voltage kept constant Example 2 Main circuit P N voltage Vpn V Output frequency Hz b050 02 Deceleration stop Time Main circuit DC voltage at power recovery M Time Power recovery Window Comparator Disconnection Detection ODc OIDc O2Dc e The Inverter activates the window comparator output when the O Ol O2 analog input value is within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparat
43. 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage atCT 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 5 16 5 24 32 46 64 76 Rated output current A atVT 3 7 6 3 9 4 12 19 6 30 44 58 73 85 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 Regenerative braking Built in braking resistor circuit discharge resistor separately mounted Braking inj i Minimumi gonneston eq sg 38 ll 235 ass Ae 40 gt 400 ss Is resistance Q 7 1 Standard Specification List Class 3 phase 200 V Model name 8G3RX A2220 A2300 A2370 A2450 A2550 Max applicable kW at CT 22 30 37 45 55 motor ER at VT 30 37 4 amp 5 5 75 at CT 32 9 41 9 50 2 63 0 76 2 200 V capacity kVA at CT 39 4 50 2 60 2 75 6 91 4 240 V at VT 46 9 59 4 71 0 87 2 112 2 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 Rated input voltage 60 Hz 5 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot exceed that of Rated output voltage incoming voltage at CT 95 121 145 182 220 Rated output current A at VT 113 140 169 210 270 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 14 22 30 30 43 Regenerative braking Built in braking Regenerative braking unit 7 resistor circuit separately mounted Braking Minimum connection 5 o resistance Q WO D O O 9 Oo 5 o 7 2 E Specifica
44. 100 0 to 100 oud AMERA SELNI Set an offset for the AMI monitor ee Note The offset data is set in Example If AMI provides 4 to 20 mA output the offset value is 20 4 20 Default value Operation Selection During Option Error If the built in optional board causes an error you can set whether the Inverter trips or continues to run regardless of the option error Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Operation selection at 00 TRP Outputs an alarm ROOT HOOS option error 01 RUN Continues to operate 00 lt Group H Motor Control Parameters gt Offline Auto Tuning Function e This function enables measurement and automatic setting of the motor parameters required for sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control and sensor vector control e To perform sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control for a motor with unknown motor parameters perform offline auto tuning to determine the motor parameters eTo use the online auto tuning function described later be sure to perform offline auto tuning in advance e This function is applicable to 1st 2nd control not to 3rd control For motor parameters the Inverter inputs data on one phase of Y connection at 50 Hz Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Enabled Motor does not r
45. 2240h boost voltage A246 R W Oto 255 1 compensation gain 2nd automatic torque 2241h boost slip compensation A247 R W Oto 255 1 gain 2242h to Not used 224Eh 224Fh neo R W acd HIGH 0 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd frequency upper limit 0 01 Hz A261 ay 2nd max frequency 2250h LOW 2251h rete R W nae HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency lower limit cs 0 01 Hz A262 2nd frequency upper limit 2252h LOW R W 2253h to Not used 226Eh A292 226Fh HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 2 FORE 1 to 360000 0 01 s 2270h LOW R W A293 227 1h HIGH R W 2nd deceleration time 2 Os 1 to 360000 0 01 s 2272h LOW R W 0 Switched via terminal 2CH 2273h 2nd 2 step acceleration A294 R W 1 Switched by setting deceleration selection 2 Switched at forward reverse inversion only 4 213 4 4 Communication Function Regiei Function name EU dao R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2274h l ice R W re ae acceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2275h LOW R W 2276h en R W rae 2 step deceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2277h Pepe A296 R W LOW 2278h to Not used 230Bh 230Ch ee eet b212 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 Sad clectanicnenial 0 Reduction characteristics 230Dh ae b213 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection f 2 Free setting 230Eh to Not used
46. 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 6 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ies Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz a 00 Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation gt 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop gt Disabled in operation g 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop 5 Jogging stop Disabled in operation 4 18 a A039 f ain 00 No a selection 03 Free running on jogging stop 2 Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation A041 Een boost 00 selection 00 Manual torque boost N 01 Automatic torque boost 9 _ A241 2nd torque boost 00 selection A042 Manual torque boost 1 0 voltage A242 2nd manual torque 4 9 to 20 0 10 Yes boost voltage 4 19 A342 3rd manual torque 1 0 boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost 5 0 frequency A243 2nd manual torque 0 0 to 50 0 50 Yes 8 boost frequency 2 3rd It D A343 rd manual torque 50 boost frequency 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics gt aa special VP A044 ie ee 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 S
47. 2nd automatic torque boost A246 voltage compensation gain 4 19 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A047 Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain A247 2nd automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 0 to 255 100 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Manual Torque Boost Outputs the voltage set in A042 A242 A342 or A043 A243 A343 e In A042 A242 A342 set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100 Output voltage 100 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 Base frequency 100 e If you raise the set value of the manual torque boost be careful about motor overexcitation Otherwise the motor may burn out eIn manual torque boost frequency A043 A243 A343 set a ratio based on the base frequency as 100 4 20 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Torque Boost e lf the automatic torque boost is selected in the torque boost selection A041 A241 01 it operates to adjust the output frequency and voltage automatically depending on the load level In actual control the automatic torque boost is used along with the manual torque boost e To select the automatic torque boost set motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204
48. 3000 No Q 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 18 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciemas 7 No Function name Monitor or data range setting during Unit Page operation b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz b101 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz b103 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz D b105 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V D b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz Po D b107 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz b109 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz b111 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 No Hz b113 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 19 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greng N Function name Monitor or data range 3 dur
49. A220 and A320 or multi step speed A021 to A035 Example Max frequency fmax 120 Hz fon 4 fost Output frequency i Set frequency fset 60 Hz i fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz fott 120 x 0 02 2 4 Hz FA1 During acceleration ON at 60 1 2 58 8 Hz During deceleration OFF at 60 2 4 57 6 Hz fon 1 of the max frequency Set frequency foft 2 of the max frequency Set frequency exceeded Output 02 FA2 24 FA4 A signal is output when the output frequency has exceeded the arrival frequencies during acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA2 and C045 C046 FA4 fon 1 of the max frequenc C042 C045 phi E fon C043 C046 Ay fort foff 2 of the max frequency Output frequency FA2 FA4 Set frequency only Output 06 FA3 25 FA5 A signal is output when the output frequency equals the arrival frequencies during acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA3 and C045 C046 FA5 Fix fon N C043 C046 Gilipatnequariey Pot vg tt a fon 1 of the max frequency fotf C042 C045 g a fon FA3 FAS fott 2 of the max frequency 4 99 4 2 Function Mode Overtorque OTQ e This function outputs a signal when detecting a motor output torque estimated value exceeding a specified level Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection
50. Aion No A 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current D 75 to 132 kW B co42 Arrival frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 2 during acceleration 4 98 S co43 Arrival frequency 9 49 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz oD during deceleration gt per egga 1D deviation 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 4 31 excessive level co45 Arrival frequency 4 99 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during acceleration 2 fre cog Arrival frequency 4 99 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during deceleration 2 C052 PID FB upper limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No 1 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 25 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ie No Function name Monitor or data range Lana during Unit Page i 9 operation Overtorque level C055 Forward power 200 No running Overtorque level C056 Reverse 200 No 9 regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW aes is Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW C057 Reverse power 200 No running 3 g Overtorque level 5 C058 Forward 200 No 3 regeneration 5 3 S cost TPermal waring 0 to 100 80 No 4 46 3 level E 00 Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit 00 No 4 101 02 4 bit C063 0 Hz detection level 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 No Hz 4 10
51. Curve ratio 1 during Time s acceleration A150 4 40 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operation Frequency Function e Two systems of frequency reference operation results are available for the frequency reference and PID feedback value Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Digital Operator F001 A141 Operation frequency A020 A220 A320 02 E input A setting 01 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 Input O 03 Input Ol A142 Operation frequency 04 RS485 communication 03 a input B setting 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 07 Pulse train frequency 00 Addition A B A143 Operator selection 01 Subtraction A B 00 02 Multiplication A x B Related functions A001 10 A076 10 Note 1 When this function is enabled the Up Down function cannot be used In addition frequency cannot be changed through key operations from output frequency monitor d001 frequency conversion monitor d007 or output frequency setting F001 Note 2 The same setting is available in A141 and A142 e To use this function as a frequency reference set frequency reference selection A001 to 10 e To use this function as a PID feedback set PID feedback selection A076 to 10 Frequency Addition Function e The value set in frequency addition amount A145 can be added to or subtracted from the selected frequency reference value e To use
52. Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation A063 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Jump frequency A064 width 1 0 50 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 3 Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz aoge UMP frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 0 50 E width 2 g A067 Jump frequency 3 0 00 4 30 e Adee Jump frequency 0 50 D width 3 Q 5 Acceleration sto Aoeg Co P 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency Ao7o Acceleration stop 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s time 00 Disabled A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 No 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 Yes S A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 Yes s _ A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time Oo E 00 Ol er Oo 01 0 j a aoze P P feedback 02 RS485 communication 00 No A selection i 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value Feedback value BOM Reverse EID uncon 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target 0g No _ value ao7g Ee output limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No function 00 Disabled PID feedforward 01 0 8 A079 selection 02 Ol 00 Ne o tee T 03 O2 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 No 02 OFF during deceleration 4 35 lt x A082 AVR voltage 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No y selection 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08
53. Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R ole No code tion DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 1248h power A054 R W 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 1 4 1249h DC injection braking time A055 R W 0 to 600 0 1 s 124Ah DC injection braking A056 R W o Edge operation method selection 1 Level operation Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 5 124Bh braking power A057 R W 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 1 P4 iach Startup DC injection A058 R W 0 to 600 0 1 s braking time DC injection braking 5 to 150 0 4 to 55 kW de carrier frequency A0933 AW 5 to 100 75 to 132 kW Or Kriz 124Eh Not used 124Fh Aue R W ois HIGH 0 Frequency lower limit to 0 01 Frequency upper limit H A061 aw Max frequency Hz 1250h LOW 1251h A062 R W fie HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 0 01 Frequency lower limit F limi H A062 BiN requency upper limit Hz 1252h LOW 1253h co R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 1 0 to 40000 1254h Aes R W si LOW 0 01 1255h Jump frequency width 1 A064 R W 0 to 1000 Hz 1256h AGS R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 2 0 to 40000 H 1257h AQ6S R W va LOW 0 01 1258h Jump frequency width 2 A066 R W 0 to 1000 Hz 1259h aed R W HIGH 0 01 Jump frequency 3 0 to 40000 125Ah AG R W ee LOW 0 01 125Bh Jump frequency width 3 A068
54. N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation Depends H030 Motor parameter R1 on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor se H230 parameter R1 i motor auto tuning data i capacity Depends Motor parameter R2 on the H031 auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor ee H231 parameter R2 i motor auto tuning data capacity Depends D Motor parameter L on the Ree auto tuning data motor capacity 3 0 01 to 655 35 No mH 4109 Depends 4 113 2nd motor onthe 5 H232 parameter L motor o auto tuning data capacity Depends H033 Motor parameter lo on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A 2nd motor pike H233 parameter lo motor auto tuning data capacity Depends H034 Motor parameter J on the auto tuning data motor capacity 2 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm 2nd motor nevi H234 parameter J motor auto tuning data capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 52 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ES N Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page o setting operation H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes H250 2
55. ON With the factory default setting slide switch SW1 is OFF This function is disabled 2 10 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is OFF Slide switch SW1 setting and status of multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Slide switch Multi function input terminal 1 Multi function input terminal 3 a Multi function input 1 Multi function input 1 Multi function input 3 Multi function input 3 g selection operation selection selection operation selection C001 C011 C003 C013 J1 2 SW1 OFF Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Emergency randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 hapt Factory 01 RV Factory 00 NO Factory 12 EXT Factory 00 NO pange default default default default factory erau default SW1 ON Automatic allocation to multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Emergency and the input terminal with 18 RS setting 3 eaten Fixed 18 RS Fixed 00 NO Fixed 64 EMR Fixed 01 NC Enabled f 5 function function function function Cannot Cannot Cannot Cannot be be be be changed changed changed changed Turning SW1 Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected on and then randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 Holds 18 RS Holds 00 NO Emergency no Holds 01 NC m
56. Output frequency lt High speed zero return 1 P068 01 gt Low speed zero return frequency P070 Position ORL terminal__ ow Output 2 frequency lt High speed zero return 2 P068 02 gt High speed zero return frequency P071 Position 4 QW Speed zero return frequency P070 ORG terminal ORL terminal ia Output 2 High speed zero return frequency 3 4 frequency P071 Low speed zero return frequency P070 7 Origin Position Low speed zero return frequency P071 1 The Inverter accelerates to the low speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the low speed zero return speed 3 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is input 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is turned off 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is tu
57. Output terminal ON delay time OFF delay time 11 C130 C131 12 C132 C133 13 C134 C135 14 C136 C137 15 C138 C139 RY AL C140 C141 e All output signals immediately turn on off when the specified conditions are satisfied Depending on the selected signal chattering may occur In such a case use this function to hold or delay the signal Set the parameters for individual output terminals multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and the relay output terminal six terminals in total For the output terminals and the corresponding parameters refer to the table below Function code Item Data Default setting Unit C130 0132 C134 C136 0 0 to 100 0 C138 C140 Output ON delay get an ON delay time 0 0 C131 C133 C135 C137 0 0 to 100 0 C139 C141 Output OFF delay Set an OFF delay time 0 0 j Input Terminal Response Time e You can set a sampling time individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 as well as the FW terminal This helps remove chattering or other noise e f the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering increase the set value The larger the data value is the slower the response time A setting range of 0 to 200 is available which corresponds to approx 2 to 400 ms Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C160 to C167 Input terminal response time to 200 x 2 ms Can be set in increments of 1 C168 FW terminal response tim
58. Parameter No Data Description Note 00 Always ON Enabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration 01 Always OFF Disabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration ADSI Disabled only during deceleration in order to reduce the energy OFF during needs 02 f regenerated to the Inverter by increasing the motor loss This will deceleration 5 A avoid a possible trip due to regeneration during deceleration 4 35 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Energy saving Operation Function e This function automatically minimizes the Inverter output power during constant speed operation and is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics e g fan pump Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A086 Energy saving response 0 0 to 100 0 50 accuracy adjustment e To operate with this function set RUN mode selection A085 to 01 You can adjust the response and accuracy with energy saving response accuracy adjustment A086 e Controls the output power at a comparatively slow rate Should rapid load fluctuation like impact load occur the motor may stall resulting in an overcurrent trip Parameter No Function name Data Response Accuracy 0 Slow High A086 Energy saving response accuracy adjustment 100 Fast Low Automatic Optimum Accelerat
59. TL Torque limit switching 1 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 2 TRQ2 P PI switching PPI Brake confirmation BOK Orientation ORT LAD cancel LAC Position deviation clear PCLR Pulse train position command input permission STAT Frequency addition function ADD Forced terminal block F TM Torque reference input permission ATR Integrated power clear KHC Servo ON SON Preliminary excitation FOC Analog command on hold AHD Position command selection 1 CP1 Position command selection 2 CP2 Position command selection 3 CP3 Zero return limit signal ORL Zero return startup signal ORG Forward driving stop FOT Reverse driving stop ROT Speed Position switching SPD Pulse counter PCNT Pulse counter clear PCC No allocation no Thermistor input terminal 1 terminal Positive Negative temperature coefficient of resistance element switchable Output Multi function output 5 open collector output terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable 1 relay SPDT contact output terminal NO NC switchable Terminal function 6 functions can be selected from among 45 Signal during RUN RUN Constant speed arrival signal FA1 Over set frequency arrival signal FA2 Overload warning OL Excessive PID deviation OD Alarm signal AL Set frequency only arrival signal FA3 Overtorque OTQ Signal during momentary power interruption IP Signal during undervoltage UV Torque limit
60. TRQ RUN time exceeded RNT Power ON time exceeded ONT Thermal warning THM Brake release BRK Brake error BER 0 Hz signal ZS Excessive speed deviation DSE Position ready POK Set frequency exceeded 2 FA4 Set frequency only 2 FA5 Overload warning 2 OL2 Analog FV disconnection detection FVDc Analog FI disconnection detection FIDc Analog FE disconnection detection FEDc PID FB status output FBV Network error NDc Logic operation output 1 LOG1 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 Capacitor life warning WAC Cooling fan life warning WAF Starting contact signal FR Fin overheat warning OHF Light load detection signal LOC Operation ready IRDY Forward run FWR Reverse run RVR Fatal fault MJA Window comparator FV WCFV Window comparator FI WCFI Window comparator FE WCFE Alarm codes 0 to 3 ACO to AC3 Multi function monitor output terminal Analog voltage output Analog current output Pulse train output A F D F multiplied by n pulse output only A T V P etc Display monitor Output frequency Output current Output torque Frequency conversion value Trip record I O terminal status Electric power etc Other functions V f free setting 7 Upper lower frequency limit Frequency jump Curve acceleration deceleration
61. Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop P045 Operation setting at 02 ignore 01 communications error 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop 0 Basic speed I O 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O P046 Instance number 4 Extended control I O 1 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 00 Trip 3 01 Trip after deceleration stop P048 Operation setting at idle 02 Ignore 01 mode detection 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for rotation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 0 speed 30 32 34 36 38 P192 DeviceNet node address 0 to 63 0 4 122 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode MECHATROLINK II Communications Parameter No Function name Data Default setting 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes 00 P196 ML2 node address 21 to 3E21 4 123 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Functions That Need 3G3AX PG01 e Generally the Feedback Option Board 83G3AX PG01 is required for the following two cases e 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 e Pulse train frequency input is selected in any of the following parameters 06 pulse train frequency is selected in frequency reference selection A00
62. e Basically check the following during operation The motor operates according to the settings There are no errors in the installation environment There are no errors in the cooling system There are no abnormal vibrations or sounds There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration There are no abnormal odors e Check the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation e The voltage level between the wires is balanced Cleaning Always keep the Inverter clean for operation e Lightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent Note Do not use such solutions as acetone benzene toluene or alcohol for cleaning Doing so may cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off Do not use any detergent or alcohol to clean the Digital Operator display Periodic Inspection eCheck the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation as well as those that require periodic inspection Contact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections eCheck that there are no errors in the cooling system Sinus Clean the air filter eCheck that all parts that need tightening are secure ES Screws and bolts may become loose because of vibration or temperature change eCheck that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and or insulators eMeasurement of insulation resistance eCheck and replace the c
63. gt Transfer data using command 01 To transfer feedback data set the most significant byte of frequency data to 1 Example To send 5 Hz Transmission data is set value x 100 and expressed in 6 bytes 000500 Set the most significant byte to 1 100500 ASCII conversion 31 30 30 35 30 30 Note With ASCII data the set value is frequency Hz lt ModBus RTU C078 01 gt Write data in holding register address 0006h 100 10000 Register No Function name Function code R W Montier ceia ame seting Data resolution parameters 0006h PID feedback R W O to 10000 0 01 Note You can read and write data However you can read data only when ModBus RTU is selected for the PID feedback Data cannot be read under other settings lf 03 pulse train input is set for PID feedback A076 the Inverter obtains a percent conversion result 100 at max frequency as a feedback value relative to the input pulse train frequency value Hz Feedforward Selection e Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID feedforward selection A079 e The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal selected for target value or feedback value input If A079 is set to disabled feedforward control is disabled Reverse PID Function Depending on the sensor characteristics the polarity of deviation between the target and feedback value
64. may result in failure This function therefore shuts off the output and displays an error if the DC Is there any rapid deceleration voltage between P and N exceeds Increase the deceleration time o the specified level because of Is there any ground fault vervolt A age trip regenerative energy from the motor E07 0 Check the output wires and motor or increase of the incoming voltage Has the motor been rotated driven from the during operation load side Trips when the DC voltage between Reduce regenerative energy P and N reaches approximately 400 V DC for 200 V class and 800 V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output and displays an ra large electrical noise source EEPROM tor if an error occurs in the Sunen Countermeasures against electrical noise EEPROM because of external noise ed error E08 0 Has the cooling efficiency been reduced 2 3 or abnormal temperature rise Check that there is no clogging in the cooling Note This may be a CPU error depending on the case fan and fin if so clean it Replace the cooling fan if faulty 1 The reset command is not accepted until approximately 10 seconds after the trip occurs protection function works The reset command is not accepted if the EEPROM error E08 0 occurs Turn off the power once If you find 2 E08 when turning on the power again it is possible that the internal memory element of the drive has been damaged or the
65. to Not used 1485h 1486h Output 11 ON delay C130 R W 0 1 s 1487h Output 11 OFF delay C131 R W 0 1 s 1488h Output 12 ON delay C132 R W 0 1 s 1489h Output 12 OFF delay C133 R W 0 1 s 148Ah Output 13 ON delay C134 R W 0 1 s 148Bh Output 13 OFF delay C135 R W 0 1 s 0 to 1000 o 148Ch Output 14 ON delay C136 R W 0 1 s 148Dh Output 14 OFF delay C137 R W 0 1 s 148Eh Output 15 ON delay C138 R W 0 1 s 148Fh Output 15 OFF delay C139 R W 0 1 s 1490h Relay output ON delay C140 R W 0 1 s 1491h Relay output OFF delay C141 R W 0 1 s Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 Kan 49an selection 1 ee RAN except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 1493h selection 2 mI RW except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 1 CAND 1494h 091C Output Signa C144 RW 1 0R operator selection 2 XOR 4 204 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Bodie Function name Pee R W Monitor and setting parameters ae ole No code tion Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 13990 selection 1 E143 AAN except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 S 14961 selection 2 cw PAN except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 2 ZAND 1497h een eaa C147 RW 1 0R oF 2 XOR Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to C026 1498h selection 1 Gite BW except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to
66. 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 6 Cc c166 NPUt terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 7 c167 et terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 8 c168 FW terminal response 4 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time o Multi step speed 4 16 2 C169 position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 No ms 4 437 fe determination time 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 29 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter f Default ie N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Not rotate 00 No 4 111 02 Rotate Hoo2 Motor parameter 00 Standard motor parameter 00 4 111 selection 01 Auto tuning parameter No a aaa 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter H202 00 4 115 5 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled 3 H003 Motor capacity Factory g selection default a 0 20 to 160 0 No kW re H203 2nd motor capacity Factory 4 19 5 selection default 4 111 O 4 115 Motor pole number H004 selection 4 4 118 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole H204 2nd motor pole 4 number selection H005 Speed response 1 590 0 001 to 80 000 Yes 7 gt H205 2nd speed response 1 590 gt 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008
67. 00 No 4 46 Electronic Thermal b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 No Hz b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 33 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ie N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed Overload limit Operation b021 selection 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 mar 0 4 to 55 kW x pore overload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated NO ie 75 to 132 kW current pozz Qvetoad limit 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 4 49 5 00 Disabled E 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 ee operation a b024 Overload am 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No selection 2 5 03 Enabled in acceleration cons
68. 00 10 CRC 16 MSB DB 11 CRC 16 LSB 3E 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 Since the change data comprises of both MSB and LSB as a set make the byte to be an even number by adding 1 even if the byte that actually needs to be changed is an odd number 4 171 If writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Holding Register 10h gt Writes into consecutive multiple holding registers Example Set acceleration time 1 F002 to 3000 sec for the Inverter with slave address 1 The data resolution of the holding register 1103h 1104h of acceleration time 1 F002 is 0 01 sec onds To set to 3000 seconds set data to 300000 493E0h Query Response No Field name cad No Field name one 1 Slave address 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Start address MSB 11 3 Start address MSB 11 4 Start address LSB 02 4 Start address LSB 02 5 eee of holding registers 00 5 ee of holding registers 00 6 ie of holding registers 02 6 ie of holding registers 02 7 Number of bytes 04 7 CRC 16 MSB E5 8 Change data 1 MSB 00 8 CRC 16 LSB 34 9 Change data 1 LSB 04 10 Change data 2 MSB 93 11 Change data 2 LSB E0 12 CRC 16 MSB 9E 13 CRC 16 LSB 9
69. 00 No 4 99 02 4 bit C063 0 Hz detection level 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 No Hz 4 99 Goga M ovemgatwarnin g 10 20 120 No C 4 103 level 02 Loop back test Communication 03 2400 bps C071 speed selection 04 4800 bps 05 No Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps coza COMMUN Anta is il Nor on station No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit C073 length selection 8 8 bit 8 ne E Cc 2 pr oh 00 No parity 4 140 S cova ees ena 01 Even 00 No 2 parny 02 Odd O 5 Communication stop 1 1 bit oO core bit selection 2 2 bit 1 Do 00 Trip fe Comm nicationerior 01 Trip after deceleration stop O co76 02 Ignore 02 No selection j 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop 6077 COMMUNICATION errot lg gatgGo 99 0 00 No Se ee timeout 4 140 goza Communication walt 5 Foggo o No ms ee 4 140 Communication 00 ASCII oe method selection 01 ModBus RTU 9 NO _ 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 46 uoie19do Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ES N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation C081 O adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory aad it eae ll 3 default C082 Ol adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory voes Ges ne default a cos3 02 adjustment 0 to 65535 Fact
70. 1 TA response time 4 o w c164 pul terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 No ms 4106 response time 5 D z Z ctes nputtermina 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 6 Cc Cisse terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 7 c167 et terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 8 c168 FW terminal response 4 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time o Multi step speed 4 16 2 C169 position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 No MS 4132 fe determination time 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 49 3 9 Parameter List Parameter f Default ie N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Not rotate 00 No 4 109 02 Rotate Hoo2 Motor parameter 00 Standard motor parameter 00 selection 01 Auto tuning parameter 45109 No 4 111 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter H202 00 4 113 5 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled 3 H003 Motor capacity Factory g selection default a 0 20 to 160 0 No kW re H203 2nd motor capacity Factory 4 19 5 selection default 4 109 O 4 113 Motor pole number H004 selection 4 4 116 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole H204 2nd motor pole 4 number selection H005 Speed response 1 590 x 0 001 to 80 000 Yes j x H205 2nd speed response 1 590 7 2nd 3rd con
71. 4 8 time 1 F004 Operator rotation 00 Forward 00 No S 4 9 direction selection 01 Reverse 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 3 Appendix 1 Parameter List Extended Function Mode Parameter A Default aioe N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Frequency reference 03 ModBus communication 4 10 pO selection 04 Option 1 Re Ne 4 143 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Drive programming 10 Operation function result 01 Terminal D 02 Digital Operator F001 Cc Eliaga econ ea 03 ModBus communication 02 No 4 11 selection S 04 Option 1 Y 05 Option 2 4 11 A003 Base frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 60 4 112 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 60 No ae 4 11 A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 60 A004 Maximum frequency 30 to 400 60 2nd maximum A204 frequency 30 to 400 60 No Hz 4 12 aaga e mamam 30 to 400 60 frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 4 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Paramet
72. 4 Communication Function ModBus RTU Method Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external controller and the Inverter 1 1 External controller Inverter Wait time silent interval C078 3 Communication error timeout C077 Operates according to communication error selection C076 when reception times out 1 Frame to be sent from the external control device to the Inverter Query 2 Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external controller Response 3 Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077 after the Inverter completes a response response transmission the Inverter becomes ready to receive the first data again In this case the Inverter sends no response Also the Inverter s operation conforms to the setting of communication error selection C076 For details refer to the following table The receiving timeout monitor starts after the first transmission reception is performed after power on or reset Receiving timeout is inactive until reception or transmission is performed Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Trip Trip after receiving timeout E41 01 Trip after stop Deceleration stop after receiving timeout Trip after stop E41 02 Ignored No trip and no alarm output 02 03 FRS Free run stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output 04 Deceleration s
73. 400 00 Outputs arrival signal during 0 0 Hz Arrival frequency during acceleration C045 acceleration 2 C043 Arrival frequency during deceleration 0 00 Does not output arrival signal during deceleration 0 01 to 400 00 Outputs arrival signal during 0 0 Hz C046 Arrival frequency during deceleration deceleration 2 e For elevating machines use this signal for applying the brake To release the brake use the overtorque signal e Allocate 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 Set frequency exceeded 06 FA3 Set frequency only 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 or 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 e Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz If 06 FA3 or 25 FAS is set however operation during acceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz and operation during deceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz 4 98 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Constant Speed Arrival Output 01 FA1 A signal is output when the output frequency has reached the level set in the frequency setting F001 A020
74. 540 eminin Note that replacing the smoothing capacitor requires 22 cm or more When several RX models are installed in an enclosure and a ventilation fan is mounted in the enclosure be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures Depending on the internal layout of the panel the Inverter s cooling effect may deteriorate resulting in an increase in ambient temperature Also use thorough caution in making sure that the Inverter s ambient temperature is within the allowable operating temperature range A Ventilation fan Ay Ventilation fan Inverter Inverter PZ Correct example Incorrect example e Before installing the Inverter place a cover over all the ventilation openings to shield them from foreign objects After completing the installation process be sure to remove the covers from the Inverter before operation e Below is the heat radiation according to the Inverter capacity Inverter capacity kw 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 Load with 70 loss W 64 76 102 127 179 242 312 435 575 698 Load with 100 loss W 70 88 125 160 235 325 425 600 800 975 Efficiency at rated output 85 1 89 5 92 3 93 2 94 0 94 4 94 6 94 8 94 9 95 0 Inverter capacity kw 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Load with 70 loss W 820 1100 1345 1625 1975 2675 3375 3900 4670 Load with 100 loss W 1150 1550 1900 2300 2800 3800 48
75. 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled 9043 selection 01 Enabled 0g No gt vee 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 15 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b046 Reverse rotation prevention selection 00 01 Disabled Enabled 00 No 4 59 b049 Dual rate selection 00 01 Constant torque Variable torque 00 No b050 Selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption 00 01 02 03 Disabled Enabled deceleration stop Enabled without recovery Enabled with recovery 00 No b051 Starting voltage of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 No b052 Stop deceleration level of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 0 to 1000 0 360 720 No Others b053 Deceleration time of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 No 4 60 b054 Deceleration starting width of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No b055 Proportional gain setting of non stop function at momentary power inter
76. A014 A104 100 Analog input O A013 A103 A014 A104 100 Analog input 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA 0 01 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA 0 Ol 4 14 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Adjusting the O2 L Terminal Parameter No Function name Data Detel Unit setting 400 00 to 400 00 A111 O2 start frequency Set a start frequency 0 00 z 400 00 to 400 00 A112 O2 end frequency Set an end frequency 0 00 100 to 100 A113 O2 start ratio Set a start ratio relative to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V a 100 to 100 A114 O2 end ratio Set an end ratio relative to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 Below is the ratio from 10 to 10 V 10 to 0 V 100 to 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 ie e For example to input voltage ranging from 5 to 5 V on the O2 L terminal set A113 to 50 and A114 to 50 Example 3 cov A112 100 A113 A114 100 Analog input A111 10 V 02 Reverse max frequency O O2 Ol Sampling e You can set the built in filter applied to frequency setting signals of the external voltage current input Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 31 Time Related functions A011 to A016 C001 to C008 Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit e Set a larger data value if stable operation
77. A4055 A4075 be sure to install the terminal block screw washers with their grooved sides aligned vertically as shown below Not doing so may result in a contact failure or fire Intended terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 PD 1 P N U T1 V T2 W T3 RB Terminal block screw washer 2 14 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring E Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals The terminal arrangement on the Inverter main circuit terminal block is shown below Terminal arrangement Applicable model R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bai attached CHARGE LED indicator PD 1 P short circuit ba EMC filter function switching method Dummy plug In order to enable the EMC filter green function set up the plug inserted into the filter enable pin J61 and filter disable pin J62 as shown in the table below Confirm that NI electrical power has been my J disconnected before performing this setup Not doing so may result in electric shock Also use with the plug inserted J61 Filter disable pin J62 Filter enable pin J61 Dummy plug green Short plug Filter disable pin J62 Short plug Dummy plug green EMC filter disabled EMC filter enabled factory default 3G3RX A2004 to A2037 3
78. A4220 30 kW 3G3RX A4300 37 kW 3G3RX A4370 45 kW 3G3RX A4450 55 kW 3G3RX A4550 75 kW 3G3RX B4750 90 kw 3G3RX B4900 e 110 kW 3G3RX B411K 132 kW 3G3RX B413K 1 1 Functions International Standards Models EC Directives and UL cUL Standards The RX Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL cUL standard requirements for worldwide use Classification Applicable standard EC Directives EMC Directive EN61800 3 2004 Low voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 UL cUL Standards UL508C Human Environment friendly High performance General purpose Inverters Suitable for Various Advanced Applications HHigh Performance High Starting Torque With the vector control and auto tuning functions the RX Series has achieved high starting torque in excess of 200 at 0 3 Hz Trip Suppression This Inverter features two trip suppression functions Overcurrent trip suppression function to suppress overcurrent trip during acceleration and Overvoltage suppression function during deceleration to suppress overvoltage trip during deceleration Therefore the RX Series provides tough operational capabilities regardless of the severe time setting of acceleration and deceleration HVarious Applications Sensor less Vector Control at 0 Hz The RX Series provides sensor less vector control which is useful for up down applications It can provide a high torque of 150 even at a speed reference of 0 Hz 150 torque is availab
79. App 30 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default oa N Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page o setting operation H006 Stabilization 100 parameter Hage 2ndstablization g to 255 100 Yes 4 120 parameter H306 3rd stabilization 100 parameter Depends H020 Motor parameter R1 oni motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q Depends H220 2nd motor on the parameter R1 motor capacity Depends H021 Motor parameter R2 onne motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 4 115 Depends 2nd motor on the g nee parameter R2 motor z capacity T Depends H022 Motor parameter L onthe Z motor O capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No mH Depends H222 2nd motor on the parameter L motor capacity Depends H023 Motor parameter lo oning motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A Depends H223 2nd motor on the parameter lo motor capacity 4 115 Depends H024 Motor parameter J onte motor capacity 5 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm Depends H224 2nd motor on the parameter J motor capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 31 Appendix 1 Parameter List Changes Peremeter Function name Monitor or data range Desau during Unit Page No setting operation Depends H030
80. C026 1499M selection 2 oi a except LOG1 to 6 Logi tput signal 3 HAND 149Ah PRE es a C150 RW 1 0R operator selectio 2 XOR Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 Sec selection 1 6131 nee except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 1436h selection 2 Cire ce except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 4 VAND 149Dh A iene ay C153 RW 1 0R P 2 XOR Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 S gn selection 1 oS PUMN except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 TASEN selection 2 G13 RAY except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 5 OAND 14A0h o ao ee C156 RW 1 0R p 2 XOR Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 a eset selection 1 CiS TA except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 S a selection 2 Glee ny except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 6 vehi 14A3h EAA a C159 RW 1 0R P 2 XOR 14A4h e aa response C160 RW_ 0to 200 x 2ms 1 14a5h PUR terminal response C161 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 2 q4a6h NPU terminal response C162 R W 0to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 3 fanz HOUT terminal response C163 RW_ 0to 200 x 2ms 1 time 4 q4agh Input terminal response C164 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 5 anon NPU terminal response C165 RW_ 0to 200 x 2ms 1 time 6 14aah MPU terminal response C166 RW_ 0to 200 x 2ms 1 time 7 4 205 4 4 Communication Function
81. C053 ON level ON FW o ON FBV ol lr ee EPID Feedback Value Monitor e You can monitor the PID feedback value e The monitor value is displayed as the product of the feedback value and PID scale A075 Monitor display Feedback value x A075 setting EPID Integral Reset Clears the integral value of PID operation Allocate 24 PIDC to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip Turn on the PIDC terminal after turning off PID operation AVR Function e This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates With this function output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 02 OFF during deceleration 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 Related functions d004 A001 A005 A082 AVR voltage selection 200 400 With A081 AVR selection set whether to enable or disable this function eNote that the Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage e To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00
82. C082 R W 0 to 65530 1 1457h O2 adjustment C083 R W 0 to 65530 1 1458h Not used 1459h Thermistor adjustment C085 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 145Ah to Not used 145Eh 145Fh Not used 1460h to Not used 1468h 1469h UP DWN selection C101 p w 0 Does not store the frequency data 1 Stores the frequency data 4 203 4 4 Communication Function BIS Function name Ue R W Monitor and setting parameters Ree olt No code tion 0 Trip reset at power on 1 Trip reset at power off 146Ah Reset selection C102 R W 2 Enabled only during trip Reset at power on 3 Trip reset only Reset frequency matchin Cee start 146Bh nee y 9 C103 R W 1 Frequency matching start 2 Active Frequency Matching restart 146Ch Not used 146Dh FM gain setting C105 R W 50 to 200 1 146Eh AM gain setting C106 R W 50 to 200 1 146Fh AMI gain setting C107 R W 50 to 200 1 1470h Not used 1471h AM bias setting C109 R W O to 100 1 1472h AMI bias setting C110 R W O to 100 1 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW gt 1473h Overload warning level 2 C111 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1474h to Not used 147Ch 147Dh O zero adjustment C121 R W 0 to 65530 1 147Eh Ol zero adjustment C122 R W 0 to 65530 1 147Fh O2 zero adjustment C123 R W 0 to 65530 1 1480h
83. Enabled only during constant speed 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 1427h Light load detection level C039 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 Ovenoadiwarnina sidnal 0 Enabled during acceleration 1428h Sutp t mode 9 S19 C040 R W deceleration constant speed p 1 Enabled only during constant speed 0 0 Does not operate 1429h Overload warning level C041 R W 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 142Ah ree R W Arrival frequency during 0 01 A 0 to 40000 acceleration C042 aan Hz 142Bh LOW 142Ch os R W Arrival frequency during HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 deceleration C043 Hz 142Dh LOW R W 142Eh i ere excessive co44 Rw Oto 1000 0 1 142Fh C049 R W Arrival frequency during HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 acceleration 2 C045 Hz 1430h LOW R W 1431h S apa R W Arrival frequency during HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 deceleration 2 C046 Hz 1432h LOW R W 1433h to Not used 1437h 1438h PID FB upper limit C052 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 1439h PID FB lower limit C053 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 143Ah Not used Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 6 on Forward power running con RAN 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Wal Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 3 1436h Reverse regeneration ene PUNY 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Pa Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b 14901 Reverse power running SO RW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Pa Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW TAREN Forward regen
84. If the cable length exceeds 20 m particularly with 400 V class a surge voltage may be generated at the motor terminal due to stray capacitance or inductance of the cable causing the motor to burn out To connect several motors provide a thermal relay for each The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1 1 times of the motor rated current The relay may trip easily depending on the cable length In this case connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output MDC Reactor Connection Terminal PD 1 P This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor for power factor improvement By factory default a short circuit bar has been connected between the terminals PD 1 and P Before connecting the DC reactor remove this short circuit bar The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or less If the DC reactor is not used do not remove the short circuit bar If you remove the short circuit bar without connecting the DC reactor no power is supplied to the Inverter main circuit disabling operation External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal P RB Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal P N 2 13 The Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability mount the optional external braking resistor to this terminal Do not mount a resistor whose resistance is lower than the specified value Doing so may damage the regenerative braking
85. Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Windications and Meanings of Safety Information In this user s manual the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the RX Inverter The information provided here is vital to safety Strictly observe the precautions provided Meanings of Signal Words N WARNING Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided is likely to result in serious injury or may result in death Additionally there may be severe property damage CA UTI N Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage BAlert Symbols in this Document N WARNING Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being s
86. Mode Starting Contact Signal While the Inverter is receiving the RUN command a starting contact signal is output e The output is enabled regardless of the setting of RUN command source selection A002 lf inputs FW and RV are simultaneously turned on the Inverter stops Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output _ terminal selection 41 FR starting contact signal Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 05 function selection Forward command Reverse command Starting contact signal FR Fin Overheat Warning e This function monitors the Inverter s internal fin temperature and outputs a signal when the temperature exceeds the fin overheat warning level C064 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output o terminal selection 42 OHF cooling fin overheat warning C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C064 Fin n warning 0 to 200 Set a temperature to output the 120 C overheat warning signal 4 105 4 2 Function Mode Light Load Detection Signal e This signal is output when output current falls below the light load detection level C039 eIn light load signal output mode C038 you can set whether this output is enabled in any operation mode or only in constant speed operation Parameter No Function
87. Motor parameter R1 on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor se H230 parameter R1 Ong motor auto tuning data capacity Depends H031 Motor parameter R2 on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 2nd motor ee H231 parameter R2 ae auto tuning data capacity Depends is Motor parameter L on the Ree auto tuning data motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No mH 47 a 2nd motor a hi H232 parameter L on me Q f motor o auto tuning data capacity Depends H033 Motor parameter lo on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A 2nd motor pike H233 parameter lo Rei auto tuning data capacity Depends H034 Motor parameter J on the auto tuning data motor capacity 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm 2nd motor nevi H234 parameter J pel auto tuning data capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 32 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciemas Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes H250 2nd PI proportional 100 0 gain H051 PI integral gain 100 0 i 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes gt H251 2nd PI i
88. O main circuit terminals Anas i phases in single U T1 V T2 and 400 V pte Control Inverter run WITS 8 V max Digital circuit Operation multimeter Protection check Check that there Rectifier circuit as Short circuit or open Voltmeter pi AER the Inverter protection Error is found in display circuits O ae circuit output under the sequence through sequence Pe simulated conditions protection operation Check that there Rotates are no abnormal O Rotate manually smoothly vibration or when the power is off No faults Cooling fan Sounds Reference of pein Check that the the replacement y connection parts O Visual inspection period 10 years are secure a8 Fin Checkthatthere iS O Visual inspection No clogging no clogging Check that the Check that the LED indicatorsare O Visual inspection LED indicators Display lit properly are lit properly Clean with a soft Display Cleaning 2 cloth Check that the Check the indicated The specified or ope control values Voltmeter Meter indicated value is O values on the panel must be ammeter normal meters oi satisfied 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement
89. OFF 0038h LOGS logic operation output 5 R ON uae P 0 OFF 0039h LOG6 logic operation output 6 R ON aOR p 0 OFF 003Ah WAC capacitor life warning R aS P g 0 OFF 003Bh WAF cooling fan life warning R ON g g 0 OFF 003Ch FR starting contact signal R TON 0 OFF 003Dh OHF fin overheat warning R ION 9 0 OFF 1 ON 003Eh LOC low current signal R 0 OFF 003Fh Not used 0040h Not used 0041h Not used 0042h Not used 0043h Not used 0044h Not used 1 ON 0045h IRDY operation ready R 0 OFF 1 ON 0046h FWR forward run signal R 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 176 suoioun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description 1 ON 0047h RVR reverse run signal R 0 OFF 1 ON 0048h MJA fatal fault signal R 0 OFF s 1 Writing 0049h During data write R 0 Normal 1 Error 004Ah CRC error R 0 No eror 2 004Bh Overrun error R E Eror 0 No error 2 f 1 Error 004Ch Framing error R 0 No er
90. P put typ 02 Option 2 00 Terminal O 01 Terminal Ol Torque reference 02 Terminal O2 HEE input selection 03 Digital Operator ve Ne _ 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 4 127 Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW r P034 Setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW BE ee a lt 2 Polarity selection at 00 Signed pogs oe rererence via 01 Depends on the RUN direction ue Ne a 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 34 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default oa Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 None 01 Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 Terminal O2 00 No 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 4 127 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW SAR P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Yes o Torque bias polarity 00 Signed a R938 selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction og Me Speed limit value in P039 _ torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz forward 4 127 Speed limit value in P040 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz reverse DeviceNet comm P044 Watch dog timer 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 No s 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop po45 Operation setting at 02 ignore of No communications error s 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop wn 6 0 Basic speed I
91. R W Oto 1000 Hz 125Ch jae R W Acceleration stop 0 to 40000 0 01 frequency A069 Hz 125Dh LOW 125Eh Acceleration stop time A070 R W 0 to 600 0 1 s 0 Disabled 125Fh PID selection A071 R W 1 Enabled 2 Reverse output enabled 1260h PID P gain A072 R W 2to50 0 1 1261h PID I gain A073 R W 0 to 36000 0 1 s 4 187 4 4 Communication Function Regjetar Function name Puce R W Monitor and setting parameters Ree oilt No code tion 1262h PID D gain A074 R W 0 to 10000 0 01 s 1263h PID scale A075 R W 1 to 9999 0 01 0 Input Ol 1 Input O 1264h PID feedback selection A076 R W 2 RS485 communication 3 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 1265h Reverse PID function Aoz Raw esanen 1 Enabled 1266h PID output limit function A078 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 s 0 Disabled 1267h PID feedforward selection A079 rw Inputo 2 Input Ol 3 Input O2 1268h Not used 0 Always ON 1269h AVR selection A081 R W 1 Always OFF 2 OFF during deceleration 200 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 126Ah AVR voltage selection A082 R W 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 126Bh Not used 126Ch Not used 0 Normal operation 126Dh RUN mode selection A085 R W 1 Energy saving operation 2 Automatic operation 126Eh Energy
92. Relay output AL2 AL1 07 OTQ Overtorque signal C026 05 function selection 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C055 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 o Forward power running OTQ signal output level for forward i power running 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C056 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 o Reverse regeneration OTQ signal output level for reverse i regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C057 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 o Reverse power running OTQ signal output level for reverse i power running 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C058 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 400 Forward regeneration OTQ signal output level for forward regeneration Related functions A044 A244 A344 C063 e Enabled when overtorque signal is selected in the multi function output selection You can use this function only when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 With other settings the output is unstable e For elevating machines use this signal for releasing the brake To close the brake use the frequency arrival signal 4 100 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Detection Signal e This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter s output frequency falls below the 0 Hz detection value set in 0 Hz detection le
93. Rw er stant Medueney 1288h to Not used 128Ch 128Dh ATII R W HIGH 0 01 O2 start frequency reer 40000 to 40000 Hz 128Eh LOW R W 128Fh en R W O2 end frequency a 40000 to 40000 He 1290h LOW R W 1291h O2 start ratio A113 R W 100 to O2 end ratio 1 1292h O2 end ratio A114 R W O2 start ratio to 100 1 1293h to Not used 12A4h 4 189 4 4 Communication Function BOSS Function name use R W Monitor and setting parameters Hee ol No code tion A N ae A131 R W 1 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter E e A132 R W 1 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter 12A7h to Not used 12AEh 0 Digital Operator F001 1 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 2 Input O Operation frequency input 3 Input Ol earn A setting ATAI RN 4 R8485 communication _ 5 Option 1 6 Option 2 7 Pulse train frequency 0 Digital Operator F001 1 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 2 Input O Operation frequency input 3 Input Ol 12B0h B setting ATIE D 4 RS485 communication E 5 Option 1 6 Option 2 7 Pulse train frequency 0 Addition A B 12Bih Operator selection A143 R W 1 Subtraction A B 2 Multiplication A x B 12B2h Not used 12B3h o aed R W Frequency addition 0 to 40000 0 01 amount A145 RN Hz 12B4h LOW 12B5h Frequency addition A146 R W iM Frequency reference A145 5 directio
94. board suppressing signal reflection External controller d o d p e SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN Setting RS485 communication requires the following settings Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 02 Loop back test Communication speed 03 2400 bps C071 selection 04 4800 bps 05 Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps C072 Communication station 1 to 247 1 o No selection Communication bit 7 7 bits coa length selection 8 8 bits S E ae 00 No parity C074 a are parity 01 Even 00 02 Odd Communication stop bit 1 1 bit oe selection 2 2 bits 1 _ 00 Trip Commu nicatonerror 01 Trip after deceleration stop C076 02 Ignore 02 selection 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 Communication 0 00 timeout disconnection judgment time 4 145 4 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C078 Communication waitime 0 to 1000 Time to wait for response from 0 ms the Inverter C079 Communication method 00 ASCII method 01 _ selection 01 ModBus RTU method Related functions A001 A002 HCommunication Test Mode e The communication test mode allows you to check the RS485 communication line hardware Communication Test Mode Procedure 1 Before conducting a loop back test disconnect the cable from TM2 on t
95. byte CR 0x0D 4 155 4 4 Communication Function e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Each monitor s data at the time of 440 bytes tripping Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Each trip monitor stores the past six trips together with total trip count 8 bytes Total count Trip data 1 cocecococoooe Trip data 6 Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Note Trip factor 8 bytes Code display Inverter status A 8 bytes Inverter status B 8 bytes See Command 04 gt Inverter status C 8 bytes MSB Output frequency Hz x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Total RUN time h x 1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ai Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code DC voltage V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power ON time h x 1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code lt Command 06 gt Reads a setting item e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the
96. cannot be secured because of noise Note that the larger the data value is the slower the response time This parameter specifies a filter time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 x 2 ms When 31 is selected a filter time constant of 500 ms and a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz are set Factory default 4 15 4 2 Function Mode Multi step Speed Operation Function e You can set RUN speeds using codes and switch between the set speeds via the terminal For multi step speed operation you can select either 4 terminal binary operation with 16 steps max or 7 terminal bit operation with 8 steps max Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals A019 Multi step speed selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 00 terminals A020 Multi step speed reference 0 2nd multi step speed A220 reference 0 6 0 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 0 0 Starting frequency to z A023 Multi step speed reference 3 Max frequency A024 Multi step speed reference 4 A025 Multi step speed reference 5 0 0 A026 Multi step speed reference 6 A027 Multi step speed reference 7 A028 to A035 Multi step speed references 8 to 15 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on e During multi step speed o
97. carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 kHz are exceeded the Inverter may be damaged and or the service life may be shortened Parameter Initialization e You can initialize the rewritten set values and reset to the factory default e You can clear trip data e You cannot clear the P100 to P131 set values RUN time or power ON time Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Clears the trip monitor 01 Initializes data 02 Clears the trip monitor and initializes re s data b084 Initialization selection 03 Clears the trip monitor and 00 parameters 04 Clears the trip monitor parameters and Drive program b085 Initialization parameter 01 Do not change 01 _ selection ame f 00 No action b180 Initialization trigger 01 Initialize 00 4 69 4 2 Function Mode Blnitialization Method Refer to 3 5 Test Run Operation STOP Key Selection When control circuit terminal block is selected for the RUN command you can set whether the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is used to activate the STOP command and trip reset op eration command selection A002 Refer to RUN Command Selection page 4 11 If 02 Digital Operator is selected in A002 the STOP command and trip reset operation are enabled regardless of this setting e This setting is enabled when any item other than 02 Digital Operator is selected in RUN Paramet
98. circuit The Inverters with 30 kW or higher capacity do not incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability the optional regenerative braking unit and braking resistor are required In this case connect the regenerative braking unit terminals to the Inverter terminals P N The cable length should be 5 m or less Twist the two wires Do not connect any device other than the optional regenerative braking unit or external braking resistor to this terminal 2 2 Wiring Ground Terminal GS e To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor e According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations the 200 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type D grounding conditions conventional type 3 grounding ground resistance 100 Q or less the 400 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type C grounding conditions conventional special type 3 grounding ground resistance 10 Q or less e For the ground cable use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Make the cable length as short as possible e When several Inverters are connected the ground cable must not be connected across several Inverters and must not be looped Otherwise the Inverters may malfunction Your ground bolt installing Screws in the Main Circuit Terminal Block e For the main circuit terminal blocks of 3G3RX A2055 A2075
99. code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data 2 bytes 01 Enabled Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Negative response Refer to page 4 160 lt Command 0A gt Stores a set value in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes OA Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 160 Negative response Refer to page 4 160 4 159 4 4 Communication Function lt Command OB gt Re calculates internal parameters Recalculation is required when the base frequency and H parameters are changed via RS485 communication e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command
100. contact closed A terminal with reset RS setting function only can be set as NO contact Related functions C001 to C008 4 81 4 2 Function Mode 2nd 3rd Control Function e You can switch between three motors to control the Inverter by allocating 08 SET 17 SET3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 and then turning on off the SET SET3 terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 Multi function input 1 selection C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection C004 Multi function input 4 selection C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 TE 12 13 14 15 16 TZ 18 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 TAx 72 73 74 75 82 no RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step ac
101. control circuit terminal block lf you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again Analog Command Hold Function While the AHD terminal is turned on the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 to coog Multi function inputs 65 AHD analog command held z 1 to 8 selection While the AHD terminal is turned on you can use the UP DWN function based on the reference value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function lf UP DWN selection C101 is set to 01 the Inverter can store an UP DWN result e If the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on or if the RS terminal is turned on and then off the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before AHD terminal ON l Analog input value Frequency reference Note1 If the control function is switched via the SET SET3 terminal with the AHD terminal turned on the set frequency is retained To change the control function turn off the AHD terminal once and keep the analog signal on hold again Note 2 If this function is frequently used the internal storage element service life may be shortened 4 93 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC e The
102. device Chapter 2 Design design selection instructions and other information necessary for design Describes names of parts the Inverter s operations including how to use Chapter 35 Operation the keys on the Digital Operator and the monitor function Chapter 4 Functions Describes the functions of the Inverter Chapter 5 Maintenance Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails P Operations including the solutions to possible troubles troubleshooting Inspection and Describes items for periodical inspection and or maintenance for the Chapter 6 Maintenance Inverter Provides Inverter specifications as well as the specifications and Chapter Specifications dimensions of peripheral devices Describes the summarized parameter settings as a reference for users Appendix who have used this Inverter and understood the functions oo Contents Introduction seinien ta ah ii nth a Rtas ead is haha 1 Read and Understand this Manual ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeaneeees 2 Satety Precautions asenon A N a E E 5 Precautions tor Sate USE aaia aa ease es 7 Precautions for Correct WSC oi ccc neki cal berated sts ok sates 8 Checking Before Unpacking c eccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneaeaaaneeeeeeeees 10 FROVISIOMTELISLONY cq ccc te cure aces oy sana nS eara seattle de ante eac amines 11 Abo t EIS Ma al rret tare ahi ak eld ean cL EA AAEE aaa TEA
103. error if a timeout occurs in communication between the Inverter and digital command board E60 0 E70 0 Note Input mode is determined by the combination of DIP and rotary switches Check the settings of the DIP and rotary switches on the digital command board for any abnormal operation 5 7 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Function List of the DIP and Rotary Switches on the digital command board 8G3AX DI01 Rotary Resolution setting DIP switch j TYPE switch Acceleration Deceleration ave Posi CODE Set frequency limit tion time setting setting setting Switch No i Setting 0 01 Hz 0 1 Hz 1 Hz Rate 0 01 sec 0 1 sec 1 sec 1 1 pulse 1 2 code 0 1 O OFF 2 O Batch 3 O input 7 6 mode PAC 5 For factory adjustment Do not set 6 O ON 7toF For factory adjustment Do not set BCD 0 O input 1 O O BCD 5 O OFF Binary 3 O input 4 O O BIN ON Dividing __ 2 z input 6 O mode DIV 7 O O 8 O 9 O A O O B O CtoF For factory adjustment Do not set How to Read the Input Mode List Example 1 Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 1 Hz via binary input BIN in the batch input mode PAC TYPE CODE 1 2 OFF BIN OFF PAC Example 2 Switch setting when setting the frequenc
104. f l HIGH R W RUN time Power ON time 0 to 65535 1010h setting b034 RAW 1324h LOW Rotation direction limit 0 Forward Reverse enabled 1325h b035 R W 1 Forward only selection f 2 Reverse only 0 Reduced voltage startup time Short 1326h Reduced voltage startup b036 R W to selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time Long 4 192 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R ole No code tion 0 Complete display 1 Individual display of functions 1327h Display selection b037 R W 2 User setting b037 3 Data comparison display 4 Basic display 0 Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed 1 d001 1328h Initial screen selection b038 R W 2 d002 3 d003 4 d007 5 F001 User parameter automatic 0 Disabled 1290 setting function selection p039 RN 1 Enabled 0 Four quadrant separate setting 1 Terminal switching 132Ah_ Torque limit selection b040 R W 2 Analog Input 3 Option 1 4 Option 2 Torque limit 1 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Bh Four quadrant mode b041 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 forward power running Torque limit 2 g 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 132Ch Four quadrant mode b042 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 reversed regeneration Torque limit 3 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 132Dh Four quadrant
105. is turned on before the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 ground fault detection at power on is disabled To use a DC power supply for the control circuit power supply Ro To set the multi function output terminal contact selection C031 to C036 for the multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and relay output terminals AL2 AL1 ALO to 00 If the multi function output terminal contact selection is set to 01 the output signal may chatter when the DC power supply is turned off Tightening torque for terminals Ro and To M4 1 2 Nem 1 4 max 2 20 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Wiring Control Circuit Terminals e Terminals L and CM1 are insulated from each other via the input and output signal common terminals Do not short circuit or ground these common terminals Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment Check the external equipment ground conditions e For wiring the control circuit terminals use twisted shielded cables recommended size 0 75 mm and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal e The control circuit terminal connection cables should be 20 m or less e Separate the control circuit terminal connection cables from the main circuit cable power cable and the relay control circuit cable e For the connection of the TH thermistor input terminal twist cables with the terminal CM1 individually and separate them from other PLC common cables Since a weak cur
106. kQ 6 refer to Emergency Shutoff Function 7 page 2 10 Allowable max 8 voltage 2 Voltage between each input terminal E S and the PLC terminal s 27 VDC Q Lez O o D L Load current at 27 V Z 5 DC power supply el g voltage E Z Approx 5 6 mA a PLC Multi function input The sink and source logic for contact input can common be switched by connecting a short circuit bar on the control terminal block Short circuiting P24 and PLC Sink logic Short circuiting PLC and CM1 Source logic To activate contact input via an external power supply remove the short circuit bar and connect PLC terminal to the external interface circuit 11 Multi function output Select 5 functions from among 45 and allocate Between each 5 12 them to terminals 11 through 15 terminal and CM2 13 If an alarm code is selected in C062 terminals Voltage drop 4 V 5 14 11 to 13 or terminals 11 to 14 always output an max at power on g M 15 alarm factor code e g Inverter trip The signal DG between each terminal and CM2 always Max allowable 8 corresponds to the sink or source logic voltage 27 V DC elg a CM2 Multi function output Common terminals for multi function output Max allowable common terminals 11 to 15 current 50 mA AL2 Relay output Select the desired functions from among 45 Contact max AL1 functions and allocate them SPDT contact capacity output AL2 ALO 3 By factory default the relay output AL2 AL1 250 V AC 2 A
107. lL Output frequency A055 A052 lt iii During stop example 6 b FW Output frequency fh A055 A052 c gt 4 27 4 2 Function Mode internal DC Injection Braking Operates Only at the Set Frequency A051 02 DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the DC injection braking frequency A052 e Neither 2 external nor 3 internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected Operates only when the RUN command is turned on DC injection braking starts when both the reference and current frequencies become lower than A052 Example 7 a When the reference frequency exceeds the A052 set value by 2 Hz or more DC injection braking is released and the output returns to normal Example 7 a e If the reference frequency is 0 when the operation starts with analog input the initial operation is DC injection braking because both the reference and current frequencies are 0 Example 7 b lf the RUN command is turned on with the frequency reference established or a value larger than the A052 setting is input the initial operation is set to normal output Example 7 a Example 7 b ON ON RUN RUN command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference reference Output Output frequency frequency e The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC injection
108. logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 MO1 Drive programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive programming output 2 46 MO3 Drive programming output 3 aa oe 47 MO4 Drive programming output 4 48 MO5 Drive programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive programming output 6 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 63 OPO Option board output no Not used When C062 is used to select the alarm code output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 21 03 07 01 05 No 4 95 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 23 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C027 FM selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead o
109. matching start example 3 00 9 02 Active Frequency Matching restart eTo reset an Inverter trip press the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator or switch the RS terminal from ON to OFF e To reset via the control circuit terminal block allocate 18 RS to the desired multi function input e With reset frequency matching selection C103 you can select how to restart the Inverter after reset a frequency matching or 0 Hz start If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start increase the retry wait time b003 e You can select an alarm reset timing in reset selection C102 In addition you can enable the reset signal only for alarm resetting during error For the RS terminal only NO contact is available Note Do not use the reset terminal to shut off the Inverter output Reset operation clears the internal data e g electronic thermal BRD counter causing damage to the Inverter Example 1 Example 2 ea ne ae a a Alarm Alarm Example 3 If 01 frequency matching start is selected in reset frequency matching selection C103 frequency 4 87 matching start is also enabled when the power is turned on again When C103 00 0 Hz start the retry wait time b003 is ignored Even if frequency matching start is selected however the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates 4 2 Function Mode Pow
110. method for the speed control system between proportional integral compensation and proportional compensation when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V f characteristics 0S SP AASA pank A044 A244 A344 04 0 Hz A344 is blank 00 selection 05 Sensor vector Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 43 PPI P PI switching C001 to C008 H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 80 000 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 e If P PI switching is selected in the multi function input selection proportional integral compensation is enabled while the signal is off proportional compensation is enabled while the signal is on If P PI switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 proportional integral compensation is enabled Normally the Inverter performs proportional integral compensation P control PI control for speed control so that the difference between N K UNTO frequency reference and actual rom becomes zero If one loadis Torque operated by several motors however proportional control P control may be required To enable proportional control P control allocate the P PI switching function
111. mode b043 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 reversed power running Torque limit 4 i 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 6 132Eh Four quadrant mode b044 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 forward regeneration 132Fh Torque LADSTOP b045 R W 0 Disabled o selection 1 Enabled 1330h Reverse rotation l b046 R W Disabled S prevention selection 1 Enabled 1331h to Not used 1332h 1333h Dual rate selection b049 By iS Constant tengus 1 Variable torque 0 Disabled 1 Deceleration stop Selection OF norn stop 2 Momentary power interruption non 1334h function at momentary b050 R W i tary p P stop without recovery power interruption r 3 Momentary power interruption non stop with recovery Starting voltage of 4335h fon slop function at b051 R W Oto 10000 0 1 V momentary power interruption Starting deceleration level 4336h Of non stop function at b052 R W Oto 10000 0 1 V momentary power interruption 4 193 4 4 Communication Function Regies Function name Puede R W Monitor and setting parameters Re elu No code tion 1337h Deceleration time of en R W non stop function at 0 to 360000 0 01 s momentary power b053 1338h interruption LOW R W Deceleration starting width 1339h of non stop function at b054 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 momentary power Hz interruption Proportional gain setting of 153A Nor siop Turclion al boss Rw 0to
112. motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Opereren Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio isa Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power negative value parameter x 1 2 runnin io i g Speed change ratio is a Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set H021 H221 H031 positive value parameter x 0 8 7 Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 ___ Insufficient torque at low Parameter x 1 2 Regeneration frequency several Hz t ter duall t t ncrease motor parameter lo gradually up to se H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shock occurs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 startup startup During f Reduce the speed response H005 H205 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Insufficient torque at low During frequency during torque Set a overload limit level lower than that of the torque p92 torque limit limit i b041 to b044 Low frequency Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 operation A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 H003 H203 Related functions H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b0
113. occurs during deceleration momentary power interruption error E16 appears and the motor goes into free run status In this case increase the deceleration time When direct current P N is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro To the Inverter may detect undervoltage at power interruption and then trip If there is any problem with your system set 00 or 02 The Inverter may start at 0 Hz if The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Even if retry selection b001 is set to Retry 01 to 03 and selection of momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop b004 is set to Disabled 00 or 02 the Inverter trips when the actual momentary power interruption time exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption time Example 2 Even if the trip retry operation is selected the Inverter trips if the cause of the trip is not remedied after the retry wait time b003 elapses In this case increase the retry wait time Even if the retry operation is selected the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer If frequency matching start or Active Frequency Matching restart is selected for retry operation the Inverter abruptly restarts at power on by alarm reset or retry start e Below is the timing chart for frequency matching start retry selection b001 02 Note that the Inverter switches regardless of settings to the initial sta
114. on 4 8 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The set time here indicates the acceleration deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency Output frequency A Max frequency A004 A204 A304 By Output frequency set value Actual Actual gt acceleration deceleration time time lt gt F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 1 1 When the LAD cancel LAC function is selected in the multi function input selection and the signal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency e To switch between the 1st 2nd 3rd acceleration times or between the 1st 2nd 3rd deceleration times allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 79 and use the SET SET3 e You can set the acceleration deceleration time via 1 the Digital Operator 2 optional board 1 or 3 optional board 2 Even if a short acceleration deceleration time is set the actual time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and the motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum time an overcurrent overvoltage trip may occur Acceleration Time Ts Ji Inertia moment of the load converted to the motor shaft kg m2 Ju Inertia moment of the motor kg m Nw Motor rotation speed r min Ts Max acceleration
115. operation e The 1st 2nd 3rd control functions are displayed identically You ll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal is turned on off e When both SET and SET3 terminals are turned on priority is given to SET and the 2nd control function is enabled e During operation you cannot switch between the 1st 2nd and 3rd control functions You can switch them only during stop 4 83 2 D 2 e D gt 4 2 Function Mode External Trip e This function trips the Inverter via an error trip signal from a peripheral system To use this function allocate 12 EXT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Sets the motor to free run status by shutting off output 12 EXT External trip OFF The motor is in normal operation Available input terminals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inverter may not store data correctly When the EXT terminal is turned on E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to stop output eWhen the Inverter has tripped indicating E12 the trip is not reset even if the error signal from external equipment is reset EXT terminal is turned off To reset the trip perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function RUN commands FW RV EXT terminal ee ee Free run
116. option it will be possible to handle four sets of inverter pa rameters or read write an Drive Programming program independently In this case LCD digital operator can save four sets of inverter parameters or one set of inverter parameters and one Drive Programming program Please note that one Drive Programming program takes up three sets of inverter parameters which are No 2 No 3 and No 4 Note Refer to LCD Line Digital Operator User s Manual for more information 3 6 Test Run Operation 3 6 Test Run Operation Power On Checkpoints Before Turning On the Power e Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly 3G3RX A20 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC 3G3RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correctly e Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off e Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system EPower On After checking the above turn on the power Display Status Check eWhen the power is turned on normally the display shows Normal RUN LED indicator during RUN ON ALARM LED indicator OFF POWER LED indicator ON Data display Displays the set value in d001 lf an error occurs refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operat
117. or pulse train position control mode For the Inverter slave Inverter on the sub motor side you need to select the pulse train position control mode Configuration Example eMain motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 Sub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 e Main motor rom Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Pulse train mode selection P013 00 pulse with 90 phase difference Electronic gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 The following shows an example of the ratio of slave rpm to master rpm depending on the P019 to P021 settings Note that the same number of encoder pulses 1024 pulses should be set on both Inverters Electronic gear setting REF REF FB FB ae A E RN de Position feedback side Position feedback side Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 Toen 2048 1024 2048 4 131 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used Electronic gear setting REF REF FB FB pe n E A pee de Position feedback side Position feedback side Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 2048 1024 2048 1024 Slave rpm Master rpm 1 2 2 2 1 2 Configuration Example Main motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 e Sub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 Main motor ro
118. parameters have not been memorized correctly Perform the user initialization to set the parameters again 3 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy fee Shuts off the output if the incoming supply voltage drops below the Has the power supply voltage specified level This is because the decreased control circuit stops working Check the incoming power supply Undervolt properly when the incoming supply 09 0 Is the power supply capacity sufficient 4 28 age trip voltage to the Inverter drops Check the power supply Trips when the DC voltage between Has the drives internel charge circuit P and N drops to approximately thyristor been damaged 175 V DC for 200 V class and 345 Check the thyristor V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output if an error occurs in the CT current detector CT error built into the Inverter Trips if the CT E10 0 The Inverter has a fault Repair Replace output is approximately 0 6 V or more when the power is turned on Shuts off the output and displays an error if the internal CPU has worked F Is there any large electrical noise source CPU error erroneously or abnormally around 4 Note If an abnormal value is read E11 0 from EEPROM it may become a CPU error depending on the case Countermeasures against noise The Inverter has a fault Repair Repla
119. perform offline auto tuning once e After the motor is stopped online auto tuning is performed for 5 seconds max For tuning R1 and R2 this function performs DC excitation once The tuning result is not displayed If the RUN command is input during this period priority is given to the RUN command and the online auto tuning is aborted The tuning result is not reflected 4 113 4 2 Function Mode With DC injection braking during stop selected online auto tuning starts after DC injection braking is completed If FOC and SON are allocated to terminals online auto tuning is not performed Operating Procedure 1 Set motor parameter selection H002 to 02 online auto tuning enabled Set auto tuning selection H001 to 00 disabled 2 Turn on the RUN command The Inverter automatically performs online auto tuning during stop Secondary Resistance Compensation Function Temperature Compensation e This function compensates for speed fluctuations resulting from motor temperature changes when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method To use this function set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC With other thermistors and settings the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P025 Secondary resistance compensation enable disable sele
120. polarity Measurement red black value ai R L1 PD 1 No conduction PD 1 R L1 Conduction pa S L2 PD 1 No conduction PD 1 S L2 Conduction T L3 PD 1 No conduction S D3 E PD 1 T L3 Conduction faj R L1 N Conduction S D4 O N R L1 No conduction Ne S L2 N Conduction N S L2 No conduction 3A T L3 N Conduction N T L3 No conduction U T1 P No conduction TR1 P U T1 Conduction V T2 P No conduction TR2 P V T2 Conduction i W T3 P No conduction TR3 2 P W T3 Conduction oO T U T1 N Conduction z TR4 N U T1 No conduction V T2 N Conduction TR5 N V T2 No conduction W T3 N Conduction TR6 N W T3 No conduction E RB P No conduction 2 s P RB Conduction 5 TR7 RB N No conduction g gt N RB No conduction ao PD 1 P RB t it OO nverter uni Converter unit UTI O ViT2 WIT3 O N Regenerative braking circuit 6 8 soueUs UIeWY pue uons dsul Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Measurement Methods of I O Voltage Current and Electric Power Below is a general measurement device for input output voltages current and electric power U T1 Power supply L g D gt T L3 WT3 dn roi Measurement point Measurement device Note Measurement value reference Power supply Between R S S T and T Moving i
121. pulse train position command input permission Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection C021 to C025 terminals 11 to 15 Multi function output selection 22 DSE excessive speed deviation C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 03 Related functions A001 P013 4 125 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used Sensor Vector Control Speed Control To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 00 speed control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only To use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Inverter model RX user s manual Chapter 4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Se lection Also be sure to set the number of your encoder pulses With V2 control mode selection P012 you can select four types of control modes Speed control Pulse train position control Absolute position control and High resolution absolute position control Note the following before use e Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size e If the Inverter does not normally accelerate or if overload protection is activated check the phase order of the encoder signal If phase A is advanced by 90 from phase B during forw
122. range setting reverse side 0 ae command 7 to Position range setting forward side 00 Low P068 Zero return mode 01 Hit 00 02 Hi2 Po69 Zero return direction on Forward side 00 ae selection 01 Reverse side P070 Low speed zero 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Hz return frequency P071 High speed zero 9 99 to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz return frequency Position range cae 0 to 268435455 When APR2 is selected ie specification 9 to 1073741823 When HAPR is selected 268435453 forward Position range F P073 specification 268435455 to 0 When APR2 is selected 268435455 _ reverse 1073741823 to 0 When HAPR is selected 4 136 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P060 P061 P062 P063 P064 00 Multi step position command 0 01 Multi step position command 1 02 Multi step position command 2 03 Multi step position command 3 04 Multi step position command 4 05 Multi step position command 5 06 Multi step position command 6 07 Multi step position command 7 P074 Teaching selection 00 P065 P066 P067 ES eS a ee Multi step C169 speed position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 ms determination time 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is do29 Position command selected monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is _ T selected 1073741823 to 1073741823 when
123. reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 5 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period p Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check that there are no abnormal o Acoustic feeling and No faults vibrations or or visual inspection sounds General i Check that there Check that there is no abnormal odor are no abnormal O No faults caused by damage or odors overheating Disconnect Inverter Motor bie main circuit terminals U T1 V T2 and Megger check W T3 and short Between the circuit the 3 phase Insulation collective motor O motor wires Then 5 MQ min 500 V DC resistance megger terminals and use a megger to ground terminal measure the resistance between the motor wire and ground terminal 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 6 v2uLeu ueN pue uono dsu l Inspection and Mainte
124. regardless of the RUN direction e When 01 Depends on the RUN direction is selected The torque bias signal polarity and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction Forward command Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias Reverse command Applies torque in the opposite direction of the torque bias Torque Control Under this function the Inverter can be used in torque control as well as in the speed and pulse train position controls Torque control can be applied to winders and more To run the Inverter in torque control mode allocate 52 ATR to any of the multi function inputs While the ATR terminal is turned on the torque reference input is enabled In torque reference input selection P033 you can select one of the three analog inputs or the input via the Digital Operator The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load To prevent the Inverter from running out of control set a speed limit value in P039 forward or P040 reverse Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Input via terminal O 01 Input via terminal Ol P033 Torque reference input 02 Input via terminal O2 00 selection 03 Input via the Digital Operator 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P034 Torque reference setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Torque reference when P033 03 P035 Polarity selection at 00 As per sign 00 3 torque referen
125. regeneration under four quadrant separate setting Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled selection 01 Enabled b041 Torque limit 1 b042 Torque limit 2 150 b043 Torque limit 3 b044 Torque limit 4 b045 00 40 Torque limit enabled 41 Torque limit switching 1 42 Torque limit switching 2 Multi function inputs C00T t0 C008 1 to 8 selection 4 59 Dual Rating Selection e Ratings of the inverter are switched to Heavy Duty CT and Normal Duty VT and it enables it The ratings current value changes by switching Heavy Duty CT and Normal Duty VT e The method of switching a Heavy Duty and a Normal Duty is done by Heavy Duty Normal Duty selection 6049 in the operator 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b049 Dual Rating Selection 00 Heavy Duty 01 Normal Duty 00 In the Normal Duty VT there is the item which is not displayed in the parameter of the operator Parameter No Function name Function code Function name d008 Actual frequency monitor P024 Position bias setting d009 Torque command monitor P025 Temperature compensation thermistor enable d010 Torque bias monitor P026 Over speed error detection level d029 Positioning command monitor P027 Speed deviation error detection level d030 Current pos
126. reset terminal set to ON During stop During deceleration During constant speed During acceleration The RUN command is turned on at frequency 0 During startup During DC injection braking During overload limit During forcing servo ON Note The trip monitor display shows the Inverter status at the time of tripping not the actual motor operation Example While PID control is used or the frequency reference is input using analog signals voltage current the Inverter may alternate frequently between acceleration and deceleration because of the signal fluctuations even if the motor seems to operate at a constant speed In this case the onscreen Inverter status at the time of tripping may differ from the actual operation 5 2 Warning Function 5 2 Warning Function e The following table shows the details of warning display and parameter correction Target code Condition Base code Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt Base frequency A003 A203 A303 a gt Maximum frequency Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A004 A204 A304 A020 A220 A320 2 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Orientation speed setting P015 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 7 D Frequency upper limit Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 A220 gt A061 A261 Mult
127. response speed in speed response H005 H205 4 115 4 2 Function Mode Arbitrary Motor Parameter e For arbitrary settings of motor parameters the function codes vary depending on the setting of 1st 2nd control and on the set value of the motor parameter selection e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 00 gt Directly enter H020 to H024 e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 01 or 02 gt Directly enter H030 to H034 e lf offline auto tuning has not been performed the motor parameters in the same capacity rank as the Inverter standard motor parameters are set in HO30 H230 to H034 H234 Sensorless Vector Control e This function estimates and controls motor rom and output torque based on the Inverter s output voltage and current as well as the motor parameter settings This control method provides high starting torque in a low frequency range 0 3 Hz enabling high precision operation e To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 03 e To use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 115 eNote the following before use Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the motor size specified elf sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the
128. selection A056 a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 1 a FW DB Output frequency A055 Example 1 b FW DB tS 1 Output frequency X Example 2 a woo DB Output frequency A A055 Example 2 b woe DB Ss ae _ Output frequency y 4 25 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 3 a BP DB SL Output Free running frequency 4 A053 A055 SS Example 3 b FW DB T l Output Free running frequency i A A053 g gt WHinternal DC Injection Braking A051 01 e DC injection braking is applied without terminal operation at start stop of the Inverter To use internal DC injection braking set DC injection braking selection A051 to 01 Set the startup DC injection braking power in A057 In A058 set the startup DC injection braking time regardless of the edge or level operation Example 4 a Example 4 b e Set DC injection braking power A054 to define the braking power other than at startup Set the DC injection braking starting frequency in DC injection braking frequency A052 Once DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter stops output when the frequency reaches the A052 value after the RUN command FW has been turned off During the set time in A053 the motor remains in free run status After the s
129. the Inverter may not store data correctly e Allocate 27 UP and 28 DWN to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 e This function is enabled only when frequency reference selection A001 is set to 01 or 02 If 01 terminal is selected however this function is enabled for multi step speed operation only When you use an external analog input as frequency reference input or when you set the jogging operation frequency this function is disabled While the UP DWN terminal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time depends on F002 F003 F202 F203 F302 and F303 To switch between the 1st 2nd 3rd controls allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn on off the SET terminal e You can store a frequency set value after UP DWN adjustment Choose whether to store the value with C101 Also you can clear the stored frequency set value By allocating 29 UDC to a multi function input and turning on off the UDC terminal you can clear or store the frequency reference setting adjusted at UP DOWN Parameter No Data Description 00 Does not store the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN C104 After restoring the power returns to the value set before UP DWN adjustment 01 Stores the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN After restoring the power maintains the set value after UP DWN adjustment RUN command FW RV UP DWN Output freque C
130. the time set in ON time setting b034 a RUN Power ON time exceeded RNT ONT signal is output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b034 FUN time Power ON gto 66636 0 time setting Related functions C021 to C025 C026 d016 d017 ERUN Time Exceeded RNT Allocate 11 RNT to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 EPower ON Time Exceeded ONT Allocate 12 ONT to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 e Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 Rotation Direction Limit Selection Limits motor rotation directions e Enabled in either control circuit terminal block or Digital Operator control mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Rotation direction limit 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled b035 selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 02 Only Reverse is enabled 4 52 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reduced Voltage Startup Selection e Slowly increases voltage during motor startup e To increase torque during startup reduce the set value of reduced voltage startup selection b036 Note that if the value is too small the motor starts in full voltage starting mode possibly resulting in an overcurrent trip
131. to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Ah_ Free V f voltage 2 b103 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Bh_ Free V f frequency 3 b104 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Ch_ Free V f voltage 3 b105 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Dh_ Free V f frequency 4 b106 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Eh Free V f voltage 4 b107 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Fh Free V f frequency 5 b108 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1370h Free V f voltage 5 b109 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1371h Free V f frequency 6 b110 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1372h_ Free V f voltage 6 b111 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1373h Free V f frequency 7 b112 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1374h Free V f voltage 7 b113 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1375h to Not used 137Ah 137Bh Brake control selection b120 R W o DISapled 1 Enabled 137Ch Brake wait time for release b121 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s 137Dh Brake wait time for b122 Rw loto500 0 01 s acceleration f37eh Brake wait time for b123 Rw loto500 0 01 s stopping 7h rake wait time for b124 Rw oto500 0 01 s confirmation 1380h Brake release frequency b125 R W 0 to 40000 a 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 3 1381h Brake release current b126 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1382h Brake input frequency b127 R W 0 to 40000 ae 1383h Not used 1384h Not used 4 196 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regji Fun
132. torque AX BCRI Q 3 pha Type AX Resist Q Type AX Resist Q 0 55 2004 180 REMO0K1200 IE 200 180 50 REMO00K1200 IE 200 TA 2007 100 REM00K2070 IE 70 200 1 5 2015 140 REM00K4075 IE 75 130 REM00K2070 IE 70 2 2 2022 35 90 REM00K4035 IE 35 180 4 0 2037 REM00K4075 IE 75 50 REMO0K6035 IE 35 100 T 5 5 2055 Built in 16 75 REM00K9017 IE 17 150 2 REM00K4035 IE 35 5 7 5 2075 55 REM01K9017 IE 17 110 gt 90 10 g 11 0 2110 REM00K6035 IE 35 40 REM02K1017 IE 17 75 as S 15 0 2150 REM00K9017 IE 17 55 REM03K5010 IE 10 95 lt 75 a 18 5 2185 75 95 REM03K5010 IE 10 REM19K0008 IE 8 22 0 2220 5 65 80 30 0 2300 6 80 2035090 TE 4 REM19K0006 IE 37 0 2370 6 60 45 0 2450 3 105 2070130 TE 2 8 2x REM19K0006 IE 55 0 2550 3 85 0 55 4004 200 200 REMO00K1400 IE 400 REMO00K1400 IE 400 1 1 4007 200 200 100 1 5 4015 REM00K1200 IE 200 190 REM00K2200 IE 200 190 2 2 4022 REM00K2200 IE 200 130 REM00K5120 IE 120 200 4 0 4040 REM00K2120 IE 120 120 REM00K6100 IE 100 140 70 55 4055 Built in 140 REM00K9070 IE 70 150 REM00K4075 IE 75 7 5 4075 100 REM01K9070 IE 70 110 35 11 0 4110 REMO0K6100 IE 100 50 REM02K1070 IE 70 75 A 15 0 4150 REM00K9070 IE 70 55 REM03K5035 IE 35 110 gt 24 e Q 18 5 4185 90 100 t 2 REM03K5035 IE 35 REM19K0030 IE 30 22 0 4220 20 75 85 30 0 4300 4015045 TE 16 REM19K0020 IE 20 95 37 0 4370 125 4017068 TE 11 REM38K0012 IE 15 45 0 4450 100 55 0 4550 2 x REM19K0020 IE 10 100 4035090 TE 8 5 75 0 4750 3 x REM19K0030 IE 10 75 90 0 4900 40701
133. torque with the Inverter driving N m Deceleration Time Te TB Max aeceleration torque with the Inverter driving N m Ti Required driving torque N m Ju Jm x Nu 9 55 Tg T JL Jm x Nm Taz SLEM KAM 9 55x Ts T p For short time deceleration use a braking unit optional Operator Rotation Direction Selection e Select the rotation direction applied to the RUN command via the Digital Operator e This is disabled at terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F004 Operator rotation direction 00 Forward 00 S selection 01 Reverse 4 9 4 2 Function Mode lt Group A Standard Function Parameters gt Frequency Reference Selection Select the method for using the frequency reference Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 03 ModBus communication Frequency reference A001 s lection 04 Option 1 02 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Drive Programming 10 Operation function result Related functions A005 A141 to A143 A145 A146 Data Frequency reference source 00 Set a frequency with the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Set a frequency via terminals O L OI L O2 L 02 Set a frequency via the Digital Operator F001 03 Set a frequency through the ModBu
134. 0 01 Deviation Feedback value Target value A078 PID output limit function 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 00 Disabled 01 O L 0 to 10 V A079 PID feedforward selection 02 Ol L 4 to 20 mA 00 03 O2 L 10 to 10 V C044 PID deviation excessive level 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 C052 PID FB upper limit 100 0 0 to 100 0 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 Related functions d004 A001 A005 A006 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 eTo use this function set A071 to 01 or 02 e You can disable the PID operation in progress using an external signal To use this function allocate 23 PID PID disabled to any of the multi function inputs While the PID terminal is turned on the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally e You can limit the PID output under various conditions Basic Structure of PID Control Example Feedforward Disabled 0to10V 4to 20 mA 10 to 10 V Target value yale pe g 50 Control volume e7 control 0 to 10 ciety tF ae e7 the Inverter gt pea 4 to 20 mA Feedback Oto 10V Transducer 7 4 to 20 mA Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Derivative time s Operator s Deviation 4 31 4 2 Function Mode EPID Operation P Operation Operation where the control volume is proportional to the target value Step transition Ramp transition Target value ee Large Large r i i A072 i A072 Control volume Ya i Operation Ope
135. 0 0 Hz start example 1 i 01 Frequency matching start example 2 an b088 Freerun slap Selection 02 Active Frequency Matching restart ve example 3 b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 Time before restart 1 0 s b007 Frequency matching lower 0 00 to 400 00 l 0 00 Hz limit frequency setting Set a frequency matching level b028 Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated Rated curre t A Matching restart level current Active Frequency b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 s parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 Matching restart 02 Set frequency 4 71 e Helps stop the motor using a mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic one Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output Allocate 11 FRS to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 e Performs a free run stop FRS while the FRS terminal is turned on When the FRS terminal is turned off the motor restarts after the retry wait time b003 elapses However if RUN command selection A002 is set to 02 Digital Operator the Inverter does not restart To restart the Inverter input the RUN command e You can select as the Inverter output mode for restart a 0 Hz start frequency matching start or Active Frequency Matching restart at free run stop selection b088 Examples 1 2 3 e If you set frequency matching l
136. 0 1 00 H070 For PI proponional gain la 6 to 70000 100 0 switching H071 For PI integral gain switching 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H072 ron proponionalgait hag igd000 1 00 m switching H073 Gain switching time 0 t0 9999 ms 100 ms Taper time during gain switching lf control gain switching is selected in the multi function input selection turning off the signal selects the gain setting of H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 or H252 Turning on the signal selects the gain setting of H070 H071 or H072 lf control gain switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 the gain setting conforms to the status in which the signal is turned off 4 89 4 2 Function Mode UP DOWN Function e This function allows you to change the Inverter output frequency using the UP and DWN terminals of the multi function inputs Data Symbol Function name Status Description gt ON Increases the current speed during the signal 27 UP UP DWN function input period accelerated OFF Keeps the current speed l ON Decreases the current speed during the signal 28 DWN UP DWN function input period decelerated OFF Keeps the current speed Bs se UP DWN function ON Clears the stored UP DWN speed data clear OFF Keeps the stored UP DWN speed Available input term inals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on off the UP DWN terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise
137. 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00071550 DE 155 0 0 07 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAI00042300 DE 230 0 0 04 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI07700050 DE 5 0 7 7 2 2 to 3 7 AX RAI03500100 DE 10 0 3 5 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAIO1300170 DE 17 0 1 3 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00740335 DE 33 5 0 74 3 phase 400V 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00360500 DE 50 0 0 36 30 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00290780 DE 78 0 0 29 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAI00191150 DE 115 0 0 19 75 0 to 90 0 AX RAI00111850 DE 185 0 0 11 110 0 to 132 0 AX RAI00072700 DE 270 0 0 07 S Chokes AX FEROOOO RE _ hs Dimensional Drawing Oo I X D Fare N wY m L o fe L H Reference D Motor Dimensions Weight diameter KW Kg L Ww H X Y m AX FER2102 RE 21 lt 2 2 85 22 46 70 5 0 1 AX FER2515 RE 25 lt 15 105 25 62 90 5 0 2 AX FER5045 RE 50 lt 45 150 50 110 125 30 5 0 7 AX FER6055 RE 60 lt 55 200 65 170 180 45 6 1 7 7 27 7 3 Options M3G3AX OP05 E gt 8 RUN T WARNING ALARM SUuOI edIIN0dS 7 28 B Specifications 7 3 Options Digital Operator 3G3AX OP E3G3AX OP01 omron SYSDRIVE POWER 3G3AX OP01 ALARM O Data display RUN command LED indicator Operation keys FREQ adjuster Panel cut dimensions External dimensions Height 55 mm x Width 70 mm x Depth 10 mm 7 29 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List c ccc App 1 Appendix 2 Product Life C
138. 00 06 Thermal load rate 0 to 100 oO 07 LAD frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz AM selection 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or C028 C029 AMi selection lower 00 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 11 Output torque signed D AM output only 0 to 200 13 Drive programming output YA1 14 Drive programming output YA2 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 1 This output is enabled only when SLV 0 Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 2 Below are the specifications of the output torque signed AM output V Put V AM gain setting C106 100 AM gain setting C106 200 AM bias setting C109 50 T 0 100 Bop oe Ve 3 In any other method the real output frequency of the inverter including compensations different than d001 value is displayed 4 110 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode AM AMI Adjustment e Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AM monitor 100 0 to 100 oe ANV DaS Seng Set an offset for the AM monitor 0 af C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AMI monitor
139. 00 5550 6650 Efficiency at rated output 95 0 95 0 95 1 95 1 95 1 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 2 3 2 1 Installation e To raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current as shown in the graph below Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Capacity Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz 0 4 kW 15 100 15 100 0 75 kW 15 100 15 100 1 5 kW 15 100 15 100 2 2 kW 15 100 15 100 3 7 kW 15 100 15 100 5 5 kW 15 100 15 100 7 5 kW 15 100 15 100 11 kW 12 90 41 4 max 15 100 15 kW 12 95 60 8 A max 14 95 30 4 A max 18 5 kW 10 90 68 4 A max 10 90 34 2 A max 22 kW 7 70 66 5 A max 6 75 36 0 A max 30 kW 5 80 96 8 A max 10 75 43 5 A max 37 kW 10 75 108 7 A max 8 80 60 0 A max 45 kW 5 70 127 4 A max 9 75 68 2 A max 55 kW 5 70 154 A max 6 60 67 2 A max 75 kW es 6 85 126 7 A max 90 kW 4 75 132 0 A max 110 kW E 6 70 151 9 A max 132 kW 3 60 156 0 A max 200 V Cass 22kW 18 5 kW 400v class 90kW 75kW 45kW Output current derating 11 kW 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz 1415 Output current derating 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz 1415 30 KW 15 kW V4 2 4 u s q Design 2 1 Installation Backing Plate E Inverter wi
140. 00020000000000 0000000000000400 PCNT Pulse counter 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 PCC Pulse counter clear 0000080000000000 0000000000001000 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 Example To enable Forward Multi step speed 1 and Multi step speed 2 for the Inverter with station No 01 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D The transmission frame is therefore STX 01 02 000000000000000D BCC CR 4 151 4 4 Communication Function e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 160 Negative response Refer to page 4 160 lt Command 0
141. 005 and A006 as shown below If the frequency reference is reversible the motor runs in the reverse direction when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero even if the FW Forward terminal is ON Also note that the motor may run in the reverse direction resulting in prolonged acceleration time or other phenomena if the voltage fluctuates around 0 V even with the O2 terminal not connected AT Auxiliary frequency A006 A005 7 Main frequency reference reference Reversibility terminal i O2 L terminal OFF O L terminal Disabled 00 Not ON OI L terminal Disabled 00 03 reversible i OFF O L terminal Disabled ON O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled With AT Not E le 1 i o allocated to a 01 exemple ON OIL terminal Enabled reversible multi function OFF O L terminal Enabled input 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled Example 2 ON OIL terminal Enabled 02 Reversible i OFF O L terminal Enabled ON O2 L terminal Disabled 00 O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 01 lt Addition of the O L and Enabled Not With AT NOT OI L terminals reversible allocated to a multi function 02 a5 nen of nee pan Enabled Reversible input Ol L terminals Addition of the O L and Not aS B OI L terminals hao reversible Example 1 Not reversible Example 2 Revers
142. 02 b104 Free V f frequency 4 b106 Free V f frequencies 5 6 6108 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 to4 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free V f frequency 5 b108 Free V f frequency 6 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 to 5 b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 gt Free V f frequency 6 b110 Free electric thermal Free electric thermal frequencies 2 3 b017 b019 lt frequency 1 b015 Free electric thermal frequency 1 b015 gt Free electric thermal frequency 2 Free electric thermal frequency 3 b019 lt b017 Free electric thermal Free electric thermal frequencies 1 2 b015 b017 gt frequency 3 b019 1 In this case the base frequency is rewritten when corresponding parameters Change the data to a correct value is a warning occurs Otherwise the motor may burn out depending on the value 2 Checks even if the frequency reference selection A001 is set other than to the Digital Operator 02 3 The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width lower limit from the jump frequency e Warning appears when a target code set data meets the condition shown above in relation to the base code data e Parameters are rewritten into the data of the base code rewritten at start up 5 11 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 0sssssse 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and
143. 042 A043 7 A044 03 04 05 H002 H005 H050 8 A044 04 H060 H061 9 AS 3 a reer H020 to H024 10 hae A e ran H030 to H034 11 Either of A044 or A244 03 04 05 d008 to d010 d012 b040 to b046 H001 H070 to H073 12 Either of A044 or A244 02 b100 to b113 13 A051 01 02 A052 A056 to A058 14 A051 01 02 A053 to A055 A059 d004 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A072 to A078 15 A071 01 02 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C044 C052 C053 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 16 A076 10 A141 to A143 17 A094 01 02 A095 A096 18 A097 01 02 03 04 A131 19 A097 01 02 03 04 A132 20 Any of b012 b212 and b312 02 b015 to b020 21 b021 01 02 03 b022 b023 22 b024 01 02 03 b025 b026 23 b050 01 b051 to b054 24 b095 01 02 b090 b096 25 b098 01 02 b099 C085 26 b120 01 b121 to b127 27 a to C008 05 and A028 to A035 28 Any of C001 to C008 06 A038 A039 29 Any of C001 to C008 07 A053 to A055 A059 3o ary or 001 1o coos 0 e i 31 P to C008 08 and A246 A247 32 Any of C001 to C008 08 and A241 A242 A243 A244 00 01 4 54 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met Any of C001 to C008 08 and 33 A244 03 04 H202 H205 H250 H251 H252 Any of C001 to C008 08 and 34 A244 04 H260 H261 Any of C001 to C008 08
144. 064 width 1 0 50 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 3 Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz aoge UMP frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 0 50 E width 2 g A067 Jump frequency 3 0 00 4 30 e Adee Jump frequency 0 50 D width 3 Q S Acceleration sto Aoeg coe era P 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency Ao7o Acceleration stop 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s time 00 Disabled A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 No 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 Yes S A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 Yes s _ A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time Oo E 00 Ol er O 01 0 j a aoze P feedback 02 RS485 communication 00 No a selection i 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value Feedback value BOT Reverse eID uneton 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target 0g No _ value ao7g Ee output limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No function 00 Disabled PID feedforward 01 0 8 A079 selection 02 Ol 00 Ne o tee T 03 O2 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 No 02 OFF during deceleration 4 35 lt x A082 AVR voltage 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No y selection 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 9 Appendix 1 Parameter List
145. 1 With 10 operation function result selected in frequency reference selection A001 07 pulse train frequency is selected in operation frequency input A setting A141 or operation frequency input B setting A142 03 pulse train frequency is selected in PID feedback selection A076 When running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse command is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal A044 A001 A076 A141 A142 Related functions 4 124 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used V2 Control Mode Selection Select a control method in V2 control mode selection P012 When 00 ASR is selected in P012 speed control mode is enabled Select a frequency reference in frequency reference selection A001 When 01 APR is selected in P012 the Inverter enables position control by generating frequency reference based on the position command pulse input from the pulse train position command input terminal and on the position feedback detected by the encoder Select any of the three pulse train position command input modes in pulse train mode selection P013 To perform pulse train position control allocate 48 STAT to any
146. 1 coga n owergat warning oaod 120 No C 4 105 level 02 Loop back test Communication 03 2400 bps C071 speed selection 04 4800 bps 05 No Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps Gore Communication l laaa 1 No station No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit Gon length selection 8 8 bit 8 Ne _ Cc 2 pr oh 00 No parity 4 145 S cova ees ena 01 Even 00 No 2 parny 02 Odd O 5 Communication stop 1 1 bit oO core bit selection 2 2 bit 1 Do 00 Trip fe Comm nicationerior 01 Trip after deceleration stop O co76 02 Ignore 02 No selection j 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop 6077 COMMUNICATION errot lg gatgGo 99 0 00 No se timeout 4 145 goza Communication wait 5 Foggo o No ms a 4 145 Communication 00 ASCII oe method selection 01 ModBus RTU 9 NO _ 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 26 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ES N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation C081 O adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory aad it eae ll 3 default C082 Ol adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory voes Ges ae default D cos3 02 adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory yaga o aes default O g 3 Coss etme 0 0 to 1000 0 FaN yee 475
147. 110 0 0 53 75 AX RAO00401490 DE 149 0 0 40 90 AX RAO00331760 DE 176 0 0 33 110 AX RAO00262170 DE 217 0 0 26 132 AX RAO00212600 DE 260 0 0 21 7 25 7 3 Options Input AC Reactor AX RAINOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing ae M ML ma E Dimensions Weight Voltage Reference Kg A B1 B2 C1 C2 D E F AX RAI02800100 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAI00880200 DE AX RAI00350335 DE Ww 190 5 5 ko 200V AX RAI00180670 DE 85 55 O 180 140 O AX RAI00091000 DE 205 6 6 5 AX RAI00071550 DE 105 205 85 11 7 Q r AX RAI00042300 DE 240 130 z 210 z 200 75 16 0 O AX RAI07700050 DE 70 52 1 78 oO AX RAI03500100 DE 120 120 80 5 5 2 35 80 62 AX RAIO1300170 DE 2 5 AX RAI00740335 DE 190 5 5 85 55 400V AX RAI00360500 DE 180 140 6 5 205 AX RAI00290780 DE 105 85 11 7 6 AX RAI00191150 DE 16 0 110 275 75 AX RAIO0111850 DE 240 200 16 0 AX RAI00072700 DE 165 210 110 27 0 7 26 7 3 Options HSpecifications Voltage eed E Reference Current value inductance 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI02800100 DE 10 0 2 8 2 2 to 3 7 AX RAI00880200 DE 20 0 0 88 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAI00350335 DE 33 5 0 35 3 phase 200V 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00180670 DE 67 0 0 18 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00091000 DE 100 0 0 09 30
148. 151 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 28 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Gremgee No Function name Monitor or data range A during Unit Page 9 operation C152 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 AND C188 operatoren OR 00 a p 02 XOR C154 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 5 C155 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 g selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 a i 00 AND No 4 102 a a EE On oo E p 02 XOR C157 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C158 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 i 00 AND e sires lot on oo P 02 XOR c160 MPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 1 c161 MPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 2 c162 bot terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 3 3 S les e ne 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 4 o w c164 put terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 No ms 4108 response time 5 D z ctes nputtermina
149. 2 factor See Ne END Factor lst page 4 180 001Dh Fault monitor 2 Inverter status See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 180 001Eh Fault monitor 2 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 i 001Fh Fault monitor 2 frequency LOW Hz 0020h Fault monitor 2 current d082 R Output current value atine timeof 0 1 A tripping 0021h Fault monitor 2 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0022h Fault monitor 2 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0023h Fault monitor 2 RUN time LOW 0024h Fault monitor 2 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0025h Fault monitor 2 ON time LOW 0026h Fault monitor 3 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List _ page 4 180 0027h Fault monitor 3 Inverter status mee Inverter Trip Fact r List page 4 180 0028h Fault monitor 3 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 i 0029h Fault monitor 3 frequency LOW Hz 002Ah Fault monitor 3 current d083 R Output curent value atthe tine ot 0 1 A tripping 002Bh Fault monitor 3 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 002Ch Fault monitor 3 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 002Dh Fault monitor 3 RUN time LOW 002Eh Fault monitor 3 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 002Fh Fault monitor 3 ON time LOW 0030h Fault monitor 4 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List _ page 4 180 0031h Fault monitor 4 Inverter status See ener Trip Fac
150. 2 o A setting A142 Operation frequency input 07 Pulse train frequency 03 B setting Pulse train frequency processing block Bias Limit Frequency reference Frequency measurement Frequency scale P055 onile 1 0 to 50 0 kHz requency First order lag filter P056 A004 Note The SWENC switch on PG Board is available for OFF encoder disconnection detection disabled 4 143 4 4 Communication Function 4 4 Communication Function e This function allows the Inverter to communicate with an external controller via the RS485 interface from the TM2 terminal on the Inverter s control terminal block board Communication Specifications Item ASCII method ModBus RTU method Note Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Select using the Digital Operator Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous system Start stop synchronous system Asynchronous system Transmission code ASCII code Binary Transmission mode LSB first Compatible interface RS 485 i Select using Data bit length 7 or 8 bits 8 bits the Digital Operator P f Select using Parity No parity Even Odd the Digital Operator Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits Select using the Digital Operator Starting method One side start using host command Wait time 10 to 1000 ms O to 1000 ms Set using the Digital Operat
151. 255 0 01 momentary power interruption Integral time setting of 433Bh NOM Siap function at b056 R W 0 to 65535 0 001 s momentary power interruption 133Ch to Not used 133Eh Set an upper limit level 133Fh Window comparator O up b060 R W setting range 0 to 100 l 11 per limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1340h Window comparator O b061 R W Setting range 0 to 100 l 1 2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator lower limit levels 1341h comp b062 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width Peat age ae Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1342h Window comparator Ol b063 R W Setting range 0 to 100 l 1 2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1343h Window comparator Ol b064 R W Setting range 0 to 100 l 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator Ol peor Mn yels 1344h peu b065 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width rae Sa Soa Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1345h Window comparator O02 b066 R W Setting rang 100 to 100 l 1 2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a
152. 3 gt Reads all monitor data e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 03 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 104 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 152 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 153 Each monitor value Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Description Output frequency Hz x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Rotation direction 8 bytes Q Slop i Forward 2 Reverse PID feedback monitor x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Multi function input a _ 8 bytes Saat monitor as output a 8 bytes Sage 3 MSB Frequency conversion E x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code monitor LSB Output torque x1 8 b
153. 30 TE 5 5 2 x REM38K0012 IE 6 105 110 0 411K 125 4090240 TE 3 2 3 x REM38K0012 IE 4 132 0 413K 105 7 19 1 Inverter specifications choose voltage capacity and model The content noted in the table assumes the case of combining one Inverter and one motor of the same capacity 2 Select the ED Use the ED that is equivalent to or lower than the value shown 7 3 Options 3 Table above just contain typical recommended values that could work correctly in a wide range of applications But special precaution and selection should be done when very large braking torque or continous regeneration is required for example cranes 5 The specified conditions contain restrictions Make sure there are not any issues Calculated based on using a standard 4 pole motor The simplified selection table above cannot be used in cases where a 10 ED is exceeded SUOI edIIN0dS 7 20 B Specifications 7 3 Options DC Reactor AX RC0 0000000 DE Dimensional Drawing Figure 1 Figure 2 _ 5 a i a 5 Petr a i 3 gt B L J
154. 35 A244 03 04 and H202 00 Bere Wer Any of C001 to C008 08 36 A244 03 04 and H202 01 02 ESOO MES Any of C001 to C008 08 and 37 A094 01 02 A295 A296 38 Any of C001 to C008 11 b088 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 A342 A343 A392 A393 b312 39 Any of C001 to C008 17 b313 H306 40 Any of C001 to C008 18 C102 41 Any of C001 to C008 27 28 29 C101 42 Any of C021 to C026 03 C040 C041 43 Any of C021 to C026 26 C040 C111 44 Any of C021 to C026 02 06 C042 C043 45 Any of C021 to C026 07 C055 to C058 46 Any of C021 to C026 21 C063 47 Any of C021 to C026 24 25 C045 C046 48 Any of C021 to C026 33 C142 to C144 49 Any of C021 to C026 34 C145 to C147 50 Any of C021 to C026 35 C148 to C150 51 Any of C021 to C026 36 C151 to C153 52 Any of C021 to C026 37 C154 to C156 53 Any of C021 to C026 38 C157 to C159 54 Any of C021 to C026 42 C064 User Setting e Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U012 eIn addition to U001 to U012 d001 F001 and b037 are displayed Data Comparison Display e Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default Note that analog input adjustments C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 and thermistor adjustment C085 are not displayed e All monitors d and F001 are displayed 4 55 4 2 Function Mode Basic Display e Displays basic parameters e Below are the parameters displayed when t
155. 4 bytes Read the data received in response as follows Response buffer 4 5 6 7 D acd stat o msB 0 LSB 1 MSB 1 LSB Response data 00h 07h 00h 02h Trip cause Overvoltage trip During deceleration If the holding register content has not been read out normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 168 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Coil 05h gt Writes into one coil The following table shows the coil status change Coil status OFF gt ON ON gt OFF Change data MSB FFh 00h Change data LSB 00h 00h Example Issue the RUN command to the Inverter with slave address 10 To run the Inverter set 03 in A002 The coil number of the RUN command is 1 Query Response No Field name Te No Field name ervey 1 Slave address 0A 1 Slave address 0A 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Coil start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 00 5 Change data MSB FF 5 Change data MSB FF 6 Change data LSB 00 6 Change data LSB 00 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing into the coil cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response sect
156. 40 235 Book type 8 0 8 6 13 0 13 2 7 23 7 3 Options Output AC Reactor AX RAOQOOOOOOOL DE Dimensional Drawing C2 Dimensions Weight Reference Kg A B2 c2 D E F AX RAO11500026 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RA007600042 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO04100075 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO03000105 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO01830160 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 as AX RAO01150220 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 D AX RA000950320 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 AX RA000630430 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 Y AX RA000490640 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 O AX RA000390800 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 F AX RA000330950 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO00251210 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO00191450 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAO00161820 DE 240 150 275 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO00132200 DE 240 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAO16300038 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO11800053 DE 120 80 120 80 52 5 5 2 35 AX RAO07300080 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO04600110 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 AX RAO02500220 DE 180 95 205 140 55 6 9 1 AX RAO02000320 DE 180 105 205 140 85 6 11 7 AX RAO01650400 DE 240 110 275 200 75 6 16 0 AX RAO01300480 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAO01030580 DE 240 120 275 200 85 6 18 6 AX RAOQ00800750 DE 240 120 275 200 110 6 27 0 AX RAOQ00680900 DE 240 1
157. 42h Fault monitor 5 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0043h Fault monitor 5 ON time LOW 0044h Fault monitor 6 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 180 0045h Fault monitor 6 Inverter status See inverter Trip Rector List page 4 180 0046h Fault monitor 6 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 0047h Fault monitor 6 frequency LOW Hz 0048h Fault monitor 6 current d086 R Output current value at the time of 0 1 A tripping A 0049h Fault monitor 6 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 004Ah Fault monitor 6 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 004Bh_ Fault monitor 6 RUN time LOW 004Ch_ Fault monitor 6 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 004Dh Fault monitor 6 ON time LOW 004Eh Warning monitor d090 R Warning code 004Fh to Not used 08FFh 0000 Motor parameter recalculation 0001 Set value storage in EEPROM 0900h EEPROM write W Other Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage in EEPROM 0901h to Not used 1000h Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored Inverter Trip Factor List Trip factor high order factor Trip factor low order Inverter status Name Code Name Code No trip factor During reset
158. 495 648 94 50 Tel 44 0 870 752 08 61 ps D EN www industrial omron fi www industrial omron eu www industrial omron ru www industrial omron co uk p Ta m xy Nn gt Zz gt Note Specifications subject to change without notice Cat No 1560 E2 04 OMRON UOUWO Introduction Introduction Thank you for choosing the general purpose Inverter RX Series This User s Manual hereinafter called this manual describes the parameter setting methods required for installation wiring and operation of the RX model as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product After reading this manual keep it handy for future reference This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product Intended readers This manual is intended for Those with knowledge of the workings of electricity qualified electric engineers or the equivalent and also in charge of e Introducing the control equipment e Designing the control system e Installing and or connecting the control equipment e Field management as Read and Understand this Manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if yo
159. 5 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 03 Digital output frequency 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 08 Digital current monitor 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 12 Drive programming output YAO 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 00 No 4 107 4 116 C028 Analog monitor AM selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 11 Output torque lt signed gt 13 Drive programming output YA1 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 00 No C029 AMI selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 14 Drive programming output YA2 00 No 4 108 4 116 C030 Digital current monitor reference value
160. 5 90 110 132 MOOT SE at VT 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 at CT 33 2 40 1 51 9 63 0 77 6 103 2 121 9 150 3 180 1 400 V capacity kVA at CT 39 9 48 2 62 3 75 6 93 1 128 3 146 3 180 4 216 1 480 V at VT 47 3 58 1 70 6 87 2 112 2 133 162 1 191 2 241 1 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage at CT 48 58 75 91 112 149 176 217 260 Rated output current A at VT 57 70 85 105 135 160 195 230 290 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 14 22 30 30 30 60 60 80 80 Regenerative Built in braking Regenerative braking unit separately mounted braking resistor circuit Braking Minimum connection resistance Q 20 7 3 7 1 Standard Specification List HCommon Specifications Item Specifications Enclosure rating IP20 up to 55KW IP00 from 75 to 132KW Cooling method Forced air cooling Control method Phase to phase sinusoidal modulation PWM Output frequency range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency precision Digital command 0 01 of the max frequency Analog command 0 2 of the max frequency 25 C 10 C Frequency resolution Digital setting 0 01 Hz Analog setting Max frequency 4000 Terminal O 12 bits 0 to 10 V Terminal O2 12 bits 10 to 10 V Terminal Ol 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Voltage Frequency charac
161. 50 275 200 110 6 27 0 7 24 7 3 Options Dimensions Weight Reference Kg A B2 C2 D E AX RA000531100 DE 240 150 275 200 110 27 0 AX RA000401490 DE 300 165 320 200 125 44 0 AX RA000331760 DE 300 165 320 200 125 44 0 AX RAO00262170 DE 360 7 300 145 70 0 AX RAO00212600 DE 360 300 145 70 0 Specifications Voltage sitar loan Reference Current value mage tie 0 4 AX RAO11500026 DE 2 6 11 50 0 75 AX RAO07600042 DE 4 2 7 60 1 5 AX RAO04100075 DE 7 5 4 10 2 2 AX RAO03000105 DE 10 5 3 00 3 7 AX RAO01830160 DE 16 0 1 83 5 5 AX RAO01150220 DE 22 0 1 15 7 7 5 AX RAOQ00950320 DE 32 0 0 95 200 V class 11 AX RAO00630430 DE 43 0 0 63 15 AX RAO00490640 DE 64 0 0 49 2 18 5 AX RAO00390800 DE 80 0 0 39 2 22 AX RA0O00330950 DE 95 0 0 33 T 30 AX RAO00251210 DE 121 0 0 25 37 AX RAO00191450 DE 145 0 0 19 45 AX RAO00161820 DE 182 0 0 16 D 55 AX RAO00132200 DE 220 0 0 13 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAO16300038 DE 3 8 16 30 22 AX RAO11800053 DE 5 3 11 80 4 0 AX RAO07300080 DE 8 0 7 30 5 5 AX RAO04600110 DE 11 0 4 60 7 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 16 0 3 60 11 AX RAO02500220 DE 22 0 2 50 15 0 AX RAO02000320 DE 32 0 2 00 18 5 AX RAO01650400 DE 40 0 1 65 400 V clas 22 AX RAO01300480 DE 48 0 1 30 30 AX RAO01030580 DE 58 0 1 03 37 AX RAO00800750 DE 75 0 0 80 45 AX RAO00680900 DE 90 0 0 68 55 AX RAO00531100 DE
162. 506h Not used 3507h 3rd stabilization parameter H306 R W 0 to 255 1 From 3508h Not used 4 217 Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 5 2 Warning Function cccccccssssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Error Code List Name Description Error Code Points to check and remedy ue If the motor is Is there any rapid load fluctuation restrained or rapidly Eliminate load fluctuation accelerated or Constant E01 0 Is there any output short circuit S decelerated a large speed i Check the output wires current flows through Is there any ground fault the Inverter which Check the output wires and motor results ina 7 malfunction The Deceleration E02 0 eee E pee current exceeding the specified level Is there any rapid acceleration shuts off the output Increase the acceleration time Overcurrent and an error Acceleration E03 0 Has the motor shaft been locked 4 8 trip appears A Check the motor and wires 4 37 This protection Is the torque boost too high function detects an Lower the torque boost overcurrent through the AC CT current detector The protection circuit Is the DC injection braking too high is activated at Others E04 0 Lower the injection breaking 4 24 appr
163. 53 S U007 User 7 selection no d001 to P196 no 2 U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P196 no U009 User 9 selection no d001 to P196 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P196 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P196 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P196 no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 37 Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Ambient temperature C 24 hour power supply day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life year Note 1 Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measured at the location approximately 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter atmospheric temperature It refers to the temperature inside if the Inverter is stored in an enclosure Note 2 The smoothing capacitor which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the temperatures of the parts should normally be replaced once every 10 years which is the expected design life and not guaranteed However if the ambient temperature is high or the Inverter is used with a current exceeding the rated current for example under overload conditions its life will be significantly shortened App 38 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output When the product life becomes close to the end for the parts including the on board smoothing ca
164. 56 when APR2 is selected Current Position Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode d030 You can monitor the current position in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Display 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is selected 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected Clock d031 Setting Date and Time for the LCD digital operator Display 2000 1 1 to 2099 12 31 Displays in increments of 1 day 00 00 to 23 59 Displays in increments of 1 minute Inverter Mode d060 Dual ratting Refer to b049 parameter Display 00 Constant torque 01 Variable torque Fault Frequency Monitor d080 Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped Display 0 to 65535 Displays in increments of 1 time suoioun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to d086 Refer to 7 Trip Mode in Chapter 3 4 Operation Warning Monitor d090 e f the set data is inconsistent with other data a warning code is displayed While this warning remains in effect the Warning LED indicator stays lit until forced to rewrite or correct the data e For details on the Warning display refer to 5 2 Warning Function Display 0 to 385 DC Voltage Monitor d102 e Displays the DC voltage between P and N of the Inverter e During operation the monitor value changes depending on the
165. 6 4 ms Cycle T Variable Duty ratio t T Variable Duty ratio t T Fixed to 1 2 2 Digital current monitor e When the monitor displays the value set in digital current monitor reference value C030 1440 Hz is output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C030 Digital current monitor 0 2 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current Rated current A reference value Set a current value at 1440 Hz output 3 In any other method the real output frequency of the inverter including compensations different than d001 value is displayed 4 109 4 2 Function Mode MFM Adjustment e Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meter connected to the FM terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the FM monitor 100 Related functions C027 b081 Analog Output AM AMI Terminals You can monitor the output frequency and current using the AM and AMI terminals on the control circuit terminal block The AM terminal provides 0 to 10 V analog output The AMI terminal provides 4 to 20 mA analog output HAM AMI Selection e Select a signal to output from the following table Parameter Function name Data Default No setting ul 00 Output frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz Output current 0 to 200 02 Output torque 1 0 to 200 04 Output voltage 0 to 100 05 Power 0 to 2
166. 83 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is lower than 2 1 kHz the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value 0041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value 6041 to b044 amp x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 116 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Sensorless Vector Control e This function enables high torque operation in the 0 Hz range 0 to 3 Hz frequency reference This control method is particularly suitable for applications such as an elevating system which requires sufficient torque in a low frequency range at startup e g crane hoist eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 04 eTo use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 115 e The parameters for 0 Hz SLV control are as follows eIn O Hz limit HO60 H260 you can set a current value used for constant current control in the 0 Hz range generally 3 0 Hz or lo
167. 91 of the rated current 3 0 Carrier frequency 15 0 kHz ibaedenissassdasgoantenissestcesabostoauunsaceecasessecideess 12 0 kHz SLL SE Ean EE TN cadet piace E a Vr Rien 9 0 kHz satin voneeos Toe ee 6 0 kHz ONIE OOE IEO AEO TTE aa a 3 0 kHz sn i poatied 0 50 y rs Moo Output current 60 72 84 96 e The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second e The upper limit of carrier frequency variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier frequency b083 and the lower limit is 3 kHz Note When b083 is 3 kHz or lower this function is disabled regardless of the b089 setting 4 73 4 2 Function Mode Regenerative Braking Function e This function applies to the Inverter models with a built in regenerative braking circuit 83G3RX A2220 A4220 or lower models e With the built in regenerative braking circuit this function allows an external braking resistor to consume the motor s regeneration energy as heat This function is useful for a system in which the motor works as a generator when it is rapidly decelerated eTo use this function configure the following settings Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 0 Does not operate 0 1 to 100 0 A regenerative braking usage rate for 100 seconds can be set in increments of 0 1 If the set usage rate is exceeded a braking resistor overload trip E06 occurs Usage rate of b090 regenerative ets ets eB 0 0
168. A033 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 13 A034 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 14 A035 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 15 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 26 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ies Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz a 00 Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation gt 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop gt Disabled in operation g 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop 5 Jogging stop Disabled in operation 4 18 a A039 f ain 00 No a selection 03 Free running on jogging stop 2 Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Ss Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation A041 Torque boost 00 selection 00 Manual torque boost No T 01 Automatic torque boost A241 2nd torque boost 00 selection A042 Manual torque boost 1 0 voltage A242 2nd manual torque 4 9 to 20 0 10 Yes boost voltage 4 19 A342 3rd manual torque 1 0 boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost 5 0 frequency A243 2nd manual torque 0 0 to 50 0 50 Yes 8 boost frequency 2 3rd It S A343 rd manual torque 50 boost frequency 00 Consta
169. Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Note 1 You can allocate the momentary power interruption signal IP 08 and the undervoltage signal UV 09 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 selection C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Note 2 If power interruption is retained for 1 second or longer refer to the reset description Reset page 4 87 Restarting Procedure Frequency matching restart This method restarts the Inverter by detecting frequency and rotation direction based on the motor s residual voltage e Active Frequency Matching restart The Inverter starts output at the frequency set in starting frequency selection b030 and searches for a point where frequency and voltage are balanced to restart the Inverter while holding current at the Active Frequency Matching restart level b028 If the Inverter trips with this method reduce the b028 set value C FRS a Output current lA Decelerates according to b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected in b030 Motor rotation F speed 003 i 4 45 4 2 Function Mode Input Power Supply Phase Loss Protection Function Selection e This function outputs an alarm when the Inverter s input power supply has phase loss Parameter No Function name Data Default setting
170. B o contact selection C036 is set at NC contact Resistance g E between AL2 AL0 and NO contact between 0 2 A Induction 8 Q g ALO Relay output AL1 ALO AL1 ALO B S s common 250 VAC 1A ole Resistance al 16 0 2 A Induction Contact min capacity 100 V AC 10 mA 5 V DC 100 mA 2 9 Continued to the next page 2 2 Wiring A mool Terminal name Description Specifications symbol TH External thermistor Connect an external thermistor to this terminal Allowable input input Terminal to trip the Inverter when a temperature error voltage range _ occurs 0 to 8 V DC al The CM1 terminal functions as the common Input circuit amp El terminal lole ys 8V DC c olo Recommended thermistor characteristics 10kQ To Allowable rated power 100 mW min TH T Impedance at temperature error 3 KQ Thermistor 1 kQ Temperature error detection level is adjustable GMI between 0 and 9999 Q Slide Switch SW1 Settings The built in slide switch is used to enable or disable the emergency shutoff function Factory Default Disabled For the location of the slide switch refer to page 2 12 Emergency Shutoff Function Factory Default Disabled e This function is intended to turn off the Inverter output stop switching the main element via only the multi function input terminal of the hardware circuit without going through the CPU software This function stops switching of the main elemen
171. B 00 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC Query No Field name Fae 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LSB 00 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC Broadcasting cannot be performed The diagnostic sub code corresponds only with the query data echo 00h 00h not any other commands 4 170 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Coils OFh gt Rewrites consecutive multiple coils Example Change the status of multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 5 Set the multi function input terminals as shown in the following table Multi function input terminals Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 Query Response No Field name eras No Field name pate 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code OF 2 Function code OF 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Coil start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 06 4 Coil start number LSB 06 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 Number of coils MSB 00 6 Number of coils LSB 06 6 Number of coils LSB 06 7 Number of bytes 02 7 CRC 16 MSB 34 8 Change data MSB 17 8 CRC 16 LSB 4C 9 Change data LSB
172. BOSS Function name Reo R W Monitor and setting parameters Hes ol No code tion q4aBh MPUt terminal response C167 R W o0to200 x2 ms 1 time 8 14ACh A E espouse C168 R W 0to 200 x 2ms 1 14ADh_ Multi step speediposition 4169 p w 0to 200 x 2 ms 1 determination time 14AEh to Not used 1500h 0 Disabled 1501h Auto tuning selection H001 R W 1 Does not rotate 2 Rotates 0 Standard 1502h Motor parameter selection H002 R W 1 Auto tuning can 2 Auto tuning data with online auto tuning 1503h Motor capacity selection H003 R W 0 2P 1 4P 1504h Motor pole number H004 RW 2 6P selection i 3 8P 4 10P H005 1505h HIGH R W Speed response Loa 0 to 80000 0 001 1506h LOW R W 1507h Stabilization parameter H006 R W 0 to 255 1 1508h to Not used 1514h 1515h vee R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R1 er 1 to 65530 o 1516h LOW R W 1517h 021 R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R2 RE 1 to 65530 o 1518h LOW R W 1519h pua R W HIGH 0 01 Motor parameter L 1 to 65530 151Ah ee R W iia LOW H023 151Bh HIGH R W Motor parameter lo Tee 1 to 65530 0 01 A 151Ch LOW R W 151Dh uae R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter J 1 to 9999000 2 151Eh ROA R W kgm LOW 4 206 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function ce Function name Funeion R W Monitor and setting paramet
173. C CI T Acceleration Deceleration does not occur if the UP and DWN terminals turn on simultaneously ncy 4 90 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Operator Function e This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the Digital Operator Data Symbol Functionname Status Description ON Prioritizes the command from the Digital Operator A020 31 OPE Forced operator A220 set values over the A001 and A002 settings OFF Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 4 91 e If the Forced Operator function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the Digital Operator e If you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again 4 2 Function Mode P PI Switching Function e This function allows you to switch the control compensation
174. C008 C021 to C025 C026 Overload Limit 4 49 e The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order to lower output frequency automatically according to the overload limit parameter once the motor current reaches the overload limit e This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration or caused by rapid load fluctuations during constant speed operation e You can set two types of overload limit functions in b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 e To switch between b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 allocate 39 OLR to a multi function input and then turn it on off e The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work e The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time e If sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method V f characteristics refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 and 03 is selected for b021 b024 the frequency increases when a current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regenerative operation e f overload limit parameter b023 b026 is set too short an overvoltage trip may occur because of regenerative energy from the motor caused by automatic deceleration of this fu
175. Cat No 1560 E2 04 fa gt Z Customised to your machine un a 8 Model 3G3RX N g 200 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 55 kW 400 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 132 kW OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands eel I Tel 31 0 23 568 1300 Fax 31 0 23 568 13 88 www industrial omron eu x lt U S F R S M A N U A L Austria France Netherlands Spain Tel 43 0 2236 377 800 Tel 33 0 1 56 63 70 00 Tel 31 0 23 568 11 00 Tel 34 913 777 900 www industrial omron at www industrial omron fr www industrial omron nl www industrial omron es Belgium Germany Norway Sweden Tel 32 0 2 466 24 80 Tel 49 0 2173 680 00 Tel 47 0 22 65 75 00 Tel 46 0 8 632 35 00 www industrial omron be www industrial omron de www industrial omron no www industrial omron se Czech Republic Hungary Poland Switzerland Tel 420 234 602 602 Tel 36 0 1 399 30 50 Tel 48 0 22 645 78 60 Tel 41 41 748 13 13 ie f www industrial omron cz www industrial omron hu www industrial omron com pl www industrialomron ch ett s werent z Denmark Italy Portugal Turkey P He amp oh 4 Tel 45 43 44 00 11 Tel 39 02 32 681 Tel 351 21 942 94 00 Tel 90 0 216 474 00 40 www industrial omron dk www industrial omron it www industrial omron pt www industrial omron com tr amh Finland Middle East amp Africa Russia United Kingdom 5 E Tel 358 0 207 464 200 Tel 31 0 23 568 11 00 Tel 7
176. Ch_ Motor gear ratio numerator P028 R W 1 to 9999 1 161Dh Motor gear ratio Po29 RW 1to9999 1 denominator 161Eh Not used 0 Digital Operator 161Fh facets ne P031 R W 4 Option 1 put typ 2 Option 2 4 208 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Be Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Be Je o code tion BE 0 Digital Operator 1620h lane Slop Postion P032 R W 4 Option 1 put typ 2 Option 2 0 Terminal O 1621h Torque reference input P033 R W 1 Terminal Ol L selection 2 Terminal O2 3 Digital Operator 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW a 1622h Torque reference setting P034 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Polarity selection at torque 0 As per sign 1623h reference via O2 ce mee 1 Depends on the RUN direction o 0 Disabled 1 Digital Operator 1624h Torque bias mode P036 R W 2 Input via terminal O2 5 Option 1 6 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 1625h Torque bias value P037 R W 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Torque bias polarity 0 As per sign 1626h Selection raag RON Mas Depends on the RUN direction 1627h 088 R W Speed limit value in torque HIGH 0 01 0 to 1st max frequency control forward P039 Hz 1628h LOW R W 1629h Say R W Speed limit value in torque HIGH 0 01 0 to 1st max frequency control reverse P040 Hz 162Ah LOW R W 162Bh Not used
177. Check the main circuit Refer to Chapter motor 6 Repair Replace Appears if the incoming voltage continues to be higher than the F TA Is the incoming supply voltage too high specification value for 100 seconds i Incoming while the Inverter is stopped while the Inverter is stopped r overvoltage Ragen E15 0 Lower the incoming voltage correct the Trips when the main circuit DC i trip power supply fluctuation Fit an AC Voltage reaches approximately 390 reactor to power supply input if needed V DC for 200 V class and 780 V DC p Peep for 400 V class Shuts off the output when a momentary power interruption Has the incoming power supply voltage occurs for 15 ms or more gP PPly g Momentary ieee by dropped If the shutoff time is long it is TAA normally recognized as a power E16 0 Power recovery 4 60 interruption y g P Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or tri shutoff Note that when restart is Ma P selected the Inverter restarts at Rey lace MCCB Mg power on as long as the RUN p vO command remains Tempera ture error when the Appears if a decrease of the cooling Has the cooling efficiency been reduced rotation fan rotation speed has been E20 0 Replace the cooling fan speed of detected when a temperature error i Is there any clogging in the heatsink fin the cooling occurs Clean the fin fan decreases Shuts off the output if the Have you installed the Inverter vertically
178. Constant speed 4 Acceleration 0005h Inverter status C R 5 Forward 6 Reverse 7 Forward to reverse 8 Reverse to forward 9 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start 0006h PID feedback Rw loto10000 o 0007h to Not used 0010h 0011h Fault frequency monitor d080 R 0 to 65530 1 time 0012h Fault monitor 1 factor See te eect page 4 180 0013h Fault monitor 1 Inverter status See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 180 0014h Fault monitor 1 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 0 01 0015h Fault monitor 1 frequency LOW Hz 0016h Fault monitor 1 current d081 R Output c rrentvaue atthe timeo 0 1 A tripping 0017h Fault monitor 1 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0018h Fault monitor 1 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0019h Fault monitor 1 RUN time LOW 001Ah Fault monitor 1 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 001Bh Fault monitor 1 ON time LOW Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 178 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function pedi Function name Funeion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 001Ch Fault monitor
179. Default setting Unit b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 Hz Use mainly to adjust the starting torque With starting frequency b082 set high the starting current increases possibly causing the current to exceed the overload limit and overcurrent protection to work to trip the Inverter e If 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in control method selection A044 this function is disabled ew b082 Output frequency Output voltage Carrier Frequency e You can change the PWM waveform carrier frequency output from the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data HD Data ND Default setting Unit 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 0 5 to 12 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 b083 Carrier frequency kHz 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 0 5 to 8 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 With the carrier frequency set high you can reduce metallic noise from the motor However this increases noise or leakage current from the Inverter Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance e The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity To raise the carrier frequency fc derate the output current as shown in the following table e Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value the above setting is not required For details on the electronic thermal
180. Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn A A A A A Q Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load Safety Information Operation and Adjustment e Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high 3 1 Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Precautions for Use Error Retry Function Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start Non Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection 6050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed eWhen checking a sig
181. E E A O E 2 6 Design kJa aaa 2 1 Installation 2 1 Installation N WARNING Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inve
182. ED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Read and Understand this Manual Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
183. Example 3G3RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Base frequency 60 Hz Output frequency 20 Hz Torque q Trip time s 60 Inverter output 3 0 0 5 16 50 frequency Hz i 0 6 20 60 0 55 8 76 8 102 4 Motor current A 87 2 120 160 Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter Base frequency Constant Torque Characteristics Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor Example 3G3RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Output frequency 2 5 Hz Torque Output current value A x1 0 b020 x0 8 b018 x0 6 b016 Inverter output 0255 60 frequency Hz 0 b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz 4 47 4 2 Function Mode Free Setting To protect the motor according to load you can freely set the electronic thermal characteristics Below is the setting range Torque x1 0 x0 8 Inverter output 0 5 40 frequency Hz Example Output frequency b017 Trip time s Thermal Warning Motor current A Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter Output current value A b020 b018 b016 0 b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz x 0018 Rated current x 109 y 0018 Rated current x 150 z z 0018 Rated current x 200 e This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overheat protection is activated The warning level can be set in C061 Allocate 13 THM to any of multi function output termina
184. F 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start address is reduced by 1 3 Specifies the number of actual bytes to change not the number of holding registers If writing into multiple holding registers cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section lt Exception Response gt The master requires the response for a query except for broadcast Though the Inverter should re turn a response corresponding with the query it returns an exception response if the query has an error The exception response has the field configuration shown in the following table Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 The detailed field configuration is shown below The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added The exception code shows the cause of exception response 4 172 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Function code Exception code Query ee Code Description response Oth 81h Oth An unsupported function has been specified 03h 83h 02h Specified address does not exist 05h 85h 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 06h 86h 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register OFh 8Fh The Inverter does not allow this function 10h 90h e Has attempted to change the register that cannot
185. FF Irrelevant to the motor operation ON Reverse 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse OFF Forward Available input terminals C001 to C008 Required settings A002 01 e Set RUN command selection A002 to 01 control circuit terminal block 4 88 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The following operations become possible when 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R are allocated to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Allocating the STP terminal disables the FW and RV terminals e Below are the outputs via terminal operation STA ON OFF STP ON OFF F R Output frequency Control Gain Switching Function e This function provides two types of gain and time constant settings for the speed control system proportional integral compensation You can switch over these settings when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 V f characteristics selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector Multi function inputs C001 to C008 1 to 8 selection 26 CAS control gain switching H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 80 000 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 1000 0 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 0
186. Function name Data Default setting Unit V f characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward regeneration under four quadrant separate setting b041 Torque limit 1 150 b042 Torque limit 2 150 b043 Torque limit 3 150 b044 Torque limit 4 150 40 Torque limit enabled 41 Torque limit switching 1 42 Torque limit switching 2 Multi function inputs C001 008 1 to 8 selection Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal selection 10 During torque limit Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 4 57 4 2 Function Mode e You can select any of the following four torque limit functions from torque limit selection b040 lt Four quadrant separate setting mode gt Sets torque limits 1 to 4 0041 to b044 for four quadrants forwar
187. G3RX A4004 to A4037 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M4 Others M4 J Uh Ground terminal with short circuit bar shaded area for EMC filter P switching PD 1 P short circuit bar When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached EMC filter function oe method EMC filter disabled EMC filter enabled factory default 3G3RX A2055 A2075 3G3RX A4055 A4075 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M5 Others M5 3G3RX A2110 3G3RX A4110 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M5 2 15 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model Ground terminal with short circuit When not using the DC bar shaded area for EMC filter reactor keep the PD 1 P function switching short circuit bar attached G LET P short circuit Tel EMC filter function switching method EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 3G3RX A2150 to A2185 3G3RX A4150 to A4220 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M6 3G3RX A2220 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 7 CHARGE LED indicator U T1 V T2 W TS lt M PD 1 P short circuit bar When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached G Ground terminal with short circuit bar shaded area for EMC filter function switching EMC filter function switching method a A EMC filter enabled factory defa
188. HAPR is d030 Current position selected o monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected 45 ORT orientation 54 SON servo ON 66 CP1 position command selection 1 67 CP2 position command selection 2 Multi function inputs 68 CP3 position command selection 3 Pape CMs 1 to 8 selection 69 ORL zero return limit signal E E 70 ORG zero return startup signal 71 FOT forward driving stop 72 ROT reverse driving stop 73 SPD speed position switching annn C102 Reset selection 03 Does not initialize internal data during reset 0 Absolute Position Control Operation RUN command on Output frequency Hz Speed command When the position command level is low the motor decelerates and its position is determined before the output frequency reaches the speed Position ready range setting P017 command level Position POK signal Position ready delay time setting P018 4 137 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used In the absolute position control mode the Inverter moves to the target position according to the fol lowing parameter settings and is then set in the position servo lock status e Position command e Speed command frequency reference e Acceleration Deceleration time The servo lock status is retained until the RUN command is turned off The frequency reference and acceleration deceleration command for absolute positio
189. I Terminal 5 Tightening Applicable resistor Crimp break Earth output Inverter model RS T ele between Screw terminal Torgus er or kW U V W mm2 size Nem leakage PD 1 PD 1 and fuse breaker P N RB mm ELB 0 4 3G3RX A4004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 12 20A max 1 8 1 2 0 75 3G3RX A4007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 max 1 8 S 20A a 1 5 3G3RX A4015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 ie 20A max 1 8 a no 2 2 3G3RX A4022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 Ta T 20A max 1 8 1 2 3 7 3G3RX A4037 2 2 2 M4 2 4 max 1 8 20A 5 5 3G3RX A4055 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 R25 an 40 A 4 0 max 7 5 3G3RX A4075 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 3 5 5 S 40 A 4 0 max 4 0 11 3G3RX A4110 5 5 5 5 5 5 M6 R5 5 6 4 4 max 40 A 15 3G3RX A4150 8 8 8 M6 8 6 a 75A B 4 9 max 8 18 5 3G3RX A4185 14 14 14 M6 14 6 4 5 75A a i 4 9 max S 45 22 3G3RX A4220 14 14 14 M6 14 6 75A 4 9 max D co 30 3G3RX A4300 22 22 Me 226 19 z 100 A 4 9 max o 5 f _ 4 i 8 1 D 37 3G3RX A4370 38 22 M8 38 8 20 0max 100 A 45 3G3RX A4450 38 22 Ms 38 8 8 1 5 150A 20 0 max 55 3G3RX A4550 60 30 Ms R60 8 Sl 150 A 20 0 max 100 20 0 75 3G3RX B4750 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A 100 4 20 0 90 3G3RX B4900 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A 150 4 7 20 0 110 3G3RX B411K 38 x 2 60 M10 150 10 35 0 max 300 A 132 3G3RX B413K 80x2 80 M10 80 10 20 0 350 A 35 0 max 1 When the cable is connected without usi
190. Inverter can input pulse trains via a multi function input With pulse counter monitor d028 you can monitor the total count of input pulses Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function inputs 74 PCNT pulse counter S eens 1 to 8 selection 75 PCC pulse counter clear Related functions d028 e The total pulse count value cannot be stored After the power is turned on or after reset the counter is reset to zero e Turning on PCC pulse counter clear clears the total count value e The input pulse frequency resolution can be obtained with the following formula This applies to pulse input with a 50 duty ratio The Inverter cannot input frequency higher than the specified frequency resolution It is recommended that you use input frequencies up to 100 Hz For details on input terminal response refer to Input Terminal Response Time page 4 108 Frequency resolution Hz 250 Input terminal response time set values C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time 1 the frequency resolution 125 Hz Input terminal response time Input pulse ON PONT Ore Counter value 4 94 suoioun 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal Selection e You can allocate the following functions to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the alarm relay output terminal C026 e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provid
191. Maintenance N WARNING Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock CAUTION AN Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Safety Information WEMaintenance and Inspection e Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement Precautions for Use Operation Stop Command e Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product 6 1 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection
192. Manual torque boost level break Energy saving operation Analog meter adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency adjustment Electronic thermal function free setting available External start end frequency rate Analog input selection Trip retry Restart during momentary power interruption Various signal outputs Reduced voltage startup Overload limit Initialization value setting Automatic deceleration at power off AVR function Automatic acceleration deceleration Auto tuning Online Offline High torque multi motor operation control sensor less vector control of two monitors with one Inverter 7 5 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Carrier frequency modification range 0 5 to 15 kHz for CT 0 5 to 12 kHz for VT Protective functions Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Electronic thermal protection Temperature error protection Momentary power interruption Power interruption protection Input phase loss protection Braking resistor overload protection Ground fault current detection at power on USP error External trip Emergency shutoff trip CT error Communication error Option error etc Ambient Storage 2 temperature 10 C to 50 C 20 C to 65 C 20 to 90 RH with no condensation ra Humidity Q E 3G3RX AN004 to A0220 z Vibration 5 9 m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz 3G3RX A0300 to A0550 B4750 to B413K g 2 94 m s
193. NC Number of encoder pulses AP _ Position deviation In the position control mode the acceleration deceleration time settings are disabled The Inverter is automatically brought into LAD cancel status The higher the position loop back gain the shorter the acceleration deceleration time For details on the pulse train input mode refer to the following e Mode 0 Pulse train with 90 phase difference Pulse train input Detected pulses Lo N Forward Reverse Time eMode 1 Forward Reverse command Pulse train Pulse train input SBP l SBN j Forward Reverse command Detected pulses Forward eves Time 4 129 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Mode 2 Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train Reverse pulse train input Detected pulses gt Forward Reverse Time Electronic Gear Function This function allows you to set a gain relative to position command or position feedback and to change the main sub motor rotation ratio particularly for synchronous operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P019 Electronic gear setting 00 Position feedback side FB 00 S position selection 01 Position command side REF P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 A oa numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 A _ denominator P022 a a 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 2 feedforward gain 1
194. NNA 13 Chapter 1 Overview Ial FUNCIONS 20 5c 92s casi are le dace Sea aces censca edule deal tater cae Ae 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names Of Parts ccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneteeeeeeeees 1 4 Chapter 2 Design 2B SIS AAUOM a tacali ot E Aa AAAA E ES EEE t 2 1 22 y WIN aese earr ieia a Deel ns eeta E A A eases 2 6 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 Operation Method scissile alate eet aren eed tea cieliy 3 3 3 2 TEStRUNPROCCCUIG sissc2hesseisedscscacaiSincdecdcnde daueve ad desasictewecie Dhaene 3 4 3 3 Test Rum Operation sieii aie eek ena e a ERR 3 5 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 8 rs NE Ses costae a Sata GI A a esc Nl T 3 11 36 Parameter Transition ste eects ected a ia i eames let ce 3 12 sat J Parameter List caccccstesittra leita A A E bebe eens 3 18 Chapter 4 Functions 4t Monitor WV 0 0 seses te eee ee gerne ee ete ye or eer eee ere 4 1 4 2 Function MOGs 3 c22s Seek k thee ee ee ee ae ss 4 8 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 119 4 4 Communication Function sx onunaan enna teencesstaae abuse uaasencete 4 139 Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting ccccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 Warning FUNCU OM se cut ces starter cael e E E EERE 5 9 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance cee cece eeeeeeecee tees eeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeneneeeeees 6 1 Chapter 7 Spec
195. O 6 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O P046 Instance Number 4 Extended control I O 1 No 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 00 Trip f 01 Trip after deceleration stop po4g Operation setting at 95 ignore o No idle mode detection i 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 No Pa FaN rotation speed 32 34 36 38 poss use train frequency 0 to 50 0 25 0 No kHz scale pose Pulse train frequency 004 to 2 00 0 10 No s filter time constant l 4 143 po57 use train frequency 400 to 100 0 No bias amount P058 fea train frequency 5 to 100 100 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 35 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ioe Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P060 i ET Eo f 0 command 0 Position range specification forward side Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P061 be ame i 0 command 1 Position range specification forward side Multi step position Position range spec
196. O Window comparator O 55 WCOI Window comparator Ol Window comparator function 4 66 56 WCO2 Window comparator O2 63 OPO Option card output Output controlled from option board Related functions C021 to C025 C026 Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection e You can set NO or NC contact output individually for multi function output terminals 11 to 15 as well as the relay output terminal e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provide open collector output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output 00 NO contact hie terminal contact selection 01 NC contact 00 C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 00 NO contact between AL2 and ALO 01 Se contact selection 01 NC contact between AL2 and ALO 4 96 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Specifications of Multi function Output Terminals 11 to 15 e Below are the specifications of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 11 rr nc ees Ee C031 to C035 set values Powar Cy Electrical characteristics supply status ON Between each terminal and CM2 00 ON OFF Voltage drop 4 V max at power on NO contact Max allowable voltage 27 V DC OFF Max allowable current 50 mA ON 2 01 ae NC contact OFF OFF WSpecifications of the Relay Output Terminals e The relay output terminals have an SPDT contact configuration Below is its operation
197. OD IE AX REM00K9070 IE 70 900 AX REMO00K9020 IE 20 900 AX REM00K9017 IE 17 900 AX REM01K9000 IE AX REM01K9070 IE 1900 AX REM01K9017 IE 1900 7 3 Options AX REM02 03KOO00 IE Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M I T KG AX REM02K1070 lIE 70 2100 310 100 240 295 210 7 AX REM02K1017 IE 17 2100 AX REM03K5035 IE 35 3500 365 100 240 350 210 8 AX REM03K5010 IE 10 3500 AX REM19 38KO000 IE 92 p D o O H e lt M Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM19K0030 IE 30 19000 AX REM19K0020 IE 20 19000 206 350 140 190 50 8 1 AX REM19K0008 IE 8 19000 AX REM19K0006 IE 6 19000 AX REM38K0012 IE 12 38000 306 350 140 290 50 14 5 7 18 aN Specifications 7 3 Options Simplified Selection Table for Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Inverter Braking resistor unit External resistor 10 ED Max motor om Braking min 3 SED OEE Braking 10 sec max for built in Braking kw Unit resistance torque 5 sec max for Braking Unit
198. OW R W 252Ah nei R W 2nd motor parameter lo 1 to 65530 0 01 A auto tuning data H233 252Bh LOW R W 252Ch H234 R W 2nd motor parameter J HIGH 0 001 1 to 9999000 2 auto tuning data H234 kgm 252Dh LOW R W 252Eh to Not used 253Ch 253Dh 2nd PI proportional gain H250 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 253Eh_ 2nd PI integral gain H251 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 253Fh 2nd P proportional gain H252 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 2540h to Not used 2546h 2547h 2nd limit at 0 Hz H260 R W Oto 1000 0 1 agaeh nd boost amountat SLY Hogy RW oto50 1 startup 0 Hz 4 215 4 4 Communication Function a Function name Fumaire R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution O code 2549h to Not used 3102h Data on H203 2nd motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity kW 90 110 132 150 160 lt Holding Register Number List 3rd Setting gt Regiei Function name paocion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F302 3103h HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 1 ae 1 to 360000 0 01 s 3104h LOW
199. P196 no a ies es amp U007 User7 selection no d001 to P196 no 2 U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P196 no U009 User 9 selection no d001 to P196 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P196 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P196 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P196 no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 57 Chapter 4 Functions A Mono WY ode aa E aE aa aoa Ea adan 4 2 Function MOGd ricercrrecrecerraceccesaersccrrerreeuseceverrress 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 4 Communication Function Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 Monitor Mode Output Frequency Monitor d001 Displays the set point of output frequency of the Inverter afected by acceleration and deceleration ramps but without compensations During stop 0 00 is displayed Display 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference Note This will correspond with the theoretical motor speed but not with the real output frequency of the inverter Output Current Monit
200. PG01 Is Used RUN commands FW RV ORT terminal Output frequency 2 1 Orientation speed setting P015 3 Position ready range setting P017 N Z pulse POK signal on la Position ready delay time setting P018 Speed control Position control 1 When the RUN command is turned on with the ORT terminal turned on the Inverter accelerates to the orientation speed P015 and then performs constant speed operation If the RUN command is turned on during operation the operation speed changes to the orientation speed when the ORT terminal is turned on 2 After the orientation speed is reached the Inverter shifts to the position control mode when the first Z pulse is detected 3 During forward run position control is performed with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 one rotation During reverse run with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 two rotations In this step the higher the position loop gain P023 the shorter the deceleration time regardless of the deceleration time setting 4 After the remaining number of pulses reaches the position ready range setting P017 the Inverter outputs the POK signal after the position ready delay time setting P018 elapses The POK output remains until the ORT signal is turned off After positioning is completed the servo lock status remains until the RUN command is turned off Note 1 Do not set a high frequency for the ori
201. R brake error R 0 OFF 1 ON 0028h ZS 0 Hz signal R 0 OFF 0029h DSE excessive speed deviation R 1 ON p 0 OFF on 1 ON 002Ah POK position ready R 0 OFF 002Bh FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 R TON ape 0 OFF 002Ch FA5 set frequency only 2 R TON 0 OFF 002Dh OL2 overload warning signal 2 R LON 9 S19 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 175 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description ODc analog O disconnection 1 ON ates detection 5 0 OFF OlDc analog Ol disconnection 1 ON were detection 5 0 OFF O2Dc analog O2 disconnection 1 ON 0080n detection a 0 OFF 0031h Not used 0032h FBV PID FB status output R EON p 0 OFF 1 ON 0033h NDc network error R 0 OFF 0034h LOG1 logic operation output 1 R TON IESP p 0 OFF 0035h LOG2 logic operation output 2 pi ON 91e 9p P 0 OFF 0036h LOG3 logic operation output 3 R T ON aoe p 0 OFF 0037h LOG4 logic operation output 4 R on gee p 0
202. R W F303 3105h HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 1 aps 1 to 360000 0 01 s 3106h LOW R W 3107h to Not used 3202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 3rd Setting gt Regiis Function name Fuman R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 3203h 3rd base frequency A303 R W 30 to 3rd max frequency 1 Hz 3204h 3rd maximum frequency A304 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 3205h to 3215h Not used 3216h a R W 3rd multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to 3rd max 0 01 Hz reference 0 A320 frequency 3217h LOW R W 3218h to 323Bh Not used 323Ch 3rd manual torque boost A342 R W oto 200 0 1 voltage 323Dh manualtorgue boost A343 RW 0to 500 0 1 requency 323Eh 3rd vit characteristics A344 R W 0 VC _ selection 1 VP 323Fh to 326Ch Not used 4 216 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function ce Function name ules R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code A392 326Dh HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 2 ET 1 to 360000 0 01 s 326Eh LOW R W A393 326Fh HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 2 FETE 1 to 360000 0 01 s 3270h LOW R W 3271h to 330B Not used 330Ch acs thermal b312 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 Ad el ctroriic thermal 0 Reduced torque characteristics 330Dh Bh b313 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection 2 Free setting 330Eh to 3
203. RB Ro and To 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 3 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period part tem Inspection point r Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter aily 1 year 2 years Check that any parts which may need tightening O Tighten securely No faults General are secure Check that no part has indications of O Visual inspection No faults overheating Check that there is no distortion with O Connection the conductor conductor Visual inspection No faults and wire Check that there is no damage to the O wire Insulation Terminal Cngk ihat inere ie O Visual inspection No faults block no damage Disconnect the wiring of the Inverter main Refer to circuit terminal block Checking the Inverter unit and measure the 9 Inverter and Main Check the resistance levels C E onverter circuit Converter resistance O between terminals Inverter unit Analog unit between the R L1 S L2 T L3 and replacement teste
204. SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 29 3 9 Parameter List Parameter f Default Greng No Function name Monitor or data range Lana during Unit Page i 9 operation 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 No 02 Automatic operation hese Energy saving A086 response accuracy 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Yes adjustment A092 Acceleration time 2 10 00 A292 2nd acceleration 10 00 time 2 A392 3rd acceleration 10 00 time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 Yes S a A093 Deceleration time 2 10 00 Cc 2 3 A293 2nd deceleration 10 00 S time 2 S A393 3rd deceleration 10 00 time 2 2 o 2 step acceleration amp A094 deceleration 00 2 selection 00 Switched via multi function input 09 2CH 2 01 Switched by setting No _ 437 o 2nd 2 step 02 Enabled only when switching forward 2 A294 acceleration reverse 00 2 deceleration a selection 8 2 st lerati E aggs 2Step acceleration 0 00 Zz frequency gt a 2nd 2 step No Hz A295 _ acceleration 0 00 frequency 0 00 to 400 00 A096 2 step deceleration 0 00 frequency 2nd 2 step No Hz A296 deceleration 0 00 frequency A097 Acceleration pattern 0p Line 01 No S selection 01 S shape curve 02 U shape curve 4 38 aogg Deceleration pattern 03 Inverted U shape curve 01 No selection 04 EL S shape curve
205. Starting frequency to Max fr om ot reference 5 A025 SE a TO MUE a Since Hz LOW ny 1222h Agan R W Multi step speed RoN 0 Starting frequency to Max fr 0 01 reference 6 A026 ete ae TOSTA a Hz 1223h LOW R W 1224h aes R W wluli step speed el 0 Starting frequency to Max fr 00 En reference 7 A027 SO ns aca Hz 5 LOW R W 1226h AOAR R W Multi step speed an 0 Starting frequency to Max fr On FE reference 8 A028 i A i sities ala Hz LOW PUW 1228h 4029 R W Multi step speed fone 0 Starting frequency to Max fr 0 01 a reference 9 A029 JITSU NS y tO MAX ec Hz 29h LOW R W 122Ah A030 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 Startina fr n vy to Naxit 0 01 sean reference 10 A030 Ih TO M eee Hz LOW GO 122Ch nos R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 Startina fr pict Naki 0 01 rene reference 11 A031 a a a A ake ee age Hz LOW PON 122Eh nose R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 Startina fr neh to Maci 0 01 6 reference 12 A032 gATOJUSNEY TOMAX Bien le OGy Hz 2Fh LOW R W 1230h A099 R W Multi step speed DaN 0 Starting frequency to Max fr on atk reference 13 A033 g Mequeney a rn ae Hz 3 LOW R W 4 185 4 4 Communication Function Riegjetar Function name Buel R W Monitor and setting parameters Hee ol No code tion 1232h ne R W Multi step speed 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 14 A034 a Hz 1233h LOW 1234h AOSS R W Mult
206. TL Torque limit enabled disabled 0000000000000200 2CH_ 2 step acceleration deceleration 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 0000000000000400 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop 0000080000000000 PPI P PI switching 0000000000001000 EXT External trip 0000100000000000 BOK Brake confirmation 0000000000002000 USP __ Power recovery restart prevention 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation 0000000000004000 CS Commercial switching 0000400000000000 LAC LAD cancel 0000000000008000 SFT _ Soft lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Position deviation clear a 0000000000010000 AT _ Analog input switching 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train position command permission 5 0000000000020000 SET3 3rd control 0002000000000000 7 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Set frequency addition 0000000000080000 7 0008000000000000 F TM Forced terminal 0000000000100000 STA 3 wire start 0010000000000000 ATR Torque reference input permission o 0000000000200000 STP _ 3 wire stop 0020000000000000 KHC_ Integrated power clear 0000000000400000 F R _ 3 wire forward reverse 0040000000000000 SON Servo ON 0000000000800000 PID PID enabled disabled 0080000000000000 FOC Preliminary excitation 0000000001000000 PIDC PID integral reset 0100000000000000 MI1 Not used 0000000002000000 7 0200000000000000 MI2 Not used 0000000004000000 CAS Con
207. Unit Input phase loss protection 00 Disabled 9006 selection 01 Enabled g a Phase loss may cause the Inverter to fail as follows e The main capacitor ripple current increases resulting in remarkable reduction in the capacitor s service life eWhen load is applied the Inverter s internal converter or thyristor may be damaged Electronic Thermal Function e Causes a trip to protect the motor from overheating Set this according to the motor rated current e Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed Outputs an alarm signal before an electronic thermal trip e Rated values will be affected by the HD ND selection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level 0 20 w Rated curmrentito 1 00 x Rated current A Rated current b312 3rd electronic thermal level b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection z 00 Reduced torque characteristics 2nd electronic thermal a b213 i 01 Constant torque characteristics 00 characteristics selection f 02 Free setting 3rd electronic thermal b313 as j characteristics selection b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal 0 to 400 0 Hz frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 b016 F
208. W 90 110 132 150 160 lt Holding Register Number List 2nd Setting gt HGR Function name eels Je R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F202 2103h HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 1 Pae 1 to 360000 0 01 s 2104h LOW R W F203 2105h HIGH R W 2nd deceleration time 1 ES 1 to 360000 0 01 s 2106h LOW R W 2107h to Not used 2202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 2nd Setting gt Regiei Function name bate R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2203h 2nd base frequency A203 R W 30 to 2nd max frequency 1 Hz 2204h 2nd max frequency A204 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 2205h to Not used 2215h 2216h eect R W 2nd multi step speed HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 2nd max 0 01 Hz reference 0 A220 frequency i 2217h LOW R W 4 212 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function ee Function name uuleL ted R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2218h to Not used 223Ah 223Bh 2nd torque boost selection A241 R W Q Manua torque Soos 1 Automatic torque boost Boshi A manyaltorque Boost Ilr iag RW 0to 200 0 1 voltage 223Dh 2nd manual torque boost A243 R W 0 to 500 0 1 frequency 0 VC ee 1 Special VP e ae ene A244 R W 2 Free Vi e selection 3 Sensorless vector 4 0 Hz sensorless vector 223Fh Not used 2nd automatic torque
209. W Register 1 to 10 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Option I F cmd W register P160 to P169 1 to 10 0000 to FFFF 0000 Option I F cmd R Register 1 to 10 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P170toP179 OPtion V 3 Hee register 0000 to FFFF 0000 Profibus Communications Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P180 Profibus node address 0 to 125 P181 Profibus clear mode 00 Clear 00 01 Last value 00 PPO P182 Profibus map selection 01 Conventional 00 02 Flexible mode 4 121 4 2 Function Mode CompoNet Communications Parameter No Function name Data Default setting 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop P045 Operation settingat go ignore 01 communications error 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop 0 Basic speed I O 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O P046 Instance number 4 Extended control I O 1 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 00 Trip 7 01 Trip after deceleration stop P048 Operation setting at idle 02 Ignore 01 mode detection 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P190 CompoNet node address 0 to 63 0 DeviceNet Communications Parameter No Function name Data Default setting P044 DeviceNet comm Watch o 9016 90109 1 00 dog timer 00
210. a LOW 120Dh AOIS HIGH 0 01 O end frequency R W O to 40000 120Eh BONE ae LOW 120Fh O start ratio A013 R W Oto Oend ratio 1 1210h O end ratio A014 R W O start ratio to 100 1 1211h O start selection A015 R W H as start frequency 1 to 30 1212h O O2 Ol sampling A016 R W 31 500 ms filter with a hysteresis of 1 0 1 Hz Drive Programmin 0 Disabling 1213h pg 9 A017 R W 1 PRG Terminal Selection l 2 Always 1213h Not used ER 1214h Not used 1215h Multi step speed selection A019 R W F Hai 1216h A020 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 0 A020 Hz 1217h LOW R W 1218h ew R W Mu ti step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency SA reference 1 Hz 1219h een R W LOW 4 184 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function pede Function name PG Aes R W Monitor and setting parameters Re ole No code tion 121Ah Aee R W Multi step speed as 0 Starting frequency to Max fr on T reference 2 A022 OPENS RIG TOMAX a tera ne Hz LOW TAN 121Ch noaa R W Muli Step Speen ad 0 Starting frequency to Max fr on reference 3 A023 See pats eee Hz 121Dh LOW R W 121Eh A024 R W Multi step speed HIGH 0 Startina fr to Max f 0 01 l haiehanged aes arting frequency to Max frequency Hz 21Fh LOW R W 1220h A029 R W Multi step speed ven 0
211. a low speed range These have VC characteristics only for low deceleration in reduced torque characteristics Output voltage L 100 J Vv C Output i frequency Hz 0 H i 1 gt 10 ofbase Base Max frequency frequency frequency k v IN v IN v J Period a Provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 Hz to 10 of the base frequency Example If the base frequency is 50 Hz the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 5 Hz Period b Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10 to 100 of the base frequency The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1 7th power of the frequency Period c Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency Free V f Setting e You can set desired V f characteristics by setting 7 points of voltage and frequency b100 to b113 e The free V f frequencies should always be 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 lt 7 All the default settings are 0 Hz You must set Free V f setting 7 first Operation is disabled by factory default lf the free V f setting is enabled the functions of torque boost A041 A241 base frequency A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 are disabled Free V f frequency 7 is regarded as the maximum frequency Parameter No Function name Data Description Default setting U
212. ach set value Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM Stores a set value in EEPROM Re calculates internal parameters Available Available Available Not available Not available Not available Not available Available Available Not available Available Available Enabled only when b084 is set to 01 or 02 Clears trip data The following describes each command 4 147 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 00 gt Inputs the forward reverse stop command To use this command set A002 to 03 RS485 e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 aie and PF Gommunigaton with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 00 Data Transmission data 1 byte i Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Data Description Note 0 Stop command 1 Forward command 2 Reverse command Example To send a forward command to station 01 STX 01 00 1 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D lt _ gt e Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 160 Error response Refer to page 4 160 lt Command 01 gt Sets fre
213. actual DC voltage of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 V Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 Displays a regenerative braking load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding the value set in usage rate of the regenerative braking function b090 E06 Braking resistor overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 Electronic Thermal Monitor d104 Displays an electronic thermal load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding 100 E05 Overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 4 2 Function Mode 4 2 Function Mode lt Group F Basic Function Parameters gt Output Frequency Setting Monitor e Set the Inverter output frequency With frequency reference selection A001 set to 02 you can set the output frequency with F001 For other methods refer to the A001 section in Frequency Reference Selection page 4 10 If A001 is set other than to 02 F001 functions as the frequency reference monitor e f a frequency is set in F001 the same value is automatically set in multi step speed reference 0 A020 To set the 2nd 8rd control use the 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A320 or use F001 with the SET SET3 terminal turned on To set using the SET SETS3 terminal allocate 08 SET 17 SETS to
214. adjustment default C091 Not used SSE 00 No dee te Do not change C101 UP DWN selection 00 Do not store the frequency data o No 490 01 Store the frequency data 00 Trip reset at power on 01 Trip reset when the power is OFF 4 87 5 C102 Reset selection 02 Enabled only during trip Reset when the 00 Yes 4 137 5 power is ON 03 Trip reset only Reset frequenc 00 0 Fiz stari C103 matehin re 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 87 9 02 Active Frequency Matching restart C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 110 C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes wn C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes ste oO C109 AM bias setting 0 to 100 0 Yes C110 AMI bias setting 0 to 100 20 Yes Overload warning 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated i CT level 2 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current No a 4 43 H C121 O zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default o C122 Olzero adjustment 0 to 65535 pano Yes 5 default C123 O2 zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 27 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default eno Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Pag
215. al operator can save four inverter s parameter sets or one inverter s parameter set and its Drive Programming It can be selected via the R W Storage Mode in the LCD configuration Option Mode Note If Read operation cannot be executed please check the Read Lock option in the LCD configuration Option Mode R W Storage Mode Single READ WRITE function When the R W Storage Mode is selected to 01 Single this is done in the LCD configuration Option Mode the function Read or Write is executed immediately after pressing 4 or key After pressing the _ key in any display mode except Write mode and Option mode the inverter s parameter configuration are read and saved into LCD digital operator Drive Programming program will be transferred to the LCD digital operator automatically after parameter reading is finished If the inverter supports Drive Programming function it returns to the previous display after read function is completed After pressing the _ key in any display mode except Read mode and Option mode the parameter settings stored in LCD digital operator are transferred to the inverter If the inverter supports Drive Programming it will be transferred to the inverter automatically after the parameter copy is finished It will return to the previous display after write function is completed R W Storage Mode Quad READ function When the R W storage mode is selected to 02 Quad
216. ameters Selected signal E PE 33 Logic operation output 1 LOG1 C142 C143 C144 34 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 C145 C146 C147 35 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 C148 C149 C150 36 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 C151 C152 C153 37 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 C154 C155 C156 38 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 C157 C158 C159 Example To output a logic output 1 LOG1 signal through AND operation of RUN signal 00 RUN and over set frequency arrival signal 02 FA2 to multi function output 2 e Multi function input 2 selection C002 33 LOG1 e Logic output signal 1 selection 1 C142 00 RUN e Logic output signal 1 selection 2 C143 02 FA2 Logic output signal 1 operator selection C144 00 AND Capacitor Life Warning Signal e This function determines estimated service life of the capacitor on the PCB based on the Inverter s internal temperature and ON time Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal e If this function is activated it is recommended that the main circuit board and logic board be replaced Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output terminal selection 39 WAC Relay output AL2 AL1 Capacitor life warning signal on PCB function selection C021 to C025 C026 05 4 103 4 2 Function Mode Network Error e Enabled only when ModBus RTU is selected for RS485 com
217. ard run it is judged as being normal When running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse command is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal If sensor vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters de pending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Operation status Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item During startup ee during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During Reduce the speed response H005 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During HHS E oid Set a overload limit level lower than that of the b021 torque limit q sre g torq torque b041 to b044 P Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 Related functions A001 A044 F001 b040 H002 H003 H004 H020 H021 H022 H023 H050 H051 H052 P011 P012 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 kHz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use a lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value 6041 to b044 while keeping t
218. ary excitation Preliminary excitation function 4 119 56 MI1 Drive Programming input 1 57 MI2 Drive Programming input 2 58 MI3 _ Drive Programming input 3 59 Ml4 Drive Programming input 4 Drive Programming input 1 to 8 60 MI5 Drive Programming input 5 61 MI6 Drive Programming input 6 62 MIZ Drive Programming input 7 63 MI8 Drive Programming input 8 65 AHD Analog command held Analog command held 4 93 C001 to 66 CP1_ Position command selection 1 C008 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 4 138 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit signal Absolute position control mode 70 ORG Zero return startup signal 71 FOT Forward driving stop 4 141 72 ROT Reverse driving stop 73 SPD Speed Position switching 4 139 74 PCNT Pulse counter Multi function pulse counter 4 94 75 PCC Pulse counter clear 82 PRG Drive program start Drive program start no NO No allocation e You can select NO or NC contact input for each multi function input terminal Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit 00 NO contact C011 to Multi function input 01 NC contact 00 C018 operation selection e You can set NO and NC contact inputs a individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal e NO contact ON with the contact closed OFF with the contact open C019 FW terminal operation NC contact ON with the contact open OFF 00 2 selection with the
219. ase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 ___ Insufficient torque at low Parameter x 1 2 Regeneration f IH requency several Hz Increase motor parameter lo gradually up to set H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shock oc rs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 startup startup During Reduce the speed response H005 H205 deceleration Motor hunting Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Immediately after deceleration Reduce motor parameter lo gradually down to set Overcurrent or parameter x 0 8 H023 H223 H033 overvoltage protection is activated Set AVR selection A081 to 00 always ON or 01 AOAI always OFF Low frequency operation Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Related functions A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 H060 H260 H061 H261 4 117 4 2 Function Mode Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 KHz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 Set a torque limit value b041 to b044 while keeping the value o calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn o
220. ator keys Run Fwd Run Rev and Stop Reset READ key It transfers inverter parameters to the LCD digital operator s memory WRITE key It copies one Parameter Set or a Parameter Set Drive Programming saved in LCD digital operator to the inverter ESC key It returns to the above layer SET key It jumps to the below layer or stores the change introduces on the edit layer after that it jumps to the above layer 3 17 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Name Function UP key It is used to move up the cursor it increases a function code in 1 or increases a parameter value DOWN key It is used to move down the cursor it decreases a function code in 1 or it decreases a value PREV PAGE key It is used to move the cursor to the left or it moves to previous mode when the display is a navigation level NEXT PAGE key It is used to move the cursor to the right or it moves to the next mode when the display is a navigation level FWD RUN key It is used to run forward the motor only when the operation command A002 is reset in Digital operator REV RUN key It is used to run reverse the motor only when the operation command A002 is set in Digital operator STOP RESET key It is used to stop the motor or reset an alarm It is also possible to invalidate the STOP key by B087 parameter Besides it does not response when LCD digital operator is readin
221. be changed 22h during operation e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil WESaving the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command 4 173 Even if using the command to write into the holding register 06h or into the consecutive holding registers 10h no change can be saved in the Inverter s memory element If the Inverter power shuts off without saving any changes the holding register returns to the status before the changes were made To save the holding register changes in the Inverter s memory element the Enter Command must be issued according to the following procedure When the control parameters are changed the motor parameters must be re calculated In this case perform re calculation with this register To issue the Enter command Write all memory data into the holding register with the write command 06h and write re calculated motor parameters into holding register 0900h Below are the values to be written into the holding register Set value Description 0000 Motor parameter re calculation 0001 Set value storage Other than the above Motor parameter re calculation and set value storage Note e The Enter command needs considerable time Monitor the data writing signal coil number 001Ah to check whether the data is being written e Since the Inverter s memory element has a limit
222. ble capacity or one rank lower motor size For motors with other capacities correct constant data may not be obtained In some cases auto tuning may not be completed In this case pressing the STOP RESET key displays an error message elf DC injection braking selection A051 is set to 01 enabled the data cannot be measured correctly Be sure to set to 00 disabled The default setting is 00 disabled elf 02 auto tuning with motor rotation is selected in auto tuning selection H001 note the following Make sure there is no problem even if the motor accelerates up to approx 80 of the base frequency The motor is not driven by external equipment The brake is released During auto tuning the output torque is insufficient which may cause an elevator system to slip and fall To prevent this remove the motor from the load machine and perform the auto tuning for the motor separately In this case moment of inertia J is determined for the single motor You should add a motor shaft conversion value of the load machine s moment of inertial to parameter J With a machine e g lift ball screw whose motor shaft rotation is limited the machine may be damaged if the allowable rotation limit is exceeded In this case set H001 to 01 auto tuning without motor rotation With a motor whose no load current is unknown measure the current at 50 Hz in the V f setting mode and perform auto tuning after setting the curr
223. braking function ON ON ON Regenerative braking 100 s gt function activated Usage rate ee _ x 100 100s 00 Disabled This function is not active 01 Enabled during operation This function is Regenerative active 9099 PEA tenet ee Disabled during stop This function is not active 00 _ P 02 Enabled during both operation and stop This function is active Regenerative 200 V class 330 to 380 Z a b096 braking function 400 V class 660 to 760 V 400 V class ON level Inverter DC voltage 720 V The regenerative braking function ON level conforms to the voltage setting for the Inverter s internal converter DC unit Cooling Fan Control e You can set whether to operate the Inverter s cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b092 Cooling fan control 00 Always ON 01 ON during RUN Regardless of the settings the cooling fan operates for 5 minutes after power on and for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops 01 Note If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is shut off while the cooling fan is in operation the cooling fan stops temporarily and restarts automatically after power recovery 4 74 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode External Thermistor TH e This function enables thermal protection of the external equipment e g motor if its internal thermist
224. braking power A054 a Edge operation b Level operation ON ON RUN RUN l command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference reference Output Output frequency frequency A053 Frequency Limit e You can set both the upper lower limits to the output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A061 Frequency upper limit Va a it A062 to 0 0 A261 2nd frequency upper limit a a T aaa 0 0 z A062 Frequency lower limit A T to Frequency 0 0 A262 2nd frequency lower limit E a a 0 0 Related functions C001 to C008 4 28 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on e Does not accept any frequency reference beyond the upper lower limits e Set the upper limit first Make sure that the upper limit A061 A261 is larger than the lower limit A062 A262 e Make sure that the upper and lower limiter settings do not exceed the maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 e Make sure that the output frequency F001 and multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 are not lower than the lower limit setting and not higher than the upper limit setting e Neither limit works if set to 0 Hz e Disabled when the 3rd control is selected M When Using O L and OI L Output frequency Hz e Once the lower limit is set the Inverter outputs t
225. ce 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 2 suoe1ado 3vueuaueN Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy eee If an error occurs in the external equipment or devices the Inverter Has any error occurred in the external External receives an input signal then the devices when the external trip function is E12 0 4 84 trip drives output is shut off selected Available with the external trip Correct the external device error function selected Appears when ne oes ae turnega When the USP function was selected did on with the RUN signal input into the f you turn on the power with the RUN USP trip Inverter E13 0 4 84 i signal input into the Inverter Cancel the Available with the USP function RUN command and turn on the power selected Protects the Inverter if a ground fault Is there any ground fault Check the between the Inverter output unit and output wires and motor Ground the motor is detected when turning Is there any error in the Inverter itself fault trip on the power E14 0 Disconnect the output wires to check 4 This function does not work when Is there any error in the main circuit there is residual voltage in the
226. ce mH A2004 0 4 AX RC10700032 DE 3 2 10 70 A2007 0 7 AX RC06750061 DE 6 1 6 75 A2015 1 5 AX RC03510093 DE 9 3 3 51 A2022 2 2 AX RC02510138 DE 13 8 2 51 A2037 3 7 AX RC01600223 DE 22 3 1 60 A2055 5 5 AX RC01110309 DE 30 9 1 11 A2075 7 5 AX RC00840437 DE 43 7 0 84 200V A2110 11 0 AX RC00590614 DE 61 4 0 59 A2150 15 0 AX RC00440859 DE 85 9 0 44 A2185 A2220 18 5 to 22 AX RC00301275 DE 127 5 0 30 A2300 30 AX RC00231662 DE 166 2 0 23 A2370 37 AX RC00192015 DE 201 5 0 19 A2450 45 AX RC00162500 DE 250 0 0 16 A2550 55 AX RC00133057 DE 305 7 0 13 A4004 0 4 AX RC43000020 DE 2 0 43 00 A4007 0 7 AX RC27000030 DE 3 0 27 00 A4015 15 AX RC14000047 DE 4 7 14 00 A4022 22 AX RC10100069 DE 6 9 10 10 A4037 4 0 AX RC06400116 DE 11 6 6 40 CH A4055 5 5 AX RC04410167 DE 16 7 4 41 2 A4075 7 5 AX RC03350219 DE 21 9 3 35 A4110 11 0 AX RC02330307 DE 30 7 2 33 Y A4150 15 0 AX RC01750430 DE 43 0 1 75 O 400V A4185 A4220 18 5 to 22 AX RC01200644 DE 64 4 1 20 A4300 30 AX RC00920797 DE 79 7 0 92 A4370 37 AX RC00741042 DE 104 2 0 74 A4450 45 AX RC00611236 DE 123 6 0 61 A4550 55 AX RC00501529 DE 152 9 0 50 B4750 75 AX RC00372094 DE 209 4 0 37 B4900 90 AX RC00312446 DE 244 6 0 31 B411K 110 AX RC00252981 DE 298 1 0 25 B413K 132 AX RC00213613 DE 361 3 0 21 7 22 7 3 Options External EMC Filter AX FIROOOO RE Dimensional Drawing Footprint Dimensions H mW drive mounts H
227. ce via O2 01 Depends on the RUN direction 4 127 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P039 Speed limit value in 0 00 to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz torque control forward P040 Speed limit value in 0 00 to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz torque control reverse 00 Disabled 01 Set via the Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 Set via terminal O2 00 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 P038 Torque bias polarity 00 As per sign 00 _ selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction Multi function inputs re C001 to C008 1 to 8 selection 52 ATR torque reference input permission Related functions d009 d010 d012 Control Block Diagram ATR terminal Speed detection value Torque limit Torque reference Reference value for current control The speed control P control operates when a speed detection value exceeds the limit value Pulse Train Position Control Mode To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 01 pulse train position control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only Select a pulse train position command input mode in pulse train mode selection P013
228. celeration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switching SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 drive programming input 1 MI2 drive programming input 2 MI3 drive programming input 3 MI4 drive programming input 4 MI5 drive programming input 5 MI6 drive programming input 6 MI7 drive programming input 7 MI8 drive programmi
229. ch the terminal input is determined in multi step speed position determination time C169 This prevents the transition status before the input determination from being applied e If no input is made after the time set in C169 the data is determined Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination time C169 With determination time C169 pe Frequency reference A Determination time C169 Juno ZS CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 4 17 4 2 Function Mode HBit Operation e By allocating 32 to 38 SF1 to SF7 to any of multi function inputs selection 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 7 For SF1 to SF7 frequency settings set multi step speeds 1 to 7 A021 to A027 Frequency from the Multi step speeds SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1 h Digital Opefatot or Oth OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th th external analog input terminal 1st x x x x x x ON 2nd x x x x x ON OFF 3rd x x x x ON OFF OFF 4th x x x ON OFF OFF OFF 5th x x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 6th x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 7th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF e When several terminals are simultaneously turned on priority is given to the terminal with the smallest number The x mark in the above table indicates that speed is selected regardless of ON OFF status Jogging O
230. control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 24 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A005 O OI selection 00 Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 03 04 Switches between O OI via terminal AT Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between Ol FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 No 4 12 A006 O2 selection 00 01 02 03 O2 only O OI auxiliary frequency reference not reversible O OI auxiliary frequency reference reversible O2 disabled 03 No 4 12 Analog input Others A011 O start frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A012 O end frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A013 O start ratio 0 to O end ratio No A014 O end ratio O start ratio to 100 100 No A015 O start selection 00 01 External start frequency A011 set value 0 Hz 01 No 4 14 A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz hysteresis 31 No 4 15 A017 Drive P
231. correctly according to your motor e To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00 lf the automatic torque boost cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust each item as shown in the following table Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item Gradually increase the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 Insufficient torque at low Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic A047 A247 speed torque boost Motor does not run atlow Gradually increase the voltage compensation gain of the automatic speed torque boost AOIB NAIG Reduce the set value of the carrier frequency b083 Rotation speed lowers Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic A047 A247 when load is applied torque boost Rotation speed increases Gradually reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque f A047 A247 when load is applied boost Gradually reduce the voltage compensation gain of the automatic A046 A246 torque boost Overcurrent trip occurs 7 F A 7 when load is applied Aia reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque A047 A247 Gradually reduce the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 Control Method V f Characteristics You can set V f characteristics output voltage output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting U
232. ction 00 Disabled 01 Enabled 00 4 114 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Selection e Set this parameter according to your motor e To use several motors with a single Inverter in the VC special VP or free V F setting control mode calculate the total capacity of the motors and select the closest value in the motor capacity selection When automatic torque boost is used improper setting of this parameter may result in torque reduction or motor hunting e The motor parameters for sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control can be selected from the following three types Motor parameter of a standard motor Motor parameter measured by offline auto tuning e Arbitrarily set motor parameter e For 3rd control motor parameters specified for 1st control are used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics ae Special VP RE I Ma eharacensties og vit tree setting 7 00 E 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 1 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 1 05 Sensor vector control V2 1 Notor parameter 00 Standard motor parameter H002 H202 pars 01 Auto tuning parameter 00 selection j 02 Online auto tuning parameter H003 H203 Motor capacity 93 to 160 0 Factory default kW select
233. ction name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters Re gu No code tion Overvoltage protection 0 Disabled 1385h function selection during b130 R W 1 DC voltage kept constant deceleration 2 Acceleration enabled Overvoltage protection 200 V class 330 to 390 V 13801 level during deceleration 9131 BY 400 V class 660 to 780 V nM 1387h OVervoltage protection b132 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s parameter 1388h OVervoltage protection b133 Rw 0to 255 0 01 proportional gain setting isegi overage protection b134 R W 0to 65535 0 001 s integral time setting 1390h to Not used 1400h 4 197 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolu tion 1401h Multi function input 1 selection co01 R W 1402h Multi function input 2 selection C002 R W 1403h Multi function input 3 selection C003 R W 1404h Multi function input 4 selection C004 R W 1405h Multi function input 5 selection C005 R W 1406h Multi function input 6 selection C006 R W 1407h Multi function input 7 selection C007 R W 1408h Multi function input 8 selection C008 R W 01 RV reverse 02 CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 03 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 04 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 05 CF4 multi step speed setti
234. d power running regeneration reverse power running and regeneration lt Terminal switching mode gt Switches over torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 depending on combinations of torque limit switchings 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 allocated to multi function inputs Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Analog input mode gt Sets a torque limit value depending on the voltage applied to terminal O2 on the control terminal block 0 to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0 to 200 Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Option option 1 option 2 mode gt Enabled when an optional 3G3AX DI01 board is used For details refer to the optional board instruction manual lf the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned on When TL is off the torque limit setting is disabled and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value Unless the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in torque limit selection b040 is always enabled e With this function the torque limit value is set with the Inverter s maximum output current as 200 This means output torque varies depending on the combination of motors Note that the torque limit value is not the absolute one When the torque limit signal is selected in the multi f
235. de b085 01 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 90 kW 110 132 150 160 EU mode b085 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 lf the data is a numeric value refer to the function code list Example When acceleration time F002 is set to 30 00 sec the data is 3000 Negative res 4 157 ponse Refer to page 4 160 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 07 gt Writes data to a specified setting item e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 01 to 32 and FF Communication Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 07 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes 1 Parameter data P Data Decimal ASCII code S bytes il BCC Block checkcode 2 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 1 Allowable parameter ranges are shown below From F002 A001 b001 C001 H001 and P001 For F001 use command 01 2 Refer to command 06 e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 160 Negative response Refer to page 4 160 lt Command 08 gt Initializes each set value Initialization conforms to the setti
236. ding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 3 oe aN oie nae econ 01 OR a p 02 XOR C151 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 48 uoeiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Gremgee Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation C152 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 00 AND aaee oo op 02 XOR C154 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 5 C155 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 g selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 amp Logi tput signal 5 Coane y3 o E Beco Seat an 01 OR oe E p 02 XOR C157 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C158 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 i 00 AND C159 ee R aaa 6 01 OR 00 operator selectio 02 XOR teary eee terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 1 c161 MPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 2 c162 bot terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 3 e Input terminal S C163 0 to 200 x 2 ms
237. e 4 108 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Digital FM Terminal e You can monitor the output frequency and current using the FM terminal on the control circuit terminal block e The FM terminal provides pulse output MFM Selection e Select a signal to output from the following table For 03 digital output frequency use the digital frequency counter For other output signals use the analog meter Parameter No Data Description Full scale value 00 Output frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 3 01 Output current example 1 0 to 200 02 Output torque example 1 0 to 200 03 Digital output frequency example 2 0 to Max frequency Hz 04 Output voltage example 1 0 to 100 05 Power example 1 0 to 200 06 Thermal load rate example 1 0 to 100 ne 07 LAD frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 08 Digital current monitor A 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 12 Drive programming output YAO 5 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 1 This output is enabled only when SLV 0 Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 Example 1 Set values 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 12 Example 2 Set values 03 08 lt gt l gt gt Cycle T Constant
238. e Output Voltage Gain Changes the Inverter output voltage based on the voltage selected in AVR voltage selection A082 as 100 e You can avoid motor hunting by reducing the output voltage gain Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Related functions A082 AVR voltage selection A082 A045 Base frequency Max frequency A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking is applied to the motor depending on the motor load e Two methods are available for DC injection braking One is the external method via the multi function input terminal the other is the internal method performed automatically to start stop the motor Even if DC injection braking is used however the motor may not stop depending on the moment of inertia of the motor load Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit i ai 00 Disabled A051 Po injector saang 01 Enabled 01 02 Frequency control A052 set value A052 D injection braking 9 99 6400 00 0 5 Hz frequency A053 De inaction braking Gi tos 0 0 0 s delay time 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 A054 DC injection braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 A055 DC injection braking time 0 0 to 60 0 0 5 s A056 DC injection braking 00 Edge operation 01 S method selection 01 Level operation eee Startup DC injectio
239. e Data Default setting Unit b038 Initial screen selection 000 to 202 001 Note With 00 screen on which the Enter key was last pressed selected if the last screen is other than d or F the entrance of each group is displayed Example When the power is turned off and then on after a change in the A020 setting A is displayed 4 56 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode User Parameter Automatic Setting Function eWhen user parameter automatic setting function b039 is set to 01 enabled the parameters subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence from U001 to U012 This data can be used as changed data e The screen information is stored when the Enter key is pressed The monitor screens d are also stored in the same manner U001 is the most recent parameter and U012 is the oldest e The same parameter cannot be stored If the number of parameters stored exceeds 12 the oldest data U012 is erased Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit User parameter automatic 00 Disabled p033 setting function selection 01 Enabled 00 Related functions U001 to U012 Torque Limit Function e This function limits motor output torque when 03 sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 Sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 Parameter No
240. e No setting operation C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C134 Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 O 5 C135 Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C136 Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No s 4 108 oO o C137 Output 14 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 bs C138 Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C139 Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 os 6 c141 Relay output OFF 9 9 to 100 0 0 0 delay C142 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 oon oie o are ie 010R 0o p 02 XOR C145 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 z Logic output signal 2 00 AND 5 ae P A oni DEOR 0o a 02 XOR No 4 102 C148 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C149 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 5 Logic output signal 3 00 AND oie nae econ 01 OR a p 02 XOR C
241. e b053 is too long an undervoltage trip occurs because of insufficient regeneration power Main circuit P N voltage VPN V b052 b051 Undervoltage level Time s Output frequency Hz Time s 4 64 suonun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop DC Voltage Constant Control b050 02 without recovery b050 03 with recovery lf a momentary power interruption or main circuit DC voltage drop occurs during operation the Inverter decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in momentary power interruption non stop target voltage OV LADSTOP level b052 e This function is started when the following conditions are all satisfied e b050 02 or 03 e The Inverter is running This function is disabled during trip undervoltage stop e The control power supply is momentarily interrupted or the main circuit DC voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 e This function is enabled when the above starting conditions are satisfied even if the J51 connector cable is disconnected from terminals Ro and To and is connected from main terminal P to Ro and from N and To or even if the control power supply is separated from the main circuit power supply e If the time of momentary power interruption is short the Inverter can continue to run without shutting off the output However if undervoltage occurs beca
242. e 00 No S setting 01 Reverse side 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 53 3 9 Parameter List Parameter 5 Default ioe N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation po17 oben ready range 0 to 10000 5 No Pulse 4123 setting 4 129 po1g Position ready delay 000 to 9 99 0 00 No ge ates time setting 4 129 Electronic gear si pono seingpostion eet ma ae REP o ves selection P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 Yes Saa numerator f 4 125 P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 Yes on denominator Position control P022 feedforward gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 Yes 4 120 4 124 P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 Yes rad s 4 125 4 129 4 131 P024 Position bias amount 2048 to 2048 0 Yes 4 124 Secondary resistance compensation 00 Disabled gt FOSS enable disable 01 Enabled 09 Ne E emg selection wn E pgss OY epea error 0 0 to 150 0 135 0 No 5 6 3 detection level Speed deviati po27 9PS89 deviation error 00 to 120 00 7 50 No Hz 4 120 detection level poza Motor gear tao 1 to 9999 o no numerator 4 128 po2g Motor gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 No denominator Acceleration ie tis ri P031 deceleration time p 00 No 4 8 inbi t
243. e braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load COPS SEE Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Safe Use installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
244. e confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi function input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to be turned off for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without decelerating after the brake release signal is turned off If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 7 after the brake release signal is turned off 7 After the brake confirmation signal is turned off or after the brake release signal is turned off if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in stop wait time b123 elapses b0125 Brake release b127 Brake input frequency frequency Output frequency 7 5 gt m gt lt lt gt b123 Brake wait time RUN command 2 b121 Brake wait for stopping time for release Brake release signal oo PS b122 Acceleration wait time E a Brake confirmation signal 3 b124 Brake confirmation 6 _ b124 Brake confirmation wait time i wait time Note The above operation chart applies to a case where the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK is selected for any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 If BOK is not selected the accelera
245. e function codes of these parameters are not displayed Function Mode setting In this mode F U group parameters can be displayed and set Function code function name parameter content and parameter range are shown Note d group inverter parameter cannot be set and displayed in this mode Trip Mode Trip information and warning information are displayed in this mode With inverter trip or a warning happens the trip screen will be displayed from any display modes In Option Mode Read Mode and Write Mode the LED or WARNING LED will light up BE 3 6 uoiei9do Operation 3 4 Operation 2 Option Mode 1 Please press A gt and key at the same time to enter into the OPTION MODE The cursor will appear in the first row of the Option Mode menu Use A or key to move between the option F Mode menu To return to the navigator layer press the __ key Read Lock 2 Select the Language option and press the key The cursor will appear in the Language option value Use the A or key to select the value to set Press the key to store the new value Press the __ key to cancel the new value Es And then 3 The cursor will appear in the second row 2 Date and Time 4 Pressing the key it enters to the Date and Time layer Use the J o
246. e integrated power integrated value of input power of the Inverter The gain conversion of displayed data is performed with integrated power display gain b079 d015 display Input power calculation value kWh Integrated power display gain b079 b079 1 to 1000 Can be set in increments of 1 When integrated power clear d078 is set to 01 pressing the Enter key clears the integrated power value e The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input if 53 KHC Integrated power clear is allocated to any of the multi function input terminals e When b079 is set to 1000 up to 999000 kWh can be displayed Display 0 to 999999 9 Displays in increments of 1 kWh b079 set value Total RUN Time d016 Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter Display 0 to 999999 Displays in increments of 1 hour Power ON Time Monitor d017 Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter Display 0 to 999999 Displays in increments of 1 hour Fin Temperature Monitor d018 Displays the temperature of the fin inside the Inverter Display 0 20 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C suoioun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Motor Temperature Monitor d019 e Displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between the control circuit terminals TH and CM1 Set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC enabled Display 0 20 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C
247. e item Page 01 RV Reverse command RUN command 02 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 1 03 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 2 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 04 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 3 05 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 06 JG Jogging Jogging operation 4 18 ene DC injection braking external DC C001 to 07 DB External DC injection braking injection braking 4 24 600g 08 SET 2nd control 2nd 3rd control function 4 82 09 2CH _ 2 step acceleration deceleration 2 step acceleration aeceleration 4 37 function 11 FRS Free run stop Free run stop 4 71 12 EXT External trip External trip 4 84 13 USP USP function Power recovery restart prevention 4 84 function 14 CS Commercial switch Commercial switch 4 85 4 79 4 2 Function Mode cides Data Function name Reference item Page 15 SFT _ Soft lock Soft lock 4 51 16 AT Analog input switching External analog input 4 12 17 SET3 3rd control 2nd 3rd control function 4 82 18 RS Reset Reset 4 87 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 3 wire input function 4 88 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID enabled disabled 24 PIDC PID integral reset ai 26 CAS Control gain switching Control gain switching 4 89 27 UP _ UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN _ UP DWN func
248. e open collector output The alarm relay output terminal provides relay output e You can select NO or NC contact output for each output terminal with C031 to C035 or C036 e f alarm code output is selected in C062 refer to page 4 101 alarm code output ACO to AC3 is provided via output terminals 11 to 13 for 3 bit code or via output terminals 11 to 14 for 4 bit Functions code The C021 to C025 settings are disabled Data Description Reference item Page 00 RUN Signal during RUN Signal during RUN 4 98 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 98 02 FA2 Over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL Overload warning Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 04 OD Excessive PID deviation PID function 4 31 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 98 07 OTQ Overtorque Overtorque 4 100 08 IP Signal during momentary power interruption Momentary power interruption Undervoltage 4 44 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ Torque limit Torque limit function 4 57 11 RNT RUN time over RUN time over 4 52 12 ONT Power ON time over Power ON time over 4 52 13 THM Thermal warning Electronic thermal function 4 46 19 BRK Brake release Brake control function 4 76 20 BER Brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 0 Hz detection signal 4 101 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation V2 control mode se
249. e to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Precautions for Use installation e Install the Inverter vertically on the wall In Nop er HE EHE ee Position for installing a screw Main Circuit Power Supply e Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage 2 2 u s q Design 2 1 Installation Hinstallation Environment Increased ambient temperatures will shorten the life of the Inverter Keep the Inverter away from heating elements such as a braking resistor DC reactor etc If the Inverter is installed in an enclosure keep the ambient temperature within the range of the specifications taking dimensions and ventilation into consideration Save enough space to prevent the upper and lower wiring ducts from blocking cooling airflow Airflow Inverter Inverter 1 10cm min 5 cm min 5 cm min
250. ected 4 5 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is do30 Current position selected 4 5 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is 4 132 selected d031 Clock Setting Data and Time for the LCD digital operator d060 Inverter mode 00 to 01 dogo Falt frequency 9 to 65535 Time 45 monitor d081 Fault monitor 1 Latest 4 6 d082 Fault monitor 2 Error code condition of occurrence 4 6 d083 Fault monitor 3 Output frequency Hz Output current A 4 6 Internal DC voltage V d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 6 do85 Fault monitor 5 gt ON time h 4 6 d086 Fault monitor 6 4 6 Warning code d090 Warning monitor 0 to 385 4 6 d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 6 Regenerative d103 braking load rate 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 monitor A Seer One mene Gonari00L0 E E monitor 3 22 uoeiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default BL 8 N Function name Monitor or data range i during Unit Page o setting operation 0 0 Starting frequency to 1st 2nd 3rd max F001 Pa ta frequency Yes Hz 4 8 9 0 00 to 400 00 F002 Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 F202 Znd acceleration 9 94 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F302 3rd acceleration 4 44 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F003 Dec
251. een SECUN Sag me mounted on ption POH E69 0 Check that the mounting is correct Option 2 Detects an error on the board i Ahi oe poaraibeen securely o lt n mounted on opion porta E79 0 Check that the mounting is correct Has the incoming power supply voltage Shows the waiting status after the dropped Power recovery i Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or incoming Inverter voltage decreases Undervoltage Mg and shuts off 2s standby This error also appears durin Replace MCCB Mg ppi Ing Is the voltage between P and N momentary power interruption normal Check the voltage between P and N Has the remote cable plug been inserted properly __ Appears if an error occurs between Check the remote cable inserted Communications PLA COM sifot the Digital Operator and the ERROR correctly Inverter Has the Digital Operator been inserted properly Check the Digital Operator contact Appears in the restart standby Retry status when the momentary power _ _ standby interruption trip retry functions are enabled Power 3 Power shutoff Appears when the power is shut off OFF Appears if the limited RUN RUN l i command is received while the command coh el E ai E rotation direction is limited to one is limited direction with b035 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operato
252. eference Common terminal for the frequency setting common signals O O2 and Ol and the analog output terminals AM and AMI Do not connect this terminal to the ground 2 7 Continued to the next page 2 2 Wiring Terminal symbol Terminal name Description Specifications Analog Monitor output AM Multi function analog output Voltage This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque with without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable max current 2mA AMI Multi function analog output Current This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable load impedance 250 Q max Digital contact Monitor output FM Multi function digital output This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output PWM monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature Fin temperature Digital output frequency and Digita
253. effective values The Inverter output Diode waveform under PWM 600V 0 1 Amin 200 V class control has a margin of 1000 V 0 1 Amin 400 V class Measurement Method of Output Voltage error especially at a Moving coil type low frequency Effective value of fundamental wave VAC 300 V 200 V class General purpose Vac 1 1 x VDC 600 V 400 V class testers are not applicable because of noise in many cases 6 10 soueUs UIeWY pue uoIedsu Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List cceee 7 1 7 2 Dimensional Drawing cccesseeeseeeeeeeeees 7 7 T I OPUONS woctecccsieeeceaautetessceade eae ccrnesvavastecsans 7 15 E Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List 7 1 Standard Specification List M Three phase 200 V Class Class 3 phase 200 V Model name 8G3RX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 Max atCT 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 applicable kW motor 4P at VT 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 atCT 1 0 1 7 2 5 3 6 5 7 8 3 11 0 15 9 22 1 26 3 200 V Rated output atvVT 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 1 6 7 10 4 15 2 20 0 26 3 29 4 capacity kVA act 1 2 20 31 43 68 99 133 19 1 26 6 31 5 240 V atVT 1 5 2 6 3 9 5 0 8 1 12 4 18 2 24 1 31 5 35 3 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V
254. el b052 or higher occurs because of regeneration during deceleration the Inverter is kept in the LAD STOP status until the overvoltage condition is reset 1 When the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level 0052 lt the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the Inverter performs this function by increasing the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level 0052 to the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 The set value will not be changed If b052 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent DC voltage or equivalent after rectification incoming voltage x V 2 the Inverter is brought into the LAD STOP status at power recovery during execution of this function disabling deceleration The Inverter will accept neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until operation is complete Make sure that the b052 setting is higer than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent 2 This function is not reset before the operation is complete and stopped To run the Inverter after power recovery during this function input the RUN command following the STOP command RUN command OFF after a stop condition 3 If the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width 6054 is too large an overcurrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration If b054 is too small or if the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration tim
255. eleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 F203 2nd deceleration 9 44 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F303 3rd deceleration 9 41 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F004 Operator rotation 00 Forward 00 No S 4 9 direction selection 01 Reverse 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 23 3 9 Parameter List Extended Function Mode Parameter A Default Creige N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Frequency reference 03 ModBus communication 4 10 pO selection 04 Option 1 Re Ne 4 138 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Drive programming 10 Operation function result 01 Terminal D 02 Digital Operator F001 Cc Eliaga econ ea 03 ModBus communication 02 No 411 selection S 04 Option 1 Fa 05 Option 2 4 11 A003 Base frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 50 4 110 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 50 No ae 4 11 A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 50 A004 Maximum frequency 30 to 400 50 2nd maximum A204 frequency 30 to 400 50 No Hz 4 12 aaga e mamam 30 to 400 50 frequency 2nd 3rd
256. ensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 Sensor vector control V2 00 Constant torque characteristics VC No a 4 21 ond V f 01 Special reduced torque characteristics sda special VP nett ee 02 Free V f characteristics o9 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 3rd V f 00 Constant torque characteristics VC A344 characteristics 01 Special reduced torque characteristics 00 selection special VP A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Yes 4 24 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 7 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter f Default Greng N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Automatic torque A046 _ boost voltage 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 8 2nd automatic A246 torque boost voltage 0 to 255 100 D compensation gain S 4 19 Automatic torque 5 A047 boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes Ea 2nd automatic A247 torque boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain TEE f 00 Disabled D aos1 DO injection braking 01 Enabled Oi eel l g 02 Frequency control A052 set value ies F A052 ie injection braking 99 to 400 00 0 50 No Hz 4 04 B requency T Q aos PC injection b
257. ent value in H0O23 H223 Even if 01 auto tuning without motor rotation is selected in H001 the motor may slightly rotate eTo perform auto tuning for one rank lower motor size enable the overload limit function and set the overload limit level to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 4 112 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operating Procedure 1 Set auto tuning selection H001 to 01 or 02 2 Turn on the RUN command Turning on the RUN command starts automatic operation in the following sequence Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv 1 1st AC excitation Motor does not run 2 2nd AC excitation Motor does not run 3 1st DC excitation Motor does not run 4 V f operation Motor accelerates up to 80 of the base frequency 5 SLV operation Motor accelerates up to x of the base frequency 6 2nd DC excitation Motor does not run 7 The auto tuning result is displayed Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 When auto tuning without motor rotation is selected H001 01 steps 4 and 5 are not performed The rotation frequency in step 5 is defined as follows T is whichever larger value of acceleration time or deceleration time in step 4 When T lt 0 lt 50s x 40 When 50s lt T lt 100s x 20 When 100s lt T x 10 If a trip occurs during auto tuning the auto tuning processing is forced to stop No error message appears Trip di
258. entation speed because positioning must be completed within two rotations during deceleration Otherwise overvoltage protection may cause a trip Note 2 Orientation stop position is defined as 4096 0 to 4095 divisions of one forward rotation from the reference point The number of divisions is fixed to 4096 regardless of the encoder s number of pulses The reference point is defined as the point where the pulse is input between EZP and EZN Below is the layout of the stop target position Positive phase connection Position of Z pulse Motor shaft viewed from motor gare point shaft load side 1024 3072 2048 Orientation stop position conceptual drawing 4 135 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Absolute Position Control Mode e To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selection P012 to 02 APR2 Absolute position control e When 03 high resolution absolute position control is selected in V2 control mode selection P012 control is based on x4 the number of pulses used for internal operations Set the multi step position command and position range setting for x4 multiplication control e The position command can be changed up to 8 steps depending on combinations of multi function input terminals e Zero return speed can be selected from one low speed and two high speeds The orientation function described in the previous section is not available
259. er supply LP FW Frequency matching Free running Motor rom Note The counters used for the Inverter s internal protection are cleared during reset To shut off the Inverter s output via a multi function input terminal use the free run stop terminal FRS Example 4 Active Frequency Matching restart e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the FW ee Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to RS the b029 setting while keeping the output current at the b028 set value e When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again and the frequency is restored to the original level e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 setting Output current Decelerates according to b029 Inverter output frequency Frequency selected Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm Erg b003 lt Note If a reset signal is input during the retry wait time the value of frequency at interruption stored in the Inverter is cleared resulting in a O Hz start 3 wire Input Function e This function helps start and stop the Inverter using an auto recovery contact e g pushbutton switch Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Starts with auto recovery contacts 20 STA 3 wire start OFF Irrelevant to the motor operation ON Stops with auto recovery contacts 21 STP 3 wire stop O
260. er List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A005 O OI selection 00 Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 03 04 Switches between O OI via terminal AT Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between Ol FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 No 4 12 A006 O2 selection 00 01 02 03 O2 only O OI auxiliary frequency reference not reversible O OI auxiliary frequency reference reversible O2 disabled 03 No 4 12 Analog input Others A011 O start frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A012 O end frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz A013 O start ratio 0 to O end ratio No A014 O end ratio O start ratio to 100 100 No A015 O start selection 00 01 External start frequency A011 set value 0 Hz 01 No 4 14 A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz hysteresis 31 No 4 15 A017 Drive Programming Selection 0 Disabling 1 PRG Terminal 2 Always 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is al
261. er No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Enabled b087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 02 Disabled only during stop Data STOP command via the STOP Trip reset operation via the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator RESET key on the Digital Operator 00 Enabled Enabled 01 Disabled Disabled 02 Disabled Enabled Stop Selection e You can set whether the Inverter decelerates to a stop for the set deceleration time or goes into free run status when the STOP command is input from the Digital Operator or the control circuit terminal block e If the RUN command is input again during free running the Inverter restarts according to free run stop selection b088 Refer to Free run Stop Selection page 4 71 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b091 Stop selection o9 Deceleration gt Stop 00 NE 01 Free run stop 00 0 Hz start Y 01 Frequency matching start RE 9o38 Freerun stop seiechion 02 Active Frequency Matching re oe start b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 0 00 Hz b007 Frequency matching lower I aonta dioa 0 00 s limit frequency setting Related functions F003 F203 F303 4 70 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Free run Stop Selection e Activating the free run stop FRS function shuts off the Inverter output letting the motor go into free run status Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0
262. eration frequency is disabled e To switch via a multi function input allocate 09 2CH to any of C001 to C008 Example 1 When A094 A294 is set to 00 we fo Le Acceleration 2 Example 2 When A094 A294 is set to 01 Deceleration 2 A096 A296 Deceleration 1 Output Output frequency frequency Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration time 1 time 2 time2 ftme1 time 1 time 2 time2 time 1 lt PI lt gt lt I lt gt lt gt lt l F002 F202 A092 A093 A293 F003 F203 F002 F202 A092 A093 F003 F203 F302 A292 A393 F303 A292 A293 A392 Example 3 When A094 A294 is set to 02 FW Acceleration Deceleration time 2 1 time 1 lt a A092 A292 F003 F203 1 F303 1 A392 Output frequency i Acceleration Deceleration time 1 time 2 F002 F202 A093 A293 F302 A393 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern Acceleration deceleration pattern can be set for each system Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A097 Acceleration pattern selection 00 Line 01 S shape curve 02 U shape curve 01 A098 Deceleration pattern selection 03 Inverted U shape curve 04 EL S shape curve A131 Acceleration curve parameter 01 small curve to ji A132 Deceleration curve parameter 10 large curve 4 38 suoioun Functions 4 2 Functi
263. eration 6038 PN 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 P4 143Fh Not used 1440h Not used 1441h Thermal warning level C061 R W 0 to 100 1 4 202 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function cee Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Res eli No code tion 0 Disabled 1442h Alarm code selection C062 R W 1 3 bits 2 4 bits 1443h 0 Hz detection level C063 R W 0 to 10000 Ha 1444h Fin overheat warning level C064 R W 0 to 200 1 C 1445h to Not used 144Ah 2 Loop back test Communication speed 3 2400 bps 144Bh selection C071 R W 4 4800 bps Baud rate selection 5 9600 bps 6 19200 bps iae manear piaNon co72 RW 1to247 No selection 144Dh Communication bit length C073 R W f 7 bits _ selection 8 8 bits as 0 No parity 144Eh el parity C074 RW 1 Even 2 Odd 144Fh Communication stop bit C075 R W i 1 bit selection 2 2 bits 0 Trip Cormm nicatonieiror 1 Trip after deceleration stop 1450h C076 R W 2 Ignore selection i 3 Free run stop 4 Deceleration stop iaer e oriNUnigation errar C077 R W 0 to 9999 0 01 s timeout 1452h Communication wait time C078 R W 0 to 1000 1 ms Communication method 0 ASCII 1453h selection cor RW 4 ModBus RTU 1454h Not used 1455h O adjustment C081 R W 0 to 65530 1 1456h Ol adjustment
264. ergency shutoff setting setting shutoff no setting Disabled while SW1 while SW1 function allocation while SW1 3 5 is ON is ON Reset is ON 1 With the terminal with input terminal selection 18 RS NO NC selection is fixed to 00 NO 2 When C003 is 64 EMR C013 is fixed to 01 NC 3 If 18 RS has been allocated to a multi function input terminal except for 3 other than terminal 2 11 1 before switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal selection for the relevant terminal will be automatically changed to no no allocation by setting SW1 to ON This is done in order to prevent duplicated allocation of this function Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the initial allocation cannot be restored The User should Re allocate the terminal function Example When the multi function input terminal 2 C002 is 18 RS setting SW1 to ON changes the C002 setting to no no allocation 18 RS will be allocated to the multi function input terminal 1 C001 Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the multi function input terminal 2 C002 setting is no no allocation and the multi function input terminal 1 C001 setting is 18 RS 4 Input terminal selection 64 EMR cannot be selected with the Digital Operator When slide switch SW1 is set to ON this function will be automatically allocated 2 2 Wiring 5 Once slide switch SW1 is set to ON allocation of multi function input term
265. eristic curve A044 A244 A344 00 VC 00 VC DC braking force during A504 50 50 deceleration DC braking force at start A507 0 0 Carrier frequency during DC A509 5 0 kHz 3 0 kHz braking 1st 2nd Overload restriction level b022 b222 1 50 x Rated current A 1 20 x Rated current A Overload restriction level 2 b025 Outen level of active freg b028 Rated current A Rated current A matching Carrier frequency b083 5 0 kHz 3 0 kHz 1st 2nd motor capacity H003 H203 Capacity that model shows Cabaciy of one high frame at Heavy Duty 4 62 suoioun4 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Function e After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level eYou can select from three modes in momentary power interruption non stop selection b050 Functions Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled Selection of non stop 01 Enable 02 DC voltage constant control without b050 function at momentary recovery 00 power interruption 03 DC voltage constant control with recovery 5 Starting voltage of non stop b051 function at momentary 0 0 to 1000 0 220 440 V power interruption 4 Stop deceleration level of b052 non stop functionat 00 to 1000 0 360 720 V momentary power interruption 1 4 Deceleration time of non b053 stop function at mome
266. ers Res eli No code tion 151Fh to Not used 1523h 1524h H030 R W Motor parameter R1 HIGH 0 001 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H030 22 1525h LOW R W 1526h Post R W Motor parameter R2 HIGH 0 001 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H031 Q 1527h LOW R W 1528h meee R W Motor parameter L HIGH 0 01 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H032 mH 1529h LOW R W 152Ah nee R W Motor parameter p 1 to 65530 0 01 A auto tuning data H033 152Bh LOW R W 152Ch Hae R W Motor parameter J HIGH 0 001 i 1 to 9999000 2 auto tuning data H034 kgm 152Dh LOW R W 152Eh to Not used 153Ch 153Dh PI proportional gain H050 R W O to 10000 0 1 153Eh Pl integral gain H051 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 153Fh P proportional gain H052 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 1540h to Not used 1546h 1547h Limit at 0 Hz HO60 R W Oto 1000 0 1 isagi Peost amount arsy H061 RW otos0 1 startup 0 Hz 1549h to Not used 1550h fanin iTO El proportional gain H070 R W 0to 10000 0 1 switching iasa Tor FI imggral gain Ho71 R W oto 10000 0 1 switching fassi 0 F proporkonal gain Ho72 R W oto1000 0 01 switching 1554h Gain switching time H073 R W 0 to 9999 1 ms 1555h to Not used 1600h 4 207 4 4 Communication Function Riegjetar Function name use R W Monitor and setting parame
267. es 4 105 fault frequency MONitOr ee eee eee erect etees 4 5 fault Monitor aen aee a etwas tae 4 6 forced Operator essesseeersreerrerrerrerserrrrsrnrrreresrreresrese 4 89 forced terminal froet UN Stop phigh e e relate free run stop selection and stop selection 4 68 frequency addition function 0 0 eee frequency arrival Signal 0 cee eee eeeeeee tees frequency conversion coefficient frequency JUMP eee eeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeeeaetees frequency liMit ccttss ecu seenteic nee lower imitis isin A ees Upper limit onaga a Ae frequency Matching s sssseeesseseessreernsrerrerrerrerenre frequency pull in restart high torque multi operation 0 0 eee 4 117 E initial SCreen eeseeeeeeeeeeiereieeriesrireeiterresernsereeeren initialization an ee ee input power MONIHOT ss ssssseesrssteisrreriernerrernereerenreene integrated power monitor E E ee E E tater 4 44 4 45 J JO Cae AA nna E E S 4 18 jogging operations ig needs Senet eee 4 18 K KHG inknn RM n alin Mie arti 4 4 N ND Gen a A N 4 102 O PETE EEEE AE A EEEE EEE T 4 77 O ODirer disn a anh ets offline auto tuning s ssseessersererrerrsresrrsrrsrrserrreseses OR Fa aa a A a a a a Oly Ol paei ai 3 faster stan eee OLR Arial a ae ee a online auto tuning eee eee esee eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenes ONT tii tinte Ar oa ee ea Rae OPE tactic p w
268. et time in A053 DC injection braking starts e Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN command switches from STOP to RUN Edge operation Giving priority to DC injection braking time A055 performs DC injection braking for the set time in A055 DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command FW is turned off Even if the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking the latter is effective during the set time in A055 Example 5 a Example 6 a Level operation Giving priority to the RUN command shifts to normal operation ignoring DC injec tion braking time A055 When the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking returns to normal operation ignoring the set time in A055 Example 5 b Example 6 b a Edge operation b Level operation i During startup example 4 a FW _ C Output frequency ii During startup example 4 b A Output frequency A057 A058 gt 4 26 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation b Level operation ii During stop example 5 a eS E Free running m a A Aos2 2058 A055 _ Output frequency ii During stop example 5 b FW Free running Output frequency i A053 A052 lt gt lt A939 gt iii During stop example 6 a FW
269. eters 4 117 pulse train frequency input ee 4 138 Index 2 Index R real frequency MONItOF eee ee ee eee eee eee ee eeeeee 4 3 reduced voltage startup eee eee erect 4 53 relay output terminals 00 0 0 eee eee eee eeeeee tees 4 95 secondary resistance compensation Sensor vector Control eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteneeteaeees sensorless vector CONTIOI ccceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeteeeees SEVO ON ien ae pae ae e e a SFI tO SET 2 ack Aa ee eee signal durinig RUN siiissinianinti in tons SINK OGIC Sain Sit eet ae eee Ges slide switch soft lock stabilization parameter 0 eee eee eee 4 118 start frequency start ratio start selection starting contact signal 0 eee eee reece 4 103 Starting frequency oo eee eee ee eects eeeeeteeeteetaes 4 65 Stop key selection eeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeseeeseeeeeeaes 4 68 Stop Selection sani nna ni 4 68 Index 3 T torque bias monitor torge DOOSt s isen ia ei torque LADSTOP function 0 ee eee eee 4 59 TOFQUE limitasi g aeh eaa he aia 4 57 torque reference MONItOF eee eee eee eeeeeeees 4 3 total RUN IMO ae te newneiie agenesis des 4 4 trip monitor display 0 0 ee eee eee eee 4 6 5 8 trip retry user parameter user selecto sans a headed wiring control circuit terminals wiring the main circuit terminals 00 ee 2 12 Z
270. exceeds 1 000 000 E62 0 E72 0 pulses during position control Position control Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position fangetri exceeds the setting values of the position limit range specification for E63 0 E73 0 ge trip Forward P072 and Reverse P073 during absolute position control 3G3AX PG01 Shuts off the output and displays an error if a connection mounting A A E69 0 E79 0 connection error failure of the PG board is detected Note Check the DIP switch settings on the PG board for any abnormal operation Function List of the DIP Switches on the PG Board 3G3AX PG01 DIP switch Switch No Description ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder A B phase is not connected OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder A B phase is not connected SWENC ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder Z phase is not r connected OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder Z phase is not connected ON With the termination resistor between SAP and SAN 150 Q SiR OFF Without the termination resistor between SAP and SAN 3 ON With the termination resistor between SBP and SBN 150 Q OFF Without the termination resistor between SBP and SBN Protection function display when the digital command board 3G3AX DI01 is mounted Name Description Error Code 3G3AX DI01 error Shuts off the output and displays an
271. excitation 56 Not used 57 Not used 58 Not used 59 Not used 60 Not used 61 Not used 62 Not used 63 Not used 65 AHD analog command held 66 CP1 position command selection 1 67 CP2 position command selection 2 68 CP3 position command selection 3 69 ORL zero return limit signal 70 ORG zero return startup signal 71 FOT forward driving stop 72 ROT reverse driving stop 73 SPD speed position switching 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 82 PRG drive programming run 255 no no allocation 1409h Not used 140Ah Not used 4 198 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function pede le Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R ole No code tion 140Bh Multi function input 1 C011 R W Z operation selection 140Ch Multi function input 2 C012 R W _ operation selection 140Dh Multi function input 3 C013 R W _ operation selection 140Eh Multi function input 4 C014 R W operation selection Multi function input 5 0 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 140Fh MAUNE p C015 R W 1 NC contact at AL2AL2 NO contact at operation selection AL 1410h Multi function input 6 C016 R W Ka operation selection 1411h Multi function input 7 C017 R W A operation selection 1412h Multi function input 8 C018 R W operation selection 1413h FW terminal operation C019 R W selection 1414h Not
272. f the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 03 Digital output frequency 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 08 Digital current monitor 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 12 Drive programming output YAO 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 00 No 4 109 4 118 C028 Analog monitor AM selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 11 Output torque lt signed gt 13 Drive programming YA1 19 Option board 1 OP1 20 Option board 2 OP2 00 No 4 110 4 118 C029 AMI selection When inverter is in sensor vector control A044 05 the real motor speed from the motor encoder d008 monitor is used instead of the output frequency 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 14 Drive programming YA2 00 No C030 Digital current monitor reference value 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monit
273. forward rotation 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz In reverse rotation 0 00 to 400 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz Note 1 To use this monitor set the number of encoder pulses P011 and the motor pole number selection H004 or H204 correctly Note 2 The monitored value does not depend on V f characteristics selection A044 Torque Reference Monitor d009 When torque control is selected for sensor vector control this monitor displays the currently entered torque reference value Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Torque Bias Monitor d010 When sensor vector control is selected this monitor displays the torque bias amount currently set in display code d010 Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Output Torque Monitor d012 Displays an estimated value of the Inverter s output torque Display 200 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Note This monitor is enabled only when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control mode Output Voltage Monitor d013 4 3 Displays the output voltage of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 600 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 V 4 1 Monitor Mode Input Power Monitor d014 Displays the input power instantaneous value of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 kW Integrated Power Monitor d015 e Displays th
274. frequent use can be viewed Compliance With Safety Standards The RX Series meets the requirements of the CE and UL cUL and complies with various standards The RoHS Directive The standard model meets the requirements of the RoHS Directive Easily Meets the Requirements Specified by the Ministry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan The RX Series incorporates a zero phase reactor radio noise filter as a standard specification When an optional DC reactor is added the RX Series meets the requirements specified by the Min istry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts When the product is unpacked it appears as below Example of 3G3RX A2150 A4150 to A2220 A4220 Front cover omnon HITACHI Digital Operator RESET Terminal block cover Open the terminal block cover and you can connect cables to the main circuit terminal block as well as the control circuit terminal block Also open the front cover and you can mount the optional board Position for installing optional board 1 Position for installing optional board 2 Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block Backing plate 1 4 M IM AQ Chapter 2 Design 2 Loe IMStallatiGmrccrteeverec cree a 2 1 282 WINING EA E
275. function refer to page 4 46 e To raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current as shown in the graph below Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Capacity Max fe kHz Derating at fe 15kHz Max fe kHz eae oe cane 0 4 kW 15 100 15 100 0 75 kW 15 100 15 100 1 5 kW 15 100 15 100 2 2 kW 15 100 15 100 3 7 kW 15 100 15 100 5 5 kW 15 100 15 100 7 5 kW 15 100 15 100 4 68 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Capacity Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15kHz Max fc kHz PEER Ys ae ane 11 kW 12 90 41 4 max 15 100 15 kW 12 95 60 8 A max 14 95 30 4 A max 18 5 kW 10 90 68 4 A max 10 90 34 2 A max 22 kW 7 70 66 5 A max 6 75 36 0 A max 30 kW 5 80 96 8 A max 10 75 43 5 A max 37 kW 10 75 108 7 A max 8 80 60 0 A max 45 kW 5 70 127 4 A max 9 75 68 2 A max 55 kW 5 70 154 A max 6 60 67 2 A max 75 kW z 6 85 126 7 A max 90 kW 4 75 132 0 A max 110 kW 6 70 151 9 A max 132 kW a 3 60 156 0 A max 200 V class 22kW 18 5 kW 400 V class 90kW 75kW 45kW Output current derating N oi 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency kHz 11 1415 wo NI x Output current derating 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency KHz 1415 30 kW 15 kW V4 lf the above maximum rated
276. g Integrated power 4 to 1000 1 No display gain b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 65 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No kHz Derating enabled 4 65 b083 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 118 i 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 Clears the trip monitor 01 Initializes data b084 Initialization selection m Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00 No lt 2 03 Clears the trip monitor and parameters 04 Clears the trip monitor parameters and 4 66 Drive programming b085 Initialization l 0 01 No ia parameter selection Do not change Frequency 6086 conversion coefficient 1 t 99 9 1 0 yes 2 00 Enabled n 0087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 No 4 68 S 02 Disabled only during stop O Freesun sto 00 0 Hz start b088 selection P 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 69 02 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 00 Disabled b089 reduction 01 Enabled 0o No g E Usage rate of b090 regenerative braking 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 72 function b091 Stop selection 00 Deceleration gt Stop o No 468 01 Free run stop 00 Always ON b092 Cooling fan control 01 ON during RUN 01 No Regenerative braking 00 Disabled b095 function operation 01 Enabled Disabled during stop 00 No 4 72 selection 02 Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 360 pane function ON level 660 to 760 720 No y 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selec
277. g bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 Drive programming input 1 Ml2 Drive programming input 2 MI3 Drive programming input 3 MI4 MI5 Drive programming input 5 Drive programming input 4 MI6 Drive programming input 6 MI7 Drive programming input 7 MI8 Drive programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG Drive program start NO no allocation 011 12 18 02 03
278. g or writing the parameters from to the inverter Display System and Key Sequence of Each Code e This section explains the examples of typical operation Basic display Complete display and the extended function mode U as a special operation This operation can be performed when other display modes are selected The display indicates the setting of b038 when the power is turned on For details refer to Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 55 When b038 1 factory default output frequency monitor d001 is displayed Note The Digital Operator display varies depending on the settings of display selection b037 ini tial screen selection b038 and user parameter automatic setting function selection b039 For details refer to Display Selection page 4 53 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function page 4 57 Item Function code Data Description 00 Complete display factory default 01 Individual display of functions Display selection b037 02 User setting 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display 00 Screen when the Enter key was pressed last 01 d001 Output frequency monitor factory default Initial screen 02 d002 Output current monitor selection b038 Power On 03 d003 Rotation direction monitor 04 d007 Frequency conversion monitor 05 F001 Output f
279. gnal from the control terminal block is not defined e For a torque monitor value of this function the output torque at the rated frequency equivalent to the motor s output rating during synchronous rotation is indicated as 100 e Since this function estimates output torque based on the motor current the accuracy is approx 20 when a motor with the same output capacity as the Inverter is used 4 118 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Preliminary Excitation Function FOC e This function supplies excitation current from an input terminal to establish magnetic flux preliminarily when 03 sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A004 A244 Allocate 55 FOC to the desired multi function input e The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the FOC terminal is turned on when FOC is allocated lf the FOC terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter goes into free run status If the FOC terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free run stop selection b088 FOC FW RV Does not operate because Output frequency the FOC terminal is OFF gt Restarts according to b088 Excitation current flows Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 High torque Multi operation When sensorless vector control or 0 Hz sensorless vector con
280. gramming YAO 19 Option 1 20 Option 2 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 4 Output voltage 5 Input power 6 Thermal load rate 141Ch_ AM selection C028 R W 7 LAD frequency 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 11 Output torque signed 13 Drive Programming YA1 19 Option 1 20 Option 2 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 4 Output voltage 141Dh_ AMI selection co29 pw Input power 6 Thermal load rate 7 LAD frequency 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 14 Drive Programming YA2 1 1Eh Digital current monitor co30 R W 200 to 2000 0 1 reference value Multi function output 141Fh terminal 11 contact C031 R W selection Multi function output 1420h terminal 12 contact C032 R W selection Multi function output 1421h terminal 13 contact C033 R W selection 0 NO 1 NC Multi function output 1422h terminal 14 contact C034 R W selection Multi function output 1423h terminal 15 contact C035 R W selection 1424h Relay output AL2 AL1 C036 R W 7 contact selection 4 201 4 4 Communication Function Regiei Function name Puree R W Monitor and setting parameters Re olur No code tion 1425h Not used Light load signal output 0 Enabled during acceleration 1426h 9 9 P C038 R W deceleration constant speed mode 1
281. h ee HIGH Deceleration time 1 R W 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1106h eee LOW 1107h Operator rotation direction F004 R W 9 Forward e selection 1 Reverse 1108h to Not used 1200h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode gt Regjia Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Re gu No code tion 0 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 1 Terminal 2 Digital Operator F001 Ersa eneyteterence 3 ModBus communication 1201h quency A001 R W 4 Option 1 selection j 5 Option 2 6 Pulse train frequency 7 Not used 1 0 Frequency operation result 4 183 4 4 Communication Function Register F Function Resolu No Function name code R W Monitor and setting parameters Hen 1 Terminal 2 Digital Operator F001 1202h RUN command selection A002 R W 3 ModBus communication 4 Option 1 5 Option 2 1203h Base frequency A003 R W 30 to Max frequency 1 Hz 1204h Maximum frequency A004 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 0 Switches between O Ol 1 Switches between O O2 1205h O Ol selection A005 R W 2 Switches between O VR 3 Switches between OI VR 4 Switches between O2 VR 0 O2 only 1 O Ol auxiliary speed not reversible 1206h Oz selection O06 pi 2 O OI auxiliary speed reversible 3 O2 disabled 1207h to Not used 120Ah 120Bh AOI HIGH 0 01 O start frequency R W Oto 40000 120Ch AOT p
282. he frequency A062 set for the lower limit if 0 V 4 mA Max Mequency is input to the frequency reference A004 A204 A061 A062 Frequency OV 10V reference 4mA 20 mA MWhen Using O2 L e When the lower limit is used for the O2 input the oe rotation at 0 V is fixed to A062 for either forward or reverse rotation as described below Max frequency A004 A204 A061 A062 Reverse 10V Forward Max frequency A004 A204 a When the RUN command is set to the terminal A002 01 Terminal Rotation when O2 0 V FW ON A062 for forward rotation RV ON A062 for reverse rotation a When the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator A002 02 F004 Rotation when O2 0 V 00 A062 for forward rotation 01 A062 for reverse rotation 4 29 4 2 Function Mode Frequency Jump Function e The frequency jump function helps avoid resonant points of loaded machines Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A063 Jump frequency 1 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 A067 Jump frequency 3 7 z A064 Jump frequency width 1 A066 Jump frequency width 2 0 0 to 10 0 0 5 A068 Jump frequency width 3 Related functions C001 to C008 e You cannot set output frequencies within a jump frequency setting range where the frequency jump function avoids steady operation e The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the accele
283. he control terminal block board 2 Set the following parameter via the Digital Operator e Set C071 communication speed selection to 02 loop back test 3 Turn off the Inverter and turn it on again The check will start 4 After the check is complete the Digital Operator displays the following code 5 Press the RESET button on the Digital Operator or on the copy unit to show the basic setting screen Reset the parameter that you changed in step 2 to a desired setting 4 146 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function ASCII Method Communication Procedure e The following shows the communication procedure between the Inverter and external controller External controller Inverter Wait time Set via the Digital Operator 1 Indicates a frame sent from the external controller to the Inverter 2 Indicates a frame sent back from the Inverter to the external controller Frame 2 is response output from the Inverter after reception of frame 1 It is not an active output Below is each frame format commana Command List Command Description Communication with all stations Note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B Inputs forward reverse stop command Sets frequency reference Sets multi function input terminal status Reads all monitor data Reads the Inverter status Reads trip data Reads a parameter Sets a parameter Initializes e
284. he value calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value 0041 to b044 x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 126 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used Torque Bias Function This function applies bias to the torque reference generated by speed control and is useful for ele vating applications e g elevator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled 01 Set via the Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 Set via terminal O2 00 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 P038 Torque bias polarity 00 As per sign 00 _ selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction Related functions d010 1 When torque bias is set to the O2 terminal 10 to 10 V is recognized as 200 to 200 2 e When 00 As per sign is selected When the polarity of a torque bias signal is the torque increases for forward rotation and when it is the torque increases for reverse rotation
285. hi a ita Shed Ga ae Get ce operation frequency function Operation Methods c ccseu sees ee desiles tee betiteees eee operation ready Signal cece eee eeeeeeeeeeee operation selection during option error s s s 4 109 Orientation FUNCTION eee cece eee cee teeeeeeeeaee 4 129 OT Oui otis cheatin ence e a ie celica 4 98 output current MONItOF eee eee ree eee teees 4 1 output frequency monitor 4 1 4 2 output frequency setting monitor ee 4 8 output signal delay hold eects 4 106 output signal logic operation 4 100 output torque MONItOF oe ee eee eee tee taees 4 3 Output Voltage gain oo ee eee eee eee eeeeeteeeeee 4 24 output voltage MONItON ee eee teeta 4 3 overcurrent SUPPreSSION eee ee ee eee eee eee eees 4 51 overload limitera Sele Ae se overload warning OVEMOlGUE a ctheti eine ale ee overvoltage protection function during deceleration 4 76 Manual torque DOOSt ee ee ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 20 MAX MUM FreQUENCY oe ee cee eee eects ceeeteeeeneeeaes 4 12 MU Ass A Sen ees ee ey 4 105 momentary power interruption non stop 4 60 momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during 4 42 4 44 stop selection multi function input monitor multi function input terminal selection 05 4 77 multi function output Monitor eee 4 2 multi function output terminal 0 eee 4 93 preliminary excitation eee
286. his function is enabled No Data Function name No Data Function name 1 d001 to d104 Monitor display 16 A045 Output voltage gain 2 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 17 A085 RUN mode selection 3 F002 Acceleration time 1 18 b001 Retry selection 4 F003 Deceleration time 1 19 b002 A Owan e momentary Powe interruption time 5 Foo4 Operator rotation direction 20 boos Trip retry selection selection 6 A001 Frequency reference selection 21 b011 Trip retry wait time 7 A002 RUN command selection 22 b037 Display selection 8 A003 Base frequency 23 b083 Carrier frequency 9 A004 Maximum frequency 24 b084 Initialization selection 10 A005 O Ol selection 25 biso O vervoltage protection function selection during deceleration 11 A020 Multi step speed reference 0 26 b131 Overvoltage protection level during deceleration 12 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 27 co21 Multi function output terminal 11 selection 13 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 28 co22 Multi function output terminal 12 selection 14 A023 Multi step speed reference 3 29 C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact 15 A044 V f characteristics selection Related functions U001 to U012 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON You can select the Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power on among the following items By factory default 01 d001 is selected Parameter No Function nam
287. however vary in type and in addition EMC performance depends on the configuration wiring or location of the devices or control panels which incorporate the EC directive conforming products This in turn does not allow us to confirm the condition and the conformity in which our products are used Therefore we appreciate confirmation of the final EMC conformity for the whole machine or equipment on your own Wiring the Power Supply Keep the ground cable as short as possible Keep the cable between the Inverter and the noise filter as short as possible Connecting a Motor to the Inverter When connecting a motor to the Inverter be sure to use shield braided cables Keep the cables as short as possible Low voltage Directive The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN61800 5 1 by performing the machine in stallation and wiring as shown below e The RX models are an open type device Be sure to install it inside the control panel e The power supply and voltage SELV with reinforced or double insulation should be used for wiring to the control circuit terminals e To satisfy requirements of the LVD low voltage directive the Inverter must be protected with a molded case circuit breaker MCCB in case a short circuiting accident occurs Be sure to install a molded case circuit breaker MCCB on the power supply side of the Inverter Use one molded case circuit breaker MCCB per Inverter Use the crimp type terminal wi
288. i step speed HIGH 0 01 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency reference 15 A035 Hz 1235h LOW R W 1236h Not used 1237h Not used i 0 01 1238h Jogging frequency A038 R W Starting frequency to 999 Hz 0 Free run stop Disabled in operation 1 Deceleration stop Disabled in operation 2 DC injection braking stop Disabled in 1239h Jogging stop selection A039 R W operation 3 Free run stop Enabled in operation 4 Deceleration stop Enabled in operation 5 DC injection braking stop Enabled in operation 123Ah Not used 123Bh Torque boost selection A041 R W 0 Manda torque DOOSI 1 Automatic torque boost 123ch Manual torque boost A042 RW 0to200 0 1 voltage 123Dh Manual torque boost A043 RW 0t0500 0 1 frequency 0 VC 1 Special VP 23Eh V f characteristics A044 R W E Free V f _ selection 3 Sensorless vector 4 0 Hz sensorless vector 5 Sensor vector 123Fh Output voltage gain A045 R W 20 to 100 1 Automatic torque boost 1240h voltage compensation A046 R W 0 to 255 1 gain 1241h COMA torque boost A047 Rw o0to255 1 slip compensation gain 1242h to Not used 1244h p en 0 Disabled 1245h eet braking A051 RW 1 Enabled 2 Operates only at the set frequency 1246h DC injection braking A052 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 frequency Hz 1247h DC injection braking delay ages yw 0 to 50 0 1 s time 4 186 suoioun4
289. i step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Orientation speed lt Frequency upper limit A061 A261 P015 lt Frequency lower limit Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A062 A262 A020 A220 A320 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 lt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 E Starting frequency A020 A220 A320 b082 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt Jogging frequency A038 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 re Jump frequency 1 2 3 A020 A220 A320 2 Jump width A063 A064 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt gt A065 A066 A067 A068 3 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 2 Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 A220 gt Free V f frequency 7 b112 Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Free V f frequencies 1 to 6 b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 Free V f frequencies 2 to 6 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 7 Free Vi iregueney 19100 Free V f frequency 1 b100 gt Free V f frequency 2 b102 Free V f frequencies 3 to 6 b104 b106 b108 b110 lt Free V f frequencies 1 2 b100 b102 gt Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequencies 4 to 6 b106 b108 b110 lt 5 10 suoieisdo sdueuUd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 2 Warning Function Target code Condition Base code Free V f frequencies 1 to3 b100 b1
290. iable range limit function and the PID output stop function are disabled EPID Gain Adjustment f a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation adjust each gain as follows according to the situation Feedback value variation is slow when the target value is changed Raise P gain A072 The feedback value changes fast but isn t stable Lower P gain A072 The target and feedback values wouldn t match smoothly Lower gain A073 The feedback value fluctuates unstably Raise gain A073 Response is slow even with P gain raised Raise D gain A074 With P gain raised the feedback value vibrates and isn t stable Lower D gain A074 MExcessive Deviation Output You can set PID deviation excessive level C044 during PID control With this function allocated the multi function output terminal is turned on when the PID deviation e reaches the set level in C044 C044 can be set from 0 to 100 The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value e Allocate 04 OD to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 Feedback Comparison Signal lf a PID feedback value is out of the specified range it can be output to a multi function output terminal Allocate 31 FBV to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 4 34 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode C052 OFF level PID feedback
291. ible Main frequency AT i TAR fo Main frequency Al i ee fo reference reference Olor O terminal o ____ _ Ol or O terminal Auxiliary Auxiliary frequency o e a reference reference O2terminal O2 terminal fol fo2 fo2 fol i oe i fo fo2 Real frequency reference Real frequency reference 4 13 4 2 Function Mode External Frequency Voltage Current Adjustment External analog input frequency reference O L terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input Also set an output frequency for the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator Adjusting the O2 L and OI L Terminals Default Parameter No Function name Data Unit setting fo O OI start frequency 0 0 00 to 400 0 0 0 Hz A012 iei Set a start end frequency A102 end frequency 0 ADIS O OI start ratio 0 to 100 A103 Set a start end ratio relative to an external 20 o A014 frequency reference of 0 to 10 V and 4 to 20 A104 O OI end ratio mA 100 01 A015 O Ol start selection OD Start frequency A011 set value A105 01 0 Hz 00 Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 e To input voltage ranging from 0 to 5 V on the OI L terminal set A014 to 50 Example 1 A015 A105 00 Example 2 A015 A105 01 Max Max frequency frequency A012 A102 A012 A102 A011 A101 A011 A101 0 A013 A103
292. ification reverse side to P062 a ba 0 command 2 Position range specification forward side P063 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 3 Position range specification forward side z 8 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to c P064 e anne f 0 5 command 4 Position range specification forward side 8 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 4 136 a P065 m FRUE f 0 D command 5 Position range specification forward side 3 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to a PO66 re PRES f 0 2 command 6 Position range specification forward side Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P067 pre SET 0 command 7 Position range specification forward side 00 Low P068 Zero return mode 01 Hi1 00 Yes 02 Hi2 Po69 Zero return direction 00 Forward side 00 Yes selection 01 Reverse side poza en ee 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency P071 PIJN SPERO ZETO 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency 4 136 Position range rs ae 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 specification 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 268435455 Yes 8 forward Cc 2 Position range S a 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 S g P073 specification 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 268435455 Yes S reverse 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 g 01 Multi step position command 1 P061 T 02 Mu
293. ifications 7 1 Standard Specification List cesta ast ceere ee eareye citent oshemeendsnetedehet ae teeteueees 7 1 7 2 Dimensional Drawing cccccccecceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeaes 7 6 EB VODWOMS gecancchadcacereel ceed aeiag masts ti Miata hd uence clas etre it ola ah ese Leb icen aria thy 7 14 15 Contents Chapter App Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Appendix 2Product Life Curve acreccceccen igi cai ieeieeieien eee eee Appendix 3Life Alarm Output Index 16 Chapter 1 Overview MAS CIPUNGHIOINS ccccectsnteas erecta dtevesssavervsteecrssseaeecsoeterse 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 000 1 4 1 1 Functions a 1 1 Functions z RX Inverter Models 2 Rated voltage Enclosure rating Max applicable motor capacity Model 0 4 kW 3G3RX A2004 O 0 75 kW 3G3RX A2007 1 5 kW 3G3RX A2015 2 2 kW 3G3RX A2022 3 7 kW 3G3RX A2037 5 5 kw 3G3RX A2055 7 5 kW 3G3RX A2075 3 phase 200 V AC 11 kW 3G3RX A2110 15 kW 3G3RX A2150 18 5 kW 3G3RX A2185 22 kW 3G3RX A2220 30 kW 3G3RX A2300 37 kW 3G3RX A2370 45 kW 3G3RX A2450 55 kW 3G3RX A2550 0 4 kW 3G3RX A4004 0 75 kW 3G3RX A4007 1 5 kW 3G3RX A4015 2 2 kW 3G3RX A4022 4 0 kW 3G3RX A4040 5 5 kw 3G3RX A4055 7 5 kW 3G3RX A4075 11 kW 3G3RX A4110 15 kW 3G3RX A4150 3 phase 400 V AC 18 5 kW 3G3RX A4185 22 kW 3G3RX
294. in filter E Europe standard ___ Max applicable motor capacity 004 0 4kW 007 0 75 kW 220 22kW 015 1 5 kW 300 30kW 022 2 2 kW 370 37kW 037 3 7kW 450 45 kW 055 5 5 kW 550 55kW 075 7 5 kW 750 75 kW 110 11kW 900 90kW 150 15 kW 11K 110kW 185 18 5 kW 13K 132 kW Voltage class 2 3 phase 200 V AC 200 V class 4 3 phase 400 V AC 400 V class Enclosure rating A Panel mounting IP20 min or closed wall mounting models B IP00 Checking the Accessories Note that this manual is the only accessory included with the RX model Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user Revision History Revision History HA manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers Cat No 1560 E2 04 E Revision code Revision code Revision date Description 01 April 2009 First version 04 September 2011 Major changes 11 About This Manual About This Manual This User s Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user s convenience as follows Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product Overview Chapter 1 Overview Describes features and names of parts Provides external dimensions installation dimensions peripheral
295. inals 1 and 3 will not be restored even if SW1 is reset to OFF afterward Re allocate the terminal function Slide switch SW1 Slide lever factory default OFF OFF CID ON Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals Main Power Supply Input Terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 An earth leakage breaker may malfunction due to the effect of high frequency Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high frequency sensitivity current rating If the Inverter protection function is activated a malfunction or accident may have occurred to your system Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON OFF the magnetic contactor connected on the Inverter power supply input primary side and output Secondary side To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal use the operation command FW or RV on the control circuit terminal block This Inverter uses a 3 phase power supply A single phase power supply cannot be used Do not use this Inverter with a phase loss power input Doing so may damage the Inverter By factory default the phase loss input protection is disabled If a phase of power supply input is interrupted the Inverter reverts to the following status R L1 phase or T L3 phase is i
296. inals 12 11 ON Relay output terminal AL2 Multi function output terminals 15 14 13 OFF MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL d006 Output AL215141312 11 f H001 00 OFF t J Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 Displays a gain conversion value based on the coefficient set in frequency conversion coefficient b086 This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data e g motor rpm d007 display Output frequency d001 x Frequency conversion coefficient b086 b086 0 1 to 99 9 Can be set in increments of 0 1 Example To display 4 pole motor rpm Motor rpm N min 120 x f Hz P pole f Hz x 30 As such when b086 30 0 a motor rpm of 1800 60 x 30 0 is displayed Display 0 00 to 39960 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 suoioun4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference The data storage accuracy depends on each frequency reference Real Frequency Monitor d008 When a motor with an encoder is connected to a load and the PG board 3G3AX PG01 is used this monitor displays the real frequency of the motor regardless of the control method Display In
297. ination time C169 time C169 7 3 ae Position command CP1 CP2 CP3 Determination time C169 Speed Position Switching Function SPD Allocate 73 SPD to one of the multi function inputs While the SPD terminal is turned on the current position counter is retained at 0 Therefore if the SPD terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter shifts to the position control mode Speed Position switching At this time if the position command is 0 the Inverter immediately stops Hunting may occur depending on the position loop gain setting While the SPD terminal is turned on the Inverter runs in the direction based on the RUN command When shifting from speed control to position control be careful about the polarity sign of the RUN command Output frequency Position count started Speed control Position control Time i Target position 4 139 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Zero Return Function This function performs three types of zero return operations depending on the setting of zero return mode P068 When zero return is complete the current position is cleared to zero You can select the zero return direction in zero return direction selection P069 If zero return is not performed the Inverter performs position control with the position at power on defined as the origin lt Low speed zero return P068 00 gt ORL terminal La
298. ing M3G3RX A2150 A2185 A2220 A4150 A4185 A4220 2 7 250 E 229 x A 2 z U B Y y roll E I F I T J i y i Le 244 7 9 M3G3RX A2300 A4300 2 10 O UY TOUT ENT TT TENET WIUVDLUVOUVOUUOUUOUU00000000 DANDANAN MAMMAN 540 7 2 Dimensional Drawing
299. ing Unit Page o setting operation Brake control 00 Disabled ple selection 01 Enabled o0 o m p121 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s release p122 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s acceleration p123 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s stopping 4 77 p124 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s confirmation b125 Brake release 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated 0126 Brake release current 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current No _ fei 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz frequency protection tunction 00 Disabled 2 b130 p i A 01 DC voltage kept constant 01 No selection during S 02 Acceleration enabled fo deceleration a ees 200 V class 330 to 390 380 No y p P 400 V class 660 to 780 760 during deceleration big2 Overvoltage 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s 4 78 protection parameter Overvoltage p133 Protection 0 00 to 2 55 050 Yes proportional gain setting Overvoltage b134 protection integral 0 000 to 65 535 0 060 Yes s time setting Auto return initial 00 OFF 9163 display 01 ON 00 Ko _ _ Data Read Write 00 Read Write Ok 6166 selection 01 Read Write Protected o No _ E he ts 00 No action b180 Initialize trigger 01 Initialize 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 20 xip
300. inputs While the ADD terminal is turned on the bias value is added to the speed command Position feedback variation Position command variation Speed bias Set with A146 Speed control Speed feedback value Related functions A145 A146 Orientation Function This function determines a motor position at a single desired point during one rotation of the motor and can be used to exchange tools for the machine tool main spindle or others During positioning the Z pulse one rotation position signal is used as the reference signal Input Z pulse between EZP and EZN Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 128 to 65535 P011 Encoder pulses 10000 to 65530 1024 Pulse P014 Orientation stop position 0 to 4095 0 Setting frequency to Max frequency P015 Orientation speed setting upper limit 120 0 5 00 Hz 00 Forward side P016 Orientation direction setting 00 01 Reverse side P017 Position ready range setting 0 to 10000 5 Pulse P018 Position ready delay time 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 R setting P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 rad s C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 45 ORT orientation 1 to 8 selection C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal S S selection 23 POK position ready Relay output AL2 AL1 05 C026 function selection 4 134 suoioun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX
301. ion 4 169 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Holding Register O6h gt Writes data into the specified holding register Example Write 50 Hz into the Inverter with slave address 5 as the base frequency A003 The data resolution of the holding register 1203h of the base frequency A003 is 1 Hz To set 50 Hz set the change data to 50 0032h Query Response No Field name Faces No Field name P 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 2 Function code 06 3 Register start number MSB 12 3 Register start number MSB 12 4 Register start number LSB 02 4 Register start number LSB 02 5 Change data MSB 00 5 Change data MSB 00 6 Change data LSB 32 6 Change data LSB 32 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section lt Loop back Test 08h gt Used to check the communications between master and slave A random value can be used for test data Example Loop back test to the Inverter with slave address 1 Response No Field name eee 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LS
302. ion Motor pole number H004 H204 selection 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole H020 H220 Motor parameter R1 0 001 to 65 535 Depends onthe g motor capacity H021 H221 Motor parameter R2 0 001 to 65 535 Dependsonthe o motor capacity H022 H222 Motor parameter L 0 01 to 655 35 Depends onthe i motor capacity H023 H223 Motor parameter lo 0 01 to 655 35 Depends onthe 94 motor capacity H024 H224 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 2 Depends onthe kgm motor capacity Motor parameter R1 Depends on the POS0mES0 auto tuning data ONT IO 68 222 motor capacity Q H031 H231 Motor parameter R2 001 to 65 535 Depa es OMNE i auto tuning data motor capacity Ho32 H232 Motor parameter L 9 41 to 655 35 Dependsonthe H auto tuning data motor capacity Motor parameter lo Depends on the nese nese auto tuning data 0 0110 635 39 motor capacity A Ho34 H234 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 2 Depends onthe kgm auto tuning data motor capacity 1 For 1st control A044 all items 00 to 05 are selectable However for 2nd control A244 and 3rd control A344 the selectable range is 00 to 04 and 00 to 01 respectively For ND the selectable range is 00 to 02 2 Convert moment of inertia J into motor shaft data The larger the J value the faster the response resulting in a steep torque rise the smaller the J value the slower the response resulting in a gradual torque rise After setting the J value adjust the
303. ion is defective Supply T the power The parameters in LCD x again INV Check Sum digital operator and the ifthe SAMO SMON appears several times the inverter Error parameters written into the inverter are unmatched is defective Note Note It will happen sometimes when you try to write data into an inverter with different voltage class and capacity Please refer to each inverter instruction manual 5 6 suoieisdo sdueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Option Board Protection Function List E6 o E7 Protection function list when the PG board 3G3AX PG01 is mounted OP1 appears when the option board is mounted on option port 1 Digital Operator connecter side and OP2 appears when it is mounted on option port 2 control circuit terminal block side Name Description Error Code Encod r Shuts off the output and displays an error when the encoder wiring disconnection or connection failure is detected the encoder is E60 0 E70 0 disconnection damaged or an encoder except for line driver output is used Shuts off the output and displays an error when the motor rotation Excess speed exceeds the maximum frequency A004 x the overspeed error E61 0 E71 0 detection level P026 Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position Positioning error deviation against the position reference value
304. ion Deceleration The automatic acceleration deceleration function eliminates the need for acceleration deceleration settings during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A044 A244 A344 b021 b024 b022 b025 A085 RUN mode selection Related functions e Conventionally the user had to set an Inverter acceleration deceleration time depending on the actual load conditions However this function can automatically set an acceleration deceleration time making full use of the Inverter s capacity The acceleration time is a time during which acceleration is performed within a current value set in the overload limit parameter when the overload limit function is enabled or within approx 150 of the rated current when the overload limit function is disabled The deceleration time is a time during which deceleration is performed within approx 150 of the rated current value or within a DC voltage in the Inverter circuit of approx 370 V 200V class or approx 740 V 400 V class Thus the Inverter enables real time response to a change in applied load and inertia and sets acceleration deceleration time automatically e Note the following before use Note 1 This function is not suitable for a machine that needs a fixed acceleration deceleration time Acceleration deceleration time varies depe
305. ion detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 logic operation output 3 ao 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF fan life warning signal 41 FR RUN command signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 Not used 47 Not used 48 Not used 49 Not used 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 63 OPO option 255 no no assignment When alarm code output is selected in C062 ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forced to be allocated to multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 anann 4 200 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R ole No code tion 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 3 Digital output frequency 4 Output voltage 5 Input power 141Bh FM selection cozz_ Rw eee s 8 Digital current monitor 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 12 Drive Pro
306. ions and make the necessary changes to remedy Fault RUN LED indicator during RUN OFF ALARM LED indicator ON POWER LED indicator ON Data display An error code such as E01 is displayed The display varies depending on the type of error uoneiado Operation 3 6 Test Run Operation Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters using the following procedure eTo initialize the parameters set parameter b084 to 2 and parameter b180 to 1 Key sequence Display example Description MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL d001 Output FO pecces Power On i 0 00HZz I J eee 0 00Hz FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL ee d I 21 Press the Prev Page or Next Page key until function mode is eset Erequency Ll displayed PREV PAGE NEXT PAGE Uo 008 zi C 10 0075 LLL FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL Press the Set key to enter function mode With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys write the parameter b084 T Eee FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL Press the Set key to enter b084 parameter gt a P With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys put the parameter b084 to 2 Press the Set key to change the parameter b084 to 2 FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys write the parameter b180 fA FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL Press the Set key to enter b180 para
307. is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 40 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page co01 Multi function input 1 selection C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection C004 Multi function input 4 selection Multi function input terminals C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging l DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operat
308. is output until the brake is released 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b123 0 00 s stopping release signal is turned off until the brake is closed 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a wait time longer than the time from b124 i when the release signal is released until the 0 00 s confirmation i brake outputs the release completion signal to the Inverter 0 00 to 400 00 b125 Brake release frequency Seta frequency to output the brake release 0 00 Hz signal 0 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current b126 Brake release current Setan output current that allows the brake to Rated current be released 0 00 to 400 00 b127 Brake input frequency Set a frequency to close the brake during 0 00 Hz stop Related functions C001 to C008 C021 to C025 1 Set a brake release frequency higher than the starting frequency b082 2 If the set current is too low sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released In any of the following cases the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER Brake error E36 e The output current is lower than the release current after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses When the brake confirmation BOK signal is used the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the brake confirmation wait time b124 during acceleration or does not turn off within the brake confirmati
309. isplayed automatically 02 Type 2 JX Sets the number of parameter sets for 01 Single R W Storage Mode READ WRITE mode 02 Quad ve When LCD digital operator remains without key operations for 1 minute LCD backlight f will be turned off When a key is pressed it 01 Off Backlight Auto Off Will turned on Bead miiie 01 The Backlight Auto Off function does not work when trip happened Backlight Flicker The Orange backlight will be enabled or 01 Enable 01 disabled 02 Disable Use this function to return to default settings of LCD digital operator The next items will be reset 1 Language English 2 Date and Time 2009 01 01 THU 00 00 01 YES Operator Reset 3 Time format 01 YY MM DD 02 NO 02 Check Mode Check if LED and key etc are normal or not Key amp Led Check LCD Check EEPROM Check RTC Check Serial Loopback Debug Mode Firmware Version Note Please do not execute the EEPROM check Otherwise the data parameters Drive program saved in LCD digital operator will be erased uoneiado Operation 3 4 Operation 4 Monitor A Display Mode 1 Please select monitor mode A by using the lt or pors Pacz Nex key at the navigation layer The cursor will be displayed in the Monitor A pressing the key 2 After that use the A or key to select the function code to be displayed into the Monitor A
310. it Terminal page 2 7 Requirements for operation e RUN command Switch Relay etc e Frequency reference External signal e g 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC 4 to 20 mA Digital Operator gt iiia EET koar Control circuit terminal block ey H o L p24 lt RUN command and switch Frequency reference _ EN FREQ adjuster ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference in a combination of Sources from the Digital Operator and the control circuit terminal block The RUN command frequency reference sources can be selected individually from the Digital Operator as well as the control circuit terminal block 3 3 3 2 LCD Display 3 2 LCD Display Backlight There are two backlight colors in the LCD display white and orange They reflect the state of the inverter as follows White Normal not related to inverter driving stop Orange Warning Parameter mismatch White lt gt Orange Alternate blinking for one second Tp ine same as ALARM EED Details of LCD Display The first line of LCD monitor always displays the Display Mode the Motor Selected the Inverter RUN Status and the Display Selection Inverter RUN Status Display Mode Motor Selected Display Selection FOO 1 2 00Hz tem C artent
311. ith jogging stop selection A039 set to 00 01 or With A039 set to 03 04 or 05 jogging functions even 02 jogging does not function if the FW signalis turned if the FW signal is turned on first However if the JG signal on first Torque B oost is turned off before the FW signal the motor coasts to a free running stop Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the primary resistance of the motor or by wiring to suppress torque reduction at a low speed range e To select the automatic torque boost for A041 A241 set motor capacity selection H003 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 according to your motor Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A041 Torque boost selection 00 Manual torque boost A241 2nd torque boost selection 01 Automatic torque boost A042 Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost 0 0 To 29 0 A242 vola Ratio to the value of AVR voltage 1 0 g selection A082 A342 8rd manual torque boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost frequency A243 ee eaimseo 7 q y Ratio to base frequency A343 3rd manual torque boost frequency H003 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory aie H203 2nd motor capacity selection Ratio to base frequency default H004 Motor pole number selection 2nd motor pole number 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole H204 f selection A046 Automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain 0 to 255 100
312. ition monitor P028 Numerator of motor gear ratio b120 Brake control enable P029 Denominator of motor gear ratio b121 Brake wait time for release P032 Positioning command input selection b122 Brake wait time for acceleration P033 Torque command input selection b123 Brake wait time fot stopping P034 Torque command setting b124 Brake wait time for confirmation P035 Polarity selection at the torquecommand input via O2 terminal b125 Brake release freq P036 Torque bias mode b126 Brake release current P037 Torque bias value b127 Braking frequency P038 Torque bias polarity selection Ho60 0 Hz speed limit P039 Speed limit for torque controlled operation forward rotation H260 0 Hz speed limit 2nd motor P040 Speed limit for torque controlled operation reverse rotation H061 Boost level for High TQ start SLV P060 Multistage position 0 H261 Boost level for High TQ start SLV Po61 Multistage position 1 2nd motor Encoder pulse per revolution ead P011 PPR setting P062 Multistage position 2 P012 Control pulse setting P063 Multistage position 3 P013 Pulse train mode setting P064 Multistage position 4 P014 Home search stop position setting P065 Multistage position 5 P015 Home search speed setting P066 Multistage position 6 P016 Home search direction setting P067 Multistage position 7 P017 a search ompletion range P068 Homing mode selection setting P018 Homesearch Completion gelay P069 Homing direction time setting P019 Electronig gear ser positon P070 Low s
313. itor d018 R 020 to 200 0 C 101Ah Motor temperature monitor d019 R 020 to 200 0 C 101Bh Not used 101Ch 2 0 Capacitor on the main circuit board 101Dh Life assessment monitor d022 R 2 1 Cooling fan rotation speed reduced 101Eh to Not used 1025h 1026h DC voltage monitor d102 R 0 0 to 999 9 V 1027h Regenerative braking load d103 R 0 0to 100 0 rate monitor 1028h Electronic thermal monitor d104 R 0 0 to 100 0 1029h to Not used 1033h 4 182 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regisiter Function name Funeiiem R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code d028 1034h HIGH R Pulse counter monitor 4028 0 to 2147483647 1 1035h LOW R 1036h d029 R 1073741823 to 1073741823 when Position command monitor me HAP fils Se ected 1 d029 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 1037h LOW R is selected 1038h d030 R 1073741823 to 1073741823 when Current position monitor mae HAP PIS selected 1 P d030 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 1039h LOW R is selected 103Ah to Not used 1102h 1057h Inverter mode d060 R W 00 to 01 lt Holding Register Number List gt Poe Function name Funeion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F002 1103h o HIGH Acceleration time 1 R W 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1104h F002 LOW F003 1105
314. itor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection Multi function output terminal C024 Multi function output terminal 14 selection C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FAS set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 logic operation output 3 e
315. ivalent the motor may not be stopped 2 When b130 01 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain b133 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time b134 but if too short the same situation may occur lt Group C Multi function Terminal Function gt The RX has eight input terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 five open collector output ter minals 11 12 13 14 and 15 one relay output terminal AL2 and AL1 SPDT contact two analog output terminals AM and AMI as well as one digital output terminal FM Multi function Input Selection e You can use the following functions by allocating them to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 To allocate the functions set the following data in C001 to C008 For example C001 corresponds to input terminal 1 e The same two functions cannot be allocated to the multi function input terminals If you attempt to allocate the same two functions to the terminals by mistake the terminal where you allocated the function last takes precedence The previous data is set to no no allocation and the terminal function is disabled e After allocating functions to terminals 1 to 8 make sure that the function settings have been stored dr es Data Function name Referenc
316. l current monitor Digital output frequency and Digital current monitor output a digital pulse at 0 10 V DC pulse voltage and 50 duty ratio Allowable max current 1 2mA Max frequency 3 6 kHz Power supply P24 Internal 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply for contact input signal When the source logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Allowable max output current 100 mA CM1 Input common Common terminal for the interface power supply P24 terminal thermistor input TH terminal and digital monitor FM terminal When the sink logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Do not connect this terminal to the ground Continued to the next page 2 8 a u is Design 2 2 Wiring ees etude Terminal name Description Specifications symbol g FW Forward rotation When the FW signal is ON the motor runs Contact input ON command terminal forward When it is OFF the motor decelerates condition E and stops Voltage between 8 each input terminal and the PLC terminal aa 18 V DC or more 1 Multi function input Select 8 functions from among the 61 functions 2 and allocate them to terminals 1 to 8 Input impedance 3 between each input 4 Note Only terminals 1 and 3 can be used for the terminal and the PLC 5 emergency shutoff function For details terminal 4 7
317. le when the Inverter capacity is increased by one rank This function contributes to simplification of control programs and extension of the service life of the brake Emergency Shutoff Function By switching the dedicated switch SW1 this function enables you to change the multi function input input 3 to the emergency shutoff input You can directly turn off a motor control power module without operating the software This function simplifies construction of safety applications Built in Braking Circuit up to 22 kW The Inverter models with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a braking transistor enabling space saving configuration for applications that need rapid acceleration and stop Restart Speed Search Function For a free running motor e g a fan motor this function checks the direction of rotation and frequency enabling smooth restart of the motor High torque Multi operation The RX Series enables balanced torque control for the whole system in proportion to multiple motor loads Deceleration Stop During Power Failure During a power failure or momentary power interruption the RX Series can decelerate and stop a motor by using the motor braking energy 1 2 M IM AQ Overview 1 1 Functions Human Environment friendly Features More Simplified Parameter Settings and View Only parameters that have been changed from the default settings can be viewed With the user setting function only 12 parameters for
318. lection 1359h l e duency conversion b086 RW 1 to 999 0 1 coefficient 0 Enabled 135Ah STOP key selection b087 R W 1 Disabled 2 Disabled only during stop 0 0 Hz start 135Bh_ Free run stop selection b088 R W 1 Frequency matching start 2 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 0 Disabled 1330 frequency reduction 9083 RAY 1 Enabled _ 1435Dh USagerate of regenerative Egon R W 0to 1000 0 1 braking function 135Eh Stop selection b091 pw 0 Deceleration gt Stop 1 Free run stop f 0 Always ON 135Fh Cooling fan control b092 R W 1 ON during RUN 1360h Not used 1361h Not used 4 195 4 4 Communication Function aa Function name Puree R W Monitor and setting parameters Re elur O code tion Regenerative braking 0 Disabled 1362h function operation b095 R W 1 Enabled disabled during stop selection 2 Enabled also during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 1363h function ON level pose I UN I Geo to 760 1M 1364h Not used 0 Disabled 1365h Thermistor selection b098 R W 1 PTC enabled 2 NTC enabled 1366h Thermistor error level b099 R W 0 to 9999 1 Q 1367h Free V f frequency 1 b100 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1368h Free V f voltage 1 b101 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1369h Free V f frequency 2 b102 R W 0
319. lection 4 125 23 POK Position ready Orientation function 4 134 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 Frequency arrival signal 4 98 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 27 ODc Analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc Analog OI disconnection detection Window comparator function 4 66 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output PID function 4 31 32 NDc Network error Network error 4 104 4 95 4 2 Function Mode Data Description Reference item Page 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 Logic operation output 4 Bs ie 37 LOGS Logic operation output 5 38 LOGE Logic operation output 6 39 WAC Capacitor life warning signal Capacitor life warning signal 4 103 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal Cooling fan speed drop signal 4 104 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting contact signal 4 105 42 OHF Fin overheat warning Fin overheat warning 4 105 43 LOC Light load detection signal Light load detection signal 4 106 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 Not used 47 Not used E 48 Not used 49 Not used 50 IRDY Operation ready signal Operation ready signal 4 106 51 FWR Forward run signal Forward run signal 4 106 52 RVR Reverse run signal Reverse run signal 4 107 53 MJA Fatal fault signal Fatal fault signal 4 107 54 WC
320. lement IGBT been error R E25 0 9 4 circuit or an erroneous operation damaged resulting from radiated electrical Is there any output short circuit noise Check the IGBT The Inverter has a failure Repair Replace Snutsonine Inverter output to Is there any output short circuit Check protect the main element when a the output wires momentary overcurrent Is there any ground fault temperature error in the main Check the output wires and motor IGBT error element or drop of the main E30 0 glement diivinarpower sunni Has the main element been damaged gP PPI Check the IGBT sien Is there any clogging in the fin Retry operation cannot be i POEN Clean the fin performed for this trip Is the motor temperature too high Shuts off the Inverter output when Check the motor temperature detecting the thermistor resistance Is there any damage to the thermister Thermistor value inside the motor has changed E35 0 inside the motor 2 10 error which is connected to the TH Check the thermistor 4 75 terminal resulting motor Is there any electrical noise being temperature rise introduced in the thermister signal Separate the wiring When 01 is selected in b120 brake Is the brake ON OFF function working control selection this error appears Brake check if the brake ON OFF cannot be Is the set time for b124 too short Brake error confirmed within the b124 set time E36 0 Increase b124 4 76 b
321. lerated during regeneration il 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 5 1317h Overload limit level b022 R W 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1318h Overload limit parameter b023 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during acceleration constant speed 1319h Overload limit selection 2 b024 R W 2 Enabled during constant speed 3 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regenera tion ae 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW gt 131Ah Overload limit level 2 b025 R W 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 131Bh Overload limit parameter 2 b026 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s 131Ch Overcurrent suppression b027 R W o Disabled a function 1 Enabled Active Frequency Match 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW X 131Dh ing restart level ages R W 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 4 131Eh Active Frequency Match boog Rw 10 to 3000 0 01 s ing restart parameter Starting frequency at 0 Frequency at interruption 131Fh Active Frequency Match b030 R W 1 Max frequency ing restart 2 Set frequency 0 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 1 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 1320h Soft lock selection b031 R W 2 Data other than b031 cannot be changed 3 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data can be changed during RUN 1321h Not used me 1322h Not used 1323h
322. llocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 33 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter 5 Default ioe N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation po17 oben ready range 0 to 10000 5 No Pulse 4128 setting 4 134 Poig Position ready delay 9 49 to 9 99 0 00 No ge aeg time setting 4 134 Electronic gear si P019 setting position S ae eee 00 Yes selection P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 Yes _ ore numerator l 4 130 P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 Yes oe denominator Position control P022 feedforward gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 00 Yes 4 125 4 129 P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 0 50 Yes rad s 4 130 4 134 4 136 P024 Position bias amount 2048 to 2048 0 Yes 4 129 Secondary resistance compensation 00 Disabled F FOSS enable disable 01 Enabled 09 Ne E ols selection wn 5 poze Cvespeed tor hy dito 15010 135 0 No 5 7 3 detection level Speed deviati po27 Pee9 deviation error 0 00 to 120 00 7 50 No Hz 4 125 detection level po2g olor gear ratio 1 to 9999 1 No numerator 4 133 po2g Motor gear ratio 4 to 9999 1 No denominator Acceleration e Ai Hu P031 deceleration time p 00 No 4 8 inbi typ 02 Option 2 PUEDE 03 Drive Programming f 00 Digital Operator P032 e ma o 01 Option 1 o No ee
323. located to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 5 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Desau gies Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting 4 operation Multi step speed 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals A019 selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals Ro bi a aozo Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 2nd multi step Ao A220 speed tatersneed 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz 4 16 A320 Stemi tssteh Speed 0 0 Starting frequency to 3rd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A021 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 1 A022 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 2 A023 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 3 A024 Multi step speed 0 00 5 reference 4 5 z S ao25 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 5 5 3 A026 Multi step speed 0 00 Q reference 6 Q a 2 A027 Multi step speed 0 00 E reference 7 S j ao2g Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 16 reference 8 A029 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 9 A030 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 10 A031 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 11 A032 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 12 A033 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 13 A034 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 14 A035 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 15
324. lower limit level 1346h Window comparator O2 b067 R W Setting range 100 to 100 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 4 194 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R d No code tion Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator O2 lower imit eves 1347h Comp b068 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width ee te PaA TN Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 1348h Not used 1349h pas operation levelat b070 R W 0 to 100 255 no 1 isconnection 134a Atos operation levelat 6071 R W 0 to 100 255 no 1 Ol disconnection 134Bh_ Analog operation level at 1979 Rw 100 to 100 127 no 1 2 O2 disconnection 134Ch to Not used 1350 1351h Integrated power clear b078 R W Clear by writing 1 1352h aa power display 4979 Rw 1 to 1000 1 1353h Not used 1354h Not used 0 01 1355h Starting frequency b082 R W 10 to 999 Hz i 5 to 150 0 4 to 55 kW 1356h Carrier frequency b083 R W 5 to 100 75 to 132 kW 0 1 KHz 0 Clears the trip monitor a 1 Initializes data 1957h Initiaization selgetion poet FUNN 2 Clears the trip monitor and initializes _ data 4358h Mitialization parameter b085 R W Do not change se
325. ls 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 4 48 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overload Limit Overload Warning This function helps prevent an overcurrent trip due to rapid load fluctuation in acceleration or constant speed operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b021 Overload limit selection 00 Disabled 01 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 02 Enabled in constant speed operation b024 Overload limit selection 2 03 Enabled in acceleration constant 01 speed operation accelerates during regeneration b022 Overload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated 1 50 x Rated A current 0 4 to 55 kW current A 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated 1 50 x Rated b025 Overload limit level 2 current 75 to 132 kW rrent A b023 Overload limit parameter 1 0 s 0 10 to 30 00 b026 Overload limit parameter 2 1 0 s Oveiloadviainino sional 00 Enabled during acceleration C040 output d 9 deceleration constant speed 01 p 01 Enabled only during constant speed C041 Overload warning level 0 0 Does not operate Rated current C111 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current A Overload warning level 2 75 to 132 kW Rated current Outputs OL and OL2 signals when reaching the overload warning level Related functions C001 to
326. ltage occurs during stop When selecting the retry function set retry condition b008 according to your system If undervoltage is retained for 40 seconds even during retry operation it results in E09 undervoltage trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Outputs an alarm after a trip 01 Restarts from 0 Hz at retry 02 Matches the frequency at retry and starts 3 4 g example 1 S Bon Retry selection 03 Performs Active Frequency Matching start at ce retry and trips after deceleration stop 3 04 Performs Active Frequency Matching restart at retry example 1 3 Allowable 0 3 to 25 0 b002 momentary power If the momentary power interruption is within the set 1 0 s interruption time time the Inverter follows the setting in b001 PEO 0 3 to 100 0 b003 Retry wait time Time before restart 1 0 s Momentary power 99 Disabled interruption 01 Enabled puos A trip 02 Disabled during stop and during deceleration og _ g p 4 stop when the RUN command is turned off selection 00 Restarts 16 times during momentary power Momentary power i interruption b005 interruption retry pie 00 01 Restarts limitlessly during momentary power time selection i interruption Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 matching lower When the motor free running frequency falls below b007 ae ere 0 00 Hz limit frequency this lower limit frequency the Inverter restarts at 0 setting Hz exa
327. lti step position command 2 P062 4 136 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 ROE Meagning selection 04 Multi step position command 4 P064 00 mee 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 P190 Drive Programming to user parameters 0 10 69593 0 P131 p P160 to Fok To 0000 to FFFF 0000 pie9 99 P170 to Option HF cmd A o000 to FFFF 0000 P179 register 1 to 10 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 36 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter s Default Granges N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page O setting operation P180 Profibus node 0to 125 0 address P181 Profibus clear mode 00 Clear 00 01 Last value 00 PPO P182 ee 01 Conventional 00 02 Flexible Mode P190 CompoNet node 0 to 63 0 address P192 DeviceNet node 0 to 63 63 address 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes 00 P196 ML2 node address 21 to 3E21 21 U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P196 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P196 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P196 no U004 User 4 selection no d001 to P196 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P196 no E U006 User 6 selection no d001 to P196 no Yes 4
328. m Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Electronic gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 Position control feedforward gain ASR REF C Electronic gear setting position 00 FB selected FFWG Position control feedforward gain Position loop gain REF FB Electronic gear setting position 01 REF selected 4 132 suoioun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Motor Gear Ratio Setting Function This function is useful for a system with an optional encoder installed on the machine side Set the number of actual encoder pulses in encoder pulses P011 Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio in motor gear ratio numerator denominator P028 P029 With the above settings the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data is set in the Inverter This function performs speed position detection based on the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data and calculates the orientation stop position based on the number of encoder pulses P011 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P028 Motor gear ratio numerator 1 to 9999 i _ P029 Motor gear ratio Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio denominator P011 Encoder pulses 128 10 65935
329. mand 1 Position range specification forward side P062 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 2 Position range specification forward side P063 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 3 Position range specification forward side z es P064 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 4 Position range specification forward side Po65 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 4 131 command 5 Position range specification forward side Po66 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 6 Position range specification forward side P067 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 7 Position range specification forward side S 00 Low S P068 Zero return mode 01 Hi1 00 Yes 02 Hi2 o o Zero return direction 00 Forward side g Boe selection 01 Reverse side 99 a E O pa 2 pozo LOW speed zero 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency P071 High speed zero 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency 4 131 Position range Ea ea 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 specification 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 268435455 Yes forward Position range bates a 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 S P073 lispecitication 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 ane eS reverse 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 01 Multi step
330. meter 3 15 3 6 Test Run Operation Key sequence Display example Description With the Prev Page Next Page Up and Down keys put the parameter b180 to 1 O af Press the Set key to change the parameter b180 to 1 and initialize parameters No load Operation eStart the no load motor i e not connected to the mechanical system using the Digital Operator Stopping the Motor e After completing the no load operation press the STOP RESET key The motor will stop Actual Load Operation e After checking the operation with the motor in the no load status connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load Connecting the Mechanical System After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system e Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis and the mechanical system Operation via the Digital Operator e Because a possible error may occur during operation make sure that the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter the same way as in no load operation Checking the Operating Status e After making sure that the operating direction is correct and that the Inverter is operating smoothly at a slow speed increase the frequency reference e By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction make sure that there is no vibration or abno
331. minal block allocation External port Input Forward or reverse operation Stop Frequency settings Setting through RS485 communication 7 4 SUuOI edIIN0dS E Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Input Multi function input 8 terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable Terminal function 8 functions can be selected from among 61 Reverse RV Multi step speed setting binary 1 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 2 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 3 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 4 CF4 Jogging JG DC injection braking DB 2nd control SET 2 step acceleration deceleration 2CH Free run stop FRS External trip EXT USP function USP Commercial switching CS Soft lock SFT Analog input switching AT 3rd control SET3 Reset RS 3 wire start STA 3 wire stop STP 3 wire forward reverse F R PID enabled disabled PID PID integral reset PIDC Control gain switching CAS UP DWN function accelerated UP UP DWN function decelerated DWN UP DWN function data clear UDC Forced operator OPE Multi step speed setting bit 1 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 2 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 3 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 4 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 5 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 6 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 7 SF7 Overload limit switching OLR Torque limit enabled
332. mples 3 and 4 00 Outputs an alarm after a trip 01 Restarts from 0 Hz at retry Trib retiyselection 02 Matches the frequency at retry and starts b008 7 p retry 03 Performs Active Frequency Matching start at 00 retry and trips after deceleration stop 04 Performs Active Frequency Matching restart at retry b009 Undervoltage retry 00 Restarts 16 times in the event of undervoltage 00 time selection 01 Restarts limitlessly in the event of undervoltage Overvoltage 1to3 b010 overcurrent retry Select the number of retry times in the event of 3 Time time overvoltage overcurrent gt 4 42 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit way 0 3 to 100 0 b011 Trip retry wait time Time before restart 1 0 S Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW b028 Matching restart 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current A level Current limit level at Active Frequency Matching restart Active Frequency 0 10 to 30 00 b029 Matching restart Frequency reduction time at Active Frequency 0 50 s parameter Matching restart Starting frequency 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 Matching restart 02 Set frequency Related functions C021 to C025 C026 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ta If an overvoltage overcurrent trip
333. munication e If a reception timeout error occurs this signal is output until reception of the next data Set a time before reception timeout in communication error timeout C077 e For details refer to 4 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Eiei a output _ terminal selection 32 NDc network communication Relay output AL2 AL1 disconnection detection C026 05 function selection C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 a 0 00 Set a time before reception timeout timeout External controller Inverter Monitor timer Communication disconnection detection signal NDc C077 Cooling Fan Speed Drop Signal Communication trip time e This signal is output when detecting that the Inverter s built in cooling fan rotation speed is reduced to 75 or less e If 01 is selected in cooling fan control b092 this signal is not output even while the fan is stopped While this signal is output check the cooling fan for clogging Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal Unit Parameter No Function name Data Default setting C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection 40 WAF C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection cooling fan life warning signal 05 Related functions b092 d022 4 104 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function
334. n 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 0 y braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 0 A058 startap DG IleCuon o giso 0 0 s braking time iniecti i 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 A059 DC injection braking Hz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 Related functions C001 to C008 4 24 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode HDC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency You can set a DC injection braking carrier frequency in A059 Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher frequency automatically reduces the braking power Refer to the following figure DC injection braking power limit k ohRaADN WD OO Max braking power N 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 DC injection braking carrier frequency DC Injection Braking Power Limit eExternal DC Injection Braking e Allocate 07 DB to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 DC injection braking can be applied by turning on off the DB terminal regardless of DC injection braking selection A051 Set a braking power level in DC injection braking power A054 elf DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter output is shut off during the set time period and the motor goes into free run status After the set time elapses DC injection braking starts Set DC injection braking time A055 via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation Perform each setting according to your system after setting DC injection braking method
335. n 1 Frequency reference A145 12B6h to Not used 12B8h 12B9h EL S curve ratio 1 during Aiso Rw lotoso 1 acceleration 12BAh EES uve ratio 2 during 4454 RW 0to 50 1 2 acceleration 12BBh EL S curve ratio 1 during A452 pw oto 50 1 2 deceleration 12Bch_ EL S curve ratio 2 during A153 Rw oto 50 1 deceleration 12BDh to Not used 1300h 0 Trip 1 O Hz start 1301h Retry selection b001 pw Z Frequency matching start 3 4 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop Active Frequency Matching restart 4 190 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Beal Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R d No code tion Allowable momentary 1302h eo b002 R W 3 to 250 0 1 s power interruption time 1303h Retry wait time b003 R W 3to 1000 0 1 s 0 Disabled Momentary power 1 Enabled 1304h interruption undervoltage b004 R W geen 7 F 2 Disabled during stop and deceleration trip during stop selection stop Momentary power f 1305h interruption retry time b005 pw 16 times 1 No limit selection 1306h Input phase loss b006 R W 0 Disabled ta protection selection 1 Enabled 1307h ea R W Frequency matching lower 0 01 ta 0 to 40000 limit frequency setting b007 Hz 1308h LOW R W 0 Trip 1 O Hz start 2 Frequency matching sta
336. n control con form to the items selected when the RUN command is turned on If the position command is set to a low value the Inverter may stop deceleration and perform posi tioning before the speed command value is reached In the absolute position control mode the direction of RUN command FW or RV does not refer to the rotating direction The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter The Inverter runs forward when Target position Current position is a positive value or runs in reverse when it is a negative value If you do not perform zero return operation to be described later the position at power on is re garded as the origin position 0 When position command is set to 0 positioning is performed when the RUN command is turned on In reset selection C102 select 03 trip reset only If reset selection C102 is not set to 03 turning on the Inverter s reset terminal or RESET key clears the current position counter To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value after resetting a trip by turning on the reset terminal or RESET key be sure to set reset selection C102 to 03 If PCLR is allocated turning on the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter The internal position deviation counter is simultaneously cleared The absolute position control mode disables the ATR terminal Torque control is disabled The absolute position control mode disables the STAT terminal Pulse t
337. n may cause a problem e g damage to the machine driven by the motor set reverse rotation prevention selection b046 to enabled Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Wit characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 Selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank Reverse rotation 00 Disabled ee prevention selection 01 Enabled 00 E Torque LADSTOP Function e If 03 Sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 Sensor vector control is selected in control method A004 A244 this function temporarily stops the frequency deceleration function LAD when the torque limit function is activated Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Wit characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A344 is blank 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward
338. nal with the main power supply applied if a signal voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal 3 2 uoneiado Operation 3 1 Operation Method 3 1 Operation Method This Inverter has the following operation methods that are selected by the RUN command frequency reference settings The features and the requirements for each operation method are also given below E To enter the RUN command frequency reference via the Digital Operator This action operates the Inverter via a key sequence of the standard or optional Digital Operator When operating the Inverter only via the Digital Operator the Inverter does not need to be connected to the control circuit terminal block Digital Operator ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block This action operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals from the frequency setting device starting switch etc to the control circuit terminal block The operation starts by turning ON the RUN command FW RV while the input power supply is turned ON Note that the frequency can be set using a voltage signal or a current signal from the control circuit terminal block which can be selected according to the system For details refer to Control Circu
339. name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output _ terminal selection 43 LOC light load detection signal Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 05 function selection 00 Enabled in operation C038 Light epe a ouput 01 Enabled only in constant speed 01 operation C039 Light load detection level 00 10 210x Rated current Rated current A Set an output level for low current signals Output current A Low current signal detection level C039 Low current signal Operation Ready Signal e This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation ready to receive the RUN command e Even if the RUN command is input while this signal is not output the Inverter does not recognize the RUN command e f this signal is not output check if the input power supply voltage R L1 S L2 T L3 is within the specified range Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output E C021 to C025 terminal selection 50 IRDY operation ready signal Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C026 Forward Run Signal e This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward While the Inverter is running in reverse or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output E C021 to C025 terminal selection 51 FWR forward run signal Relay out
340. nance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Megger test For a megger test of the external circuit be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the Inverter so as not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit not to the control circuit Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test For a megger test of the Inverter main circuit remove the short circuit bar used for switching the Inverter built in filter function and then short circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 PD 1 P N RB Ro and To with the wires as shown below After the megger test remove the short circuit wires from terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W TS3 P PD 1 N RB Ro and To and reconnect the short circuit bar for switching the Inverter built in filter function Note that the RB terminal is provided only for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity Motor Power supply A S L2 saat ices aia T L3 Ro voune terminal Ground terminal o Do not connect the power wire Do not connect to the To motor Be sure to remove the short circuit bar for switching the built in filter function Withstand Voltage Test Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter Doing the test is dangerous and may cause damage or deterioration to the pa
341. nction codes supported by the RX Function Code r f Maximum number of Maximum data number in Function code Function data bytes in 1 message 1 message Oth Reading coil status 4 32 coils in bits Reading holding register 2 03h content 8 4 registers in bytes 05h Writing into the coil 2 1 coil in bits 06h punting into then lding 2 1 register in bytes register 08h Loop back test OFh Writing into multiple coils 4 32 coils in bits 10h Writing into multiple registers 8 4 registers in bytes lt Error Check gt CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is used for the ModBus RTU error check e The CRC code is a 16 bit data generated for the block of random length data in the 8 bit unit To prepare the CRC code use a generation polynomial of CRC 16 X18 X15 X 1 4 164 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function CRC 16 Calculation Example CRC 16 calculation CRC FFFFh All target data completed CRC CRC register 2 bytes Exi S S CRC CRC XOR target data Bits left Shift CRC CRC by 1 bit to the right Interchange the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC Overflow bit after shift Completed CRC CRC XOR A001h EE ee er ee eee Shift by 1 byte against target data lt Header and Trailer Silent Interval gt Wait time from receiving the query from the master to the response b
342. nction even during acceleration e Make the following adjustments if this function operates before the frequency reaches the target value during acceleration Increase the acceleration time Refer to Acceleration Deceleration Time page 4 8 Increase the torque boost Refer to Torque Boost page 4 19 Increase the overload limit level 6022 b025 4 2 Function Mode Overload limit level f Ne b022 b025 i Decelerates according to the set overload limit parameter Output current Max frequency A004 A204 A304 Target frequency Pa ra ae Inverter output frequency b023 b026 Overload Warning elf the applied load is large the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload trip occurs This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine or an operation line stop due to overload protection of the Inverter Allocate 03 OL or 26 OL2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Two types of overload warning signals are available for output Overload limit level b022 b025 Overload warning level C041 C111 Output current ovoza t l 4 50 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overcurrent Suppression Function e This function suppresses overcurrent caused by a steep current rise in rapid acceleration e You can set whether to enable or disable this fu
343. nction input 1 ulti function output 3 Multi function input 2 Multi function output 4 Multi function input 3 f Multi function output 5 Multi function input 4 See O i i Multi function input 5 Multi function output common Multi function input 6 Multi function input 7 Multi function input 8 oN O oa A U N RS485 communication For termination Sequence input common resistors Analog monitor output Z Thermistor Y voltage output Analog monitor output current output Digital monitor output Frequency setting unit Frequency reference power supply A PWM output 500 to 2 KQ a Frequency reference input voltage A D Frequency reference auxiliary input voltage A Option 1 g Frequency reference input current Frequency reference common Option 1 g lL is the common reference for analog input and also for analog output a u is Design 2 2 Wiring E Main Circuit Terminals Terminal symbol Terminal name Description R L1 S L2 Main power supply input Connect the input power supply T L3 terminal U T1 V T2 Inverter output terminal Connect to the 3 phase motor W T3 PD 1 P External DC reactor Remove the short circuit bar between terminals PD 1 terminal and P and connect the optional power factor improvement DC reactor P RB Braking resistor Connect optional external braking resistors The RB connection terminals terminal is provided for the In
344. nction with b027 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Overcurrent suppression 00 Disabled Bere function 01 Enabled mo Note If you use the Inverter with an elevating machine disable this function Otherwise the machine may slide down Output frequency Desired Actual acceleration after suppression operation Time Output current Suppression level about 160 of the rating Time Soft Lock Function e You can set whether to enable or disable the writing of various code data This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 02 Data other than b031 cannot be changed 03 Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed Related functions C001 to C008 SFT input b031 Soft lock selection 01 e Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the above table e To use a multi function input terminal allocate 15 SFT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 51 4 2 Function Mode RUN Time Power ON Time Exceeded lf the total RUN time of the Inverter exceeds
345. nd PI proportional 100 0 gain H051 PI integral gain 100 0 0 0 to 1000 0 Yes a H251 2nd PI integral gain 100 0 90 H052 P proportional gain 1 00 i 0 01 to 10 00 Yes H252 2nd P proportional 1 00 gain T H060 Limitat0 Hz 100 0 0 0 to 100 0 Yes g H260 2nd limit at 0 Hz 100 0 a 3 Hoe1 Boost amount at SLV 50 4 115 z startup 0 Hz fe 0 to 50 Yes O 4994 2nd boost amount at 50 SLV startup 0 Hz p Kozo For ryPropenional 49 t0 4000 0 100 0 Yes gain switching Ho71 For PI integral gain 9 4 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes switching 4 87 Ho72 FOrP proportional 9 99 to 10 00 1 00 Yes gain switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms P001 Operation selection 00 Trip l 00 No at option 1 error 01 Continues operation A06 Operation selection 00 Trip pote at option 2 error 01 Continues operation ue Ne o 4 120 P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 65535 1024 No Pulse 4 128 4 129 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode a P012 Eia mode 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 No a 5 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position D control mode O Pulse train mode 005 ModE Q P013 selection 01 Mode 1 00 No 4 123 02 Mode 2 po14 Orientation stop 0 to 4095 0 No position P015 Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper 5 00 No Hz 4 129 setting limit 120 0 P016 Orientation direction o0 Forward sid
346. nding on applied load and inertia Note 2 If the machine inertia exceeds approx 20 times that of the motor shaft the Inverter may trip In this case reduce the carrier frequency Note 3 Acceleration deceleration time varies depending on fluctuations in current value even with the same motor Note 4 The automatic optimum acceleration deceleration setting is enabled only during V f control When sensorless vector control is selected the Inverter performs normal operation 4 36 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Note 5 If the jogging operation is performed when the automatic operation is selected the Inverter performs automatic acceleration which is different from normal jogging operation Note 6 When the applied load is larger than the rating deceleration time may be prolonged Note 7 If acceleration and deceleration are frequently repeated the Inverter may trip Note 8 When the internal braking circuit is used or when the regenerative braking unit is externally installed the motor cannot stop within the specified deceleration time because of braking resistance In this case do not use the automatic optimum acceleration deceleration function Note 9 When using a lower rank motor size than specified for the Inverter enable the overload limit function b021 and set the overload limit level b022 to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function e By setting this f
347. ng electronic thermal frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 No Hz b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 13 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ie N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed Overload limit Operation b021 selection 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 mar 0 4 to 55 kW x pode OVerload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated NO i 75 to 132 kW current pozz Qvetoad limit 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 4 49 5 00 Disabled E 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 i operation a b024 Overload am 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No selection 2 5 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 operation Accelerates during g regeneration 6 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50
348. ng operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection C024 Multi function output terminal 14 selection C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FAS set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 logic operation output 3 ewe 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6
349. ng binary 4 06 JG jogging 07 DB external DC injection braking 08 SET 2nd control 09 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 13 USP USP function 14 CS commercial switch 15 SFT soft lock 16 AT analog input switching 17 SET3 3rd control 18 RS reset 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID enabled disabled 24 PIDC PID integral reset 26 CAS control gain switching 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE forced operator 32 SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 33 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 34 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 35 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 36 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 37 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 38 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 39 OLR overload limit switching 40 TL torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 42 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 43 PPI P PI switching 44 BOK Brake confirmation 45 ORT orientation 46 LAC LAD cancel 47 PCLR position deviation clear 48 STAT pulse train position command input permission 50 ADD frequency addition 51 F TM forced terminal block 52 ATR torque command input permission 53 KHC integrated power clear 54 SON servo ON 55 FOC preliminary
350. ng input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG drive program start NO no allocation 01 12 18 02 03 06 08 no 1 When the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON C001 and C003 are forced to change to 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively You cannot intentionally set 64 If SW1 is turned on and then off C003 is set to no no allocation 4 82 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode The functions switchable via the SET SETS terminal are F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 A020 A220 A320 A041 A241 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 A044 A244 A344 A046 A246 A047 A247 A061 A261 A062 A262 A092 A292 A392 A093 A293 A393 A094 A294 A095 A295 A096 A296 b012 b212 b312 b013 b213 b313 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 H204 H005 H205 H006 H206 H306 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H030 H230 H031 H231 H032 H232 H033 H233 H034 H234 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 H060 H260 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3
351. ng of initialization selection b084 If b084 is 00 the trip data is cleared e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 10 32 ang FF Communication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 08 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 160 Negative response Refer to page 4 160 4 158 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 09 gt Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 09 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control
352. ng the crimp terminal bare wires use the square washer included with the product Note The cable size is based on the HIV cable 75 C heat resistance 2 19 2 2 Wiring E Connection for Separating Inverter Control Circuit Power Supply from Main Power Supply If the Inverter protection circuit is activated to turn off the magnetic contactor of the Inverter input power supply the power to the Inverter control circuit is also turned off and the alarm signal cannot be kept on If the alarm signal must be kept on use control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To Connect control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To to the primary circuit of the magnetic contactor according to the following procedure Connection method Incoming electricity specifications 200 V class 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 282 to 339 V DC 400 V class 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 537 to 678 V DC 1 Disconnect the connected wire 2 Disconnect the J51 connector 3 Connect the control circuit power cable to the control circuit power supply terminal block To separate the control circuit power supply Ro To from the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 observe the following instructions For wiring between terminals Ro and To terminal screw size M4 use a cable of 1 25 mm or more Connect a 3 A fuse to the control circuit power supply cable If the control circuit power supply Ro To
353. ng trip g 0 Normal 0014h FA1 constant speed arrival signal R TON p g 0 OFF FA2 over set frequency arrival 1 ON goth signal m 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 174 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description 1 ON 0016h OL overload warning R 0 OFF 0017h OD excessive PID deviation R on 0 OFF 1 ON 0018h AL alarm signal R 0 OFF FAS set frequency only arrival 1 ON 0019h signal i 0 OFF 1 ON 001Ah OTQ overtorque R 0 OFF IP during momentary power 1 ON ie interruption m 0 OFF j 1 ON 001Ch UV during undervoltage R 0 OFF Bos 1 ON 001Dh TRQ during torque limit R 0 OFF 001Eh RNT RUN time exceeded R EON 0 OFF 001Fh ONT ON time exceeded R TON 0 OFF 1 ON 0020h THM thermal warning R 0 OFF 0021h Not used 0022h Not used 0023h Not used 0024h Not used 0025h Not used 1 ON 0026h BRK brake release R 0 OFF 1 ON 0027h BE
354. ning Motor rpm D a A RS terminal ee 2 Alarm output e E terminal e This function trips the Inverter displaying E13 if the power is turned on with the RUN command to the Inverter turned on Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Does not start the Inverter with the power turned on while the RUN command is input 13 USP USP function Starts the Inverter with the power turned on while the OFF aan RUN command is input Available input terminals C001 to C008 eTo reset a trip perform the reset operation or turn off the RUN command Example 1 e If a trip is reset with the RUN command input turned on the Inverter restarts operation immediately after the trip is reset Example 2 e f the RUN command is turned on after the power is turned on the Inverter operates normally Example 3 e Allocate 13 USP to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 84 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The following shows how the power recovery restart prevention function works p a a a ae Power Power Power supply supply o supply ae 2 b sy w ae USP USP USP RS rn J Ls ig Alarm a E Alarm ce ee l Alarm ae E a frequency frequency frequency Commercial Switching e You can use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and deceleration by using the Inverter and during constant
355. nit A044 V f characteristics 00 Heavy duty Constant torque characteristics VC Special reduced torque characteristics Special VP 02 Free V f characteristics Only A044 A244 can be set 03 Sensorless vector control SLV selection 01 A244 2nd V f characteristics selection A344 3rd V f characteristics selection Only A044 A244 can be set 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control Only A044 A244 can be set 05 Sensor vector control V2 Only A044 can be set Normal duty 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics Special VP 02 Free V f characteristics 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 00 Related functions A046 A246 A047 A247 A082 H003 H203 H004 H204 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 21 4 2 Function Mode 1 Refer to Sensorless Vector Control page 4 116 2 Refer to 0 Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 117 Constant Torque Characteristics VC Output voltage is proportional to output frequency While proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequencies Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz i H gt 0 Base frequency Max frequency Special Reduced Torque Characteristics Special VP Suitable for a fan or pump that requires torque in
356. nit b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 sa eh scans 0 Hz b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 4 22 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Description Default setting Unit b101 Free V f voltage 1 b103 Free V f voltage 2 b105 Free V f voltage 3 b107 Free Vi voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 ge 0 0 V b109 Free V f voltage 5 b111 Free V f voltage 6 b113 Free V f voltage 7 Related functions A044 A244 A344 Example A Output voltage V put voltage V _ gt Output frequency Hz 0 fi f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 Even if free V f voltages 1 to 7 are set to 800 V the Inverter cannot output voltage higher than the input voltage or the value of the motor voltage selection Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper An improper setting causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor and or machine Output voltage V y7 e 1 4 Select the voltage or motor S voltage available for output V6 7 0 f6 f7 Output frequency Hz 4 23 4 2 Function Mod
357. not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGN
358. npa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes D Ol hysteresis width re ta Pag om Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit O level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 pepe O2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 100 xe width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 i z 0067 O2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 190 mes width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limitievels b068 par Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes O2 hysteresis width at ee anes Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Analog operation 4 66 b070 level at O 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b071 level at Ol 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b072 level at O2 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 17 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter 9 Default ae N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation b078 Integrated power Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes me clear 01 4 4 bo7g Integrated power 4 to 1000 1 No display gain b082 S
359. nt torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics gt aa special VP A044 ie ee 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 Sensor vector control V2 00 Constant torque characteristics VC No a 4 21 ond V f 01 Special reduced torque characteristics sda special VP nett ee 02 Free V f characteristics o9 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 3rd V f 00 Constant torque characteristics VC A344 characteristics 01 Special reduced torque characteristics 00 selection special VP A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Yes 4 24 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 27 3 9 Parameter List Parameter 5 Default Greng N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Automatic torque A046 _ boost voltage 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 8 2nd automatic A246 torque boost voltage 0 to 255 100 D compensation gain a 4 19 Automatic torque 5 A047 boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes Ea 2nd automatic A247 torque boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain TEE f 00 Disabled D aos1 DO injection braking 01 Enabled gi Noe sl g 02 Frequency c
360. ntary 0 01 to 3600 00 1 00 s power interruption 3 Deceleration starting width b054 onnohystop functor ale Iaia 10 00 0 00 Hz momentary power interruption 3 Proportional gain setting of 0 00 to 2 55 non stop function at Proportional gain for DC voltage constant b055 0 20 momentary power control interruption b050 02 03 only Integral time setting of non 0 000 10 65 535 b056 stop function at momentary k time for Deyoltageconstant 0 100 s power interruption b050 02 03 only 4 63 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Deceleration Stop b050 01 e After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level 0052 eTo use this function remove the J51 connector cable connected between terminals Ro and To and connect the cable from main terminal P to Ro and from N to To The cable size should be 0 75 mm or larger e f the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the frequency deceleration width decreases at the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width b054 and then the Inverter decelerates for the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration time b053 lf an overvoltage condition momentary power interruption non stop deceleration lev
361. ntegral gain 100 0 f H052 P proportional gain 1 00 i 0 01 to 10 00 Yes H252 2nd P proportional 1 00 gain T H060 Limitat0 Hz 100 0 0 0 to 100 0 Yes g H260 2nd limit at 0 Hz 100 0 a S Hoe1 Boost amount at SLV 50 4 117 E startup 0 Hz S TET 0 to 50 Yes 2nd boost amount at mee SLV startup 0 Hz 29 Ho7o For PI proportional 9 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes gain switching Ho71 For PI integral gain 9 4 to 1000 0 100 0 Yes switching 4 89 Ho72 For P proportional 99 to 10 00 1 00 Yes gain switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms P001 Operation selection 00 Trip l 00 No at option 1 error 01 Continues operation A Operation selection 00 Trip pute at option 2 error 01 Continues operation oe Ne o 4 125 P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 65535 1024 No Pulse 4 133 4 134 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode a P012 Eia mode 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 No sae 5 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position D control mode O Pulse train mode Odense P013 selection 01 Mode 1 00 No 4 128 02 Mode 2 paia O neoataestop 0 to 4095 0 No position P015 Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper 5 00 No Hz 4 134 setting limit 120 0 P016 Orientation direction o0 Forward side 00 No S setting 01 Reverse side 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is a
362. nter The Inverter does not operate rupted S L2 phase is interrupted The Inverter reverts to single phase operation causing a trip due to undervoltage overcurrent etc or damage to the Inverter Even if the power input is under a phase loss condition the internal capacitor is charged with voltage causing an electric shock or injury When changing the cable connections refer to the instructions on page 2 1 2 12 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring e In the following cases the internal converter module may be damaged Use caution to avoid them Imbalance of power supply voltage is 3 or more Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity and also 500 kVA or more Rapid change in power supply voltage Example When several Inverters are connected with a short bus When the phase advance capacitor is turned on off e Do not turn power on off more than once every 3 minutes Doing so may damage the Inverter Winverter Output Terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 For connection of the output terminal use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Otherwise the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop Particularly during low frequency output a voltage drop occurs with the cable resulting in motor torque reduction Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber These devices cause the Inverter to trip or may cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber
363. o setting operation bga RUN ime ower ON Ig to es5a5 o No h 4 52 time setting o Rotation direction 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled 2 b035 limit selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 No 4 52 fe 02 Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to z pase startup selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time large Ne a Fos 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 00 No 4 53 03 Data comparison display o 04 Basic display 2 ma bose sereen 000 to 202 001 No 456 selection User parameter ae b039 automatic setting o0 peas 00 No 4 57 i 01 Enabled function selection 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch 4 57 b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 No 4 59 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 Torque limit 1 i 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW _ po41 Four quadrant mode 9 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No p 457 forward power S aeh 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running Z Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b042 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No le 5 reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabled He ee mode 19 200 04 to S5 kM m b043 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No reverse power key 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180
364. oad warning 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated T C041 ievel 0 4 to 55 kW Aion No A Z 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 5 75 to 132 kW B co42 Arrival frequency 9 49 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 2 during acceleration Bas 4 96 S coag Arrival frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz sD during deceleration gt per egga 1D deviation 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 4 31 excessive level co45 Arrival frequency 4 99 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during acceleration 2 pee cog Arrival frequency 4 99 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz during deceleration 2 C052 PID FB upper limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No 1 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 45 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ie No Function name Monitor or data range Lana during Unit Page 9 operation Overtorque level C055 Forward power 200 No running Overtorque level C056 Reverse 200 No 9 regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW fies is Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW C057 Reverse power 200 No running 3 g Overtorque level 5 C058 Forward 200 No 3 regeneration 5 3 E goer thermal warming to 100 80 No 4 46 3 level E 00 Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit
365. ode Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO 0 0 0 0 Normal Normal Normal Normal E01 to E03 E01 to E03 0 0 0 1 E04 Overcurrent protection E04 Overcurrent protection Overload protection 0 0 1 0 E05 E38 Overload protection in a low E05 Overload protection speed range 0 0 1 P E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming overvoltage protection overvoltage protection 0 1 0 0 E09 Undervoltage protection E09 Undervoltage protection 0 1 0 1 E16 Momentary power interruption E16 Momentary power l protection interruption protection 0 1 1 0 E30 IGBT error E30 IGBT error 0 r 1 r E06 Braking resistor overload ae Giher enor protection 4 101 4 2 Function Mode Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor code Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO EEPROM error CPU error 1 0 0 0 Bae GA communication error Main E23 E25 circuit error 1 0 0 1 E10 CT error 1 0 r 0 E12 E13 External trip USP error S S E35 E36 Thermistor error Brake error 1 1 0 0 E14 Grounding protection 1 r 0 r E20 Abnormal temperature due to the cooling fin s speed drop 1 1 0 1 E21 Abnormal temperature 1 1 1 0 E24 Input phase loss protection r 1 r 1 E50 to E79 Network error Options 1 2 Errors 0 to 9 Output Signal Logic Operati
366. of the multi function input termi nals While the STAT terminal is tuned on pulse train position command input is accepted Position deviation can be cleared through external input Allocate 47 PCLR to any of the multi function input terminals Tuning on and then off the PCLR terminal can clear position deviation data Allocate 22 DSE to any of the multi function output terminals to enable excessive speed devia tion signal output Set a deviation level in speed deviation error detection level P027 When the deviation between real frequency and reference frequency exceeds the P027 set value the DSE signal turns on When 02 APR2 or 03 HAPR is selected in P012 the Inverter performs absolute position con trol with reference to the absolute position from its origin Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 ASR speed control mode V2 control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode P012 selecto 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position control mode P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 65599 1024 Pulse Number of encoder pulses P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 655 35 Position loop gain 0 50 rad s Speed deviation error 0 00 to 120 00 a detection level DSE signal output level T50 Hz H004 Motor pole number 5 4 6 8 10 Select the number of motor poles 4 Pole selection C001 to C008 47 PCLR position deviation clear 48 STAT
367. oil data is regarded as 0 and sent If the coil status reading command has not been performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 167 4 4 Communication Function lt Reading Holding Register Content 03h gt Reads consecutively the specified number of holding register contents from the specified holding register address Example Read past trip data from the Inverter with slave address 5 Below is the data on past three trips d081 Previous factor 0012h Overvoltage E07 d081 Previous Inverter status 0013h RX command Holding register No Trip factor high order During deceleration 02 Query Response 5 Example Example No Field name HEX No Field name HEX 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Register start number MSB 2 00 3 Number of data bytes 04 4 Register start number LSB 11 4 Register start number MSB 00 5 Number of holding registers MSB 00 5 Register start number LSB 07 6 Number of holding registers LSB 02 6 Register Stari number rl 00 MSB Register start number 1 7 CRC 16 MSB 95 7 LSB 02 8 CRC 16 LSB 8A 8 CRC 16 MSB 36 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 9 CRC 16 LSB 37 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 Transfers data by the number of data bytes In this example the Inverter sends response data on two holding registers
368. ommercial switching operation MC2 7D 4 85 4 2 Function Mode Timing example of switching from Inverter to commercial power K R w mw m Inverter output frequency Operationp Oooo OO Timing example of switching from commercial power to Inverter lt gt Interlock time of MC2 and MC3 ic 7 X05 to 1s a ow E L fon OFF Retry wait time b003 0 5to1s Operation Operates after frequency matching 4 86 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reset e This function resets an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 3 to 100 0 as Refer to Momentary Power Interruption b003 Retry wait time Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 1 0 S Time from reset to restart Frequency matching 0 00 to 400 00 b007 lower limit frequency Refer to Momentary Power Interruption 0 00 Hz setting Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 00 Trip reset at power on example 1 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset 01 Trip reset at power off example 2 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset C102 Reset selection 02 Trip reset at power on example 1 00 Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset 03 Trip reset only example 1 The Inverter does not initialize internal data at trip reset Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset Reset frequenc SUO T stari C103 matchi Eper A 01 Frequency
369. on e This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter All output signals are operation targets However the logic operation outputs LOG1 to LOG6 are not subject to operations Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection Relay output 33 LOG1 Logic operation output C142 C143 C144 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 C145 C146 C147 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 C148 C149 C150 36 LOG4 Logic operation output 4 C151 C152 C153 37 LOG5 oi a Logic operation output 5 C154 C155 C156 o2 38 LOG6 Logic operation output 6 C157 C158 C159 C142 C145 C148 Logic output signal ie E output a _ C151 C154 C157 selection 1 i Select operand 1 C143 C146 C149 Logic output signal Select 00 to 50 from the MUM uneton output C152 C155 C158 selection 2 data other than LOG1 to LOG6 00 Select operand 2 C144 C147 C150 Logic output signal H oar 00 C153 C156 C159 operator selection 02 XOR 4 102 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e You can select from three types of operators AND OR and XOR Output signal 1 l l Output signal 2 l l LOGx AND l LOGx OR l l LOGx XOR l l l l e The setting parameters vary depending on the logic operation output selected Refer to the following table to set the necessary par
370. on Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit EL S curve ratio 1 during A150 A acceleration 0 to 50 10 A151 EL S curve ratio 2 during acceleration A152 EL S curve ratio 1 during deceleration 7 0 to 50 10 A153 EL S curve ratio 2 during deceleration eTo select an acceleration or deceleration pattern use A097 or A098 respectively e You can set acceleration and deceleration patterns individually lf any item other than Line A097 A098 00 is selected for the acceleration deceleration pattern the acceleration deceleration time is prolonged when this function is used with analog input A001 01 Pattern Selection Select an acceleration deceleration pattern with reference to the following table Set values Parameter No 00 01 02 03 04 Line S shape U shape Inverted U shape EL S shape a a a 3 a o o o S a 5 5 g g g z g A097 iS a a a 5 5 Acceleration 3 5 3 B B fo fo fo 6 6 Time Time Time Time Time a a z z v oO 5 g g g aa S Deceleration S 2 2 8 O O 6 6 fo gt gt Time Time Time Time Time Description Accelerates Decelerates linearly before reaching the set output frequency value Helps prevent the collapse of cargo on the elevating machine or conveyor Helps with tension control and roll break prevention for a winding machine etc
371. on the number of rewrites approx 100 000 times the Inverter life may be shortened if enter commands are frequently used 4 4 Communication Function Register Number List R W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and or writing R Read only lt Coil Number List gt R W Read and write enabled Coil No Item R W Description 0000h Not used 0001h RUN command pw 1 Run 0 Stop Enabled when A002 03 c 3 1 Reverse 0002h Rotation direction command R W 0 Forward Enabled when A002 03 0003h External trip EXT R W 1 Trip 0004h Trip reset RS R W 1 Reset 0005h Not used 0006h Not used 0007h Multi function input terminal 1 R W 10M 0 OFF 0008h Multi function input terminal 2 R W TON 0 OFF 0009h Multi function input terminal 3 rnw E ON 4 0 OFF OO0Ah Multi function input terminal 4 R W EON p 0 OFF OOOBh Multi function input terminal 5 R W 1 ON 0 OFF 000Ch Multi function input terminal 6 rnw E ON 0 OFF 000Dh Multi function input terminal 7 R W ION p 0 OFF 1 OOOEh Multi function input terminal 8 R W ON p 0 OFF 1 Run oooFh Operatiomstatus R 0 Stop Interlocked with d003 1 Reverse 0010h Motation directon R 0 Forward Interlocked with d003 1 Ready 0011h Inverter ready R 0 Not ready 0012h Not used 0013h RUN during RUN r 1 Duri
372. on wait time 6124 during deceleration or the brake confirmation signal turns off although the brake release signal is output 4 77 4 2 Function Mode Overvoltage Protection Function During Deceleration e This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration eYou can set whether to enable or disable this function with overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration b130 If overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 01 enabled DC voltage constant control the Inverter automatically decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage rise due to deceleration start at the overvoltage protection function level setting b131 e If overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 02 enabled with acceleration the main circuit DC voltage increases because of deceleration start When the main circuit DC voltage exceeds the overvoltage protection function level setting b131 the Inverter starts acceleration according to the setting of overvoltage protection parameter b132 After that when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the b131 level the Inverter starts deceleration again Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Overvoltage protection 00 Disabled 01 Enabled DC voltage constant control b130 function selection 2 01 during deceleration example 1 g 02 Enabled with acceleration example 2
373. ontrol A052 set value Cc poi A052 ie injection braking 99 to 400 00 0 50 No Hz 424 B requency T Q aos PC injection braking 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 No s Q delay time hone DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No aos5 PC injection braking 0 to 60 0 0 5 No s dD time E DC injection braking 00 Edge operation k pose method selection 01 Level operation a Hp T Goh a 5 Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW gt amp A057 raking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW De Ne 4 oO eT A aosg Startup DC injection 9 4 to 60 0 0 0 No s braking time ran DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max frequency 0 00 3 2nd frequency 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max No Hz A261 he 0 00 2 upper limit frequency E 7 A062 Frequency lower limit aoe frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 4 28 3 7 No Hz 3 A262 ft frequency lower 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 S imit upper limit 5 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 28 uoie19do Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Is
374. onversion doog Actual frequency 400 00 to 400 00 z Hz 43 monitor doog TOrgue reference 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do10 Torque bias 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do12 Output torque 200 to 200 fe 43 monitor doig Output voltage 0 0 to 600 0 2z v 43 monitor d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 999 9 kW 4 4 dois Integrated power 9 4 to 999999 9 4 4 monitor d016 Total RUN time 0 to 999999 h 4 4 doi7 PowerON time 9 to 999999 ee fs h 4 4 monitor doig Fintemperature 459 to 200 0 e 44 monitor 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default erie N Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page o setting operation doig Motor temperature 959 to 200 0 ge aes monitor 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction i d022 Life C F do22 Life oe r ee 4 5 monitor LLI ZT l RE TESSE J d023 Program counter 0 to 1024 d024 Program number 0 to 9999 do25 Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UMO doze Drive programming 2147483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM1 do27_ Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM2 dozg ee counter 0 to 2147483647 4 5 monitor 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is doz9 Position command sel
375. ooling fan smoothing capacitor and relay 6 2 soueUus UIeWY pue uono dsu j Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Ambient temperature Check ambient 10 C to 50 C Thermomet Ambient temperature as o Refer to 2 1 no freezing er environment well as humidity Installation Ambient Hygrometer and dust levels humidity 90 Recorder max no condensation General Check that there Entire device 2e abnorma O bce or acoustic No faults vibrations or inspection sounds Power Check that the Measure the voltage Must be within Tester SEENA between Inverter allowable Buy supply main circuit O Aare digital voltage voltage is normal main circuit terminals fluctuation of multimeter R L1 S L2 and T L3 AC voltage Disconnect the I O wirings of the Inverter main circuit terminal block detach the control terminal block board and remove the short circuit bar Megger check used for switching the between main Inverter built in filter Main General a terminal O function Then use a 5 MQ min PONDE circuit megger and ground megger to measure terminal the resistance between the ground terminal and the short circuited parts of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P PD 1 N
376. or Connection 1 N N 32 max Use the Digital Operator to select a station No Error check Overrun Framing BCC Vertical Horizontal parity Overrun Framing CRC 16 Horizontal parity lt RS485 Port Specifications and Connections gt For the RS485 communication function use the TM2 terminal on the control terminal block board block board Tenine Description abbreviations SP Transmission Reception SN Transmission Reception ori terminal RP Termination resistor enabling terminal SN Termination resistor enabling terminal Control terminal The following wires are recommended for TM2 4 144 suoioun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Single wire Stranded wire Stranded wire with solderless terminal Wire strip length Tightening torque e Connection Connect the Inverters parallel to each other as shown below For the termination Inverter short circuit the RP and SN terminals Also if the RS485 communication function is used with a single Inverter the RP and SN terminals must be short circuited 0 14 to 1 5 mm If two equal sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 5 mm 0 14 to 1 0 mm If two equal sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 2 mm 0 25 to 0 5 mm 5mm 0 22 to 0 25 Nem screw size M2 Short circuiting the RP and SN terminals activates the termination resistor inside the control terminal block
377. or SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation MI1 Drive programming input 1 Ml2 Drive programming input 2 MI3 Drive programming input 3 MI4 MI5 Drive programming input 5 Drive programming input 4 MI6 Drive programming input 6 MI7 Drive programming input 7 MI8 Drive programming input 8 AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear PRG Drive prog
378. or This function allows you to monitor analog input based on the desired level e g to detect a disconnection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 selection C021 to C025 Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 f function selection 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog OIl disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 05 b060 O b063 Ol Window comparator O Ol O2 upper limit level b066 O2 Set an upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set an upper limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 b061 O b064 Ol Window comparator O OI O2 lower limit level b067 02 Set a lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 4 66 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b062 O Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower b065 Ol Window comparator i aaah range Otoid 0 o O OI O2 hysteresis
379. or d002 Displays the output current value of the Inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed Display 0 0 to 9999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 A Rotation Direction Monitor d003 Displays the RUN direction of the Inverter The RUN LED indicator lights up during forward reverse rotation Display FWD Forward STOP Stop REV Reverse PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 4 1 When Enabled 01 or Reverse output enabled 02 is selected in PID selection A071 the PID feedback value can be monitored Gain conversion is enabled with PID scale A075 d004 display PID feedback value x PID scale A075 A075 0 01 to 99 99 Can be set in increments of 0 01 Display 0 00 to 999000 00 Displays in increments of 0 01 4 1 Monitor Mode Multi function Input Monitor d005 e This monitor indicates the input status of the multi function input terminals e The item that the built in CPU recognizes to be significant is indicated as being ON This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example FW Multi function input terminals 7 2 1 ON Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL d005 Input H Multi function Output Monitor d006 e This monitor indicates the output status of the multi function output terminals e This monitor displays the output status of the built in CPU not the control circuit terminal status Example Multi function output term
380. or do13 OVtput voltage 0 0 to 600 0 PESE we v 43 monitor d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 999 9 kW 4 4 dots Power ON time 0 0 to 999999 9 4 4 monitor d016 Total RUN time 0 to 999999 h 4 4 doi7 PowerON time 9 to 999999 h 4 4 monitor App 1 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Chenga N Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page 0 setting operation doig Fin temperature 959 to 200 0 44 monitor org Motor temperature 020 to 200 0 45 monitor 41 Main circuit board capacitor service life M020 Life C F 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction do22 Life assessment peocs 4 5 monitor I LL I 7T RE 2 S 1 d023 Program counter 0 to 1024 d024 Program number 0 to 9999 do25 Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UMO doze Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM1 do27 Drive programming 2447483647 to 2147483647 monitor UM2 dogg Pe counter 0 to 2147483647 4 5 monitor 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is do29 Position command selected 4 6 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is selected 1073741823 to 1073741823 when HAPR is d030 Current position selected 4 6 monitor 268435456 to 268435456 when APR2 is 4 137 selected d031 Clock Se
381. or output 1440 Hz Rated current Yes A 4 109 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 24 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default oa 7 No Function name Monitor or data range AA during Unit Page 9 operation Multi function output C031 terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output C032 terminal 12 contact pe selection E D Multi function output C033 terminal 13 contact 00 Q 3 selection 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 No 4 96 S Multi function output 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 5 C034 terminal 14 contact 5 selection 5 Multi function output C035 terminal 15 contact selection Relay output AL2 C036 AL1 contact 01 selection Light load signal 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C038 aut ut ie constant speed 01 No P 01 Enabled only during constant speed 4 106 C039 Light load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Overload war i 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C040 sianal OUI bee constant speed 01 No 9 p 01 Enabled only during constant speed 5 0 0 Does not operate 4 49 s Overload warning 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated T C041 ievel 0 4 to 55 kW
382. or is connected to the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b098 Thermistor selection 00 Disabled 01 Enabled Positive temperature coefficient resistance element PTC 02 Enabled Negative temperature coefficient resistance element NTC 00 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 Set a temperature resistance value to trip the Inverter according to the specifications of your thermistor 3000 C085 Thermistor adjustment 0 0 to 1000 0 Used for gain adjustment Factory default Note If thermistor selection b098 is set to 01 without connecting an external thermistor the Inverter trips Connect an external thermistor between control terminals TH and CM1 Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor When this function is used keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak you must take measures to prevent noise due to motor current For example place the thermistor cable away from the motor cable 4 75 4 2 Function Mode Brake Control Function e This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of equipment including an elevating system When brake control selection b120 is set to 01 enabled the Inverter operates as follows 1 At RUN command input the Inverter starts output and accelerates
383. ory yaga o eS default T 2 Coss ermisio 0 00 to 1000 0 Facely yeg age adjustment default C091 Not used PEN 00 No de ee Do not change C101 UP DWN selection 00 Do not store the frequency data oo No 488 01 Store the frequency data 00 Trip reset at power on 01 Trip reset when the power is OFF 4 85 5 C102 Reset selection 02 Enabled only during trip Reset when the 00 Yes 4 132 5 power is ON 03 Trip reset only Reset frequenc 00 0 Fiz stari C103 matehin re 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 85 9 02 Active Frequency Matching restart C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 108 C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes wn C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes jes oO es C109 AM bias setting 0 to 100 0 Yes C110 AMI bias setting 0 to 100 20 Yes Overload warning 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated i CT level 2 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current No a 443 He C121 O zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default D z C122 Olzero adjustment 0 to 65535 pano Yes 5 default C123 O2 zero adjustment 0 to 65535 Factory Yes default 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 47 3 9 Parameter List
384. otate 00 02 Enabled Motor rotates 00 Standard motor parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter H002 H202 Motor parameter selection A 00 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning enabled H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 00 Factory default kW H004 H204 Motet pole number saeig 4 Pole selection Motor parameter R1 Depends on the F030 4230 auto tuning data 0 00 10 63 983 motor capacity a H031 H231 Motor parameter R2 0 001 to 65 535 Depends on the Q auto tuning data motor capacity 4 111 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H032 H232 Motor parameter L 0 01 to 655 35 Depends onthe nH auto tuning data motor capacity H033 H233 Motor parameter lo 0 01 to 655 35 Depends on the A auto tuning data motor capacity H034 H234 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 Depends onthe kgm auto tuning data motor capacity A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency 50 Hz DC injection braking 00 Disabled AOSI selection 01 Enabled Of _ 200 215 220 230 240 Selectable for 200 V class A082 AVR voltage selection 380 400 415 440 460 480 200 400 Selectable for 400 V class eNote the following before use Set base frequency A003 and AVR voltage selection A082 according to the specifications of the motor to be measured The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applica
385. otor increase the HO06 H206 H306 set value gradually To run a motor with a capacity larger than the Inverter s rated capacity reduce the set value Other than this function the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting Lower the carrier frequency b083 Refer to page 4 68 Lower the output voltage gain A045 Refer to page 4 24 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H006 H206 H306 Stabilization parameter 0 0 255 100 If hunting occurs adjust the set value l 20 to 100 3 A049 Output voltage gain If hunting occurs reduce the set value 100 0 5 to 15 0 noes Garleritesuency If hunting occurs reduce the set value a ae Dual Rating Selection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting b049 Dual rating selection 01 Variable torque 00 Constant torque 00 Auto Return Initial Display Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Prue eT 00 OFF b164 Auto return initial display 01 ON 00 Data Read Write Selection Data Default setting Parameter No Function name b166 Data read write selection 00 Read Write OK 01 Read Write protected 00 4 120 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Initialize Trigger Parameter No Function name Data Default setting 00 No action b180 Initialize trigger 01 Initialize 00 Option I F cmd
386. ower limit frequency setting b007 the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz when the Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than this setting during frequency matching start e The setting of this function is applied to the FRS terminal and also to the status when the Inverter is reset from free running 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 0 Hz start FW FRS Free running 0 Hz start Motor rpm e The Inverter starts running at 0 Hz regardless of the motor rpm The retry wait time is ignored at 0 Hz start e If the Inverter starts running at 0 Hz with the motor rpm high an overcurrent trip may occur Example 3 Active Frequency Matching restart Output current Inverter output frequency Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm b003 lt Decelerates according to t Frequency selectec Example 2 Frequency matching start FW FRS Free running Motor WHIT rpm 0 2003 lt 11 gt Frequency matching start e When the FRS terminal is turned off and the retry wait time elapses the motor frequency is matched and a Active Frequency Matching starts without stopping the motor If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start extend the retry wait time e Even if frequency matching start is selected the Inverter may start at 0 Hz when e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e The Inverter detec
387. oximately 220 Is there any error on CT of the Inverter rated Replace or repair the CT output current and a trip occurs Is the load too large Reduce the loading factor Is the thermal level correct Monitors the Inverter output current Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate and shuts off the output displaying level Overload an error if the built in electronic Note The electronic thermal function is set to trip thermal function detects overload E05 0 work easily at 5 Hz or lower If a large 4 46 4 against the motor load inertial moment is applied the Trips depending on the electronic overload protect function works when thermal function settings the motor starts accelerating and the load prevents it from accelerating In this case increase the torque boost or take other measures for adjustment Is there any rapid deceleration Increase the deceleration time Braking Shuts off the output and displays an pode seas cycle A resistor error if the usage rate of E ea ine number 9 asd cyc es 4 8 overload regenerative braking circuit exceeds 06 0 a asain ale seiting or Me egeneralve 4 74 braking function low trip the b090 set value Set to an appropriate level Note Pay attention to the allowable power of the resistor ol i 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Points to check and remedy pi Extremely high DC voltage between P and N
388. pacitor or cooling fan but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor an alarm can be output through the self diagnostic function Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period For details refer to Life Assessment Monitor d022 page 4 5 Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC page 4 94 or Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection page 4 96 This alarm is output through the self diagnosis based on the expected design life not a guaranteed value Therefore it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions Index Index Numerics 0 Hz sensorless vector control n 4 115 2 step acceleration deceleration ccceeeeee 4 37 3 wire input FUNCTION ooo eee ee eee eee eee eteeeeee 4 86 A acceleration Stop e cece eee ee eenee tee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaes acceleration time 2 eeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees acceleration deceleration pattern acceleration deceleration time analog command hold function 4 91 automatic energy saving operation function 4 36 automatic optimum acceleration deceleration 4 36 automatic torque DOOSt cceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 21 B c capacitor life Warning sseseesseseseeeereseerneresreernene 4 101 Carrier frequency sessesessersereerrrrrrrrrnsresrerresresreeesee 4 65 CA Seese a tenet eGov eee 4 87 commercial switching essesssseessererresrer
389. peed homing frequency selection P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator P071 High speed homing frequency setting 4 60 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Function code Function name P021 ae gear ratio denominator P072 Position range forward P022 Feed forward gain setting P073 Position range reverse P023 Position loop gain setting P074 Teaching selection eIn the Normal Duty VT there is an item limited in the parameter of the operator by the setting range Function code Function name A044 A244 1st 2nd V f characteristic curve A054 DC braking force during deceleration A057 DC braking force at start A059 Carrier frequency during DC braking A085 Operation mode selection b022 Overload restriction level b025 Overload restriction level 2 b028 Current level of active freq matching b040 Torque limit 1 fwd power b041 Torque limit 2 rev regen b042 Torque limit 3 rev power b043 Torque limit 4 fwd regen b083 Carrier frequency C030 Digital current monitor reference value C039 Low current detection level C041 Overload warning level C055 Over torque level Forward powering mode C056 Over torque level Reverse regen mode C057 Over torque level Reverse powering mode C058 Over torque level Forward regen mode C111 Overload warning level 2 eIn the Normal Du
390. peration if frequency reference selection A001 is set to the terminal 01 and the external analog input O O2 Ol setting mode based on a combination of O OI selection A005 O2 selection A006 and the AT terminal is set to reversible the RUN command is inverted when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero 4 16 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Binary Operation e By allocating 02 to 05 CF1 to CF4 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 15 Use A021 to A035 multi step speeds 1 to 15 to set frequencies for speeds 1 to 15 When the Digital Operator is selected as the frequency reference speed 0 is set with A020 A220 A320 or F001 refer to page 4 8 When the control circuit terminal block is selected speed 0 is set with terminals O O2 and Ol Multi step speeds CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 11th Frequency from oth OFF OFF the Digital Operator 1st ON or the external OFF analog input terminal 2nd OFF ON 3rd ON OFF 4th OFF OFF _ 1st 5th ON ON il on L ce SULLA ON Gees tale et L CF2 l 8th OFF OF ar a i 9th ON CF3 OFF 10th on OFF CF4 J l 11th ON ON lt j 12th OFF pay OFF 13th ON ON 14th OFF ON 15th ON e For multi step speed binary operation you can set the wait time until whi
391. peration Function e The motor rotates while this function is turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Hz 00 Free run stop Disabled in operation 01 Deceleration stop Disabled in operation 02 DC injection braking stop Disabled in operation m 03 Free run stop Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking stop Enabled in operation A039 Jogging stop selection When jogging stop selection A039 is set to 02 or 05 the DC injection braking settings are required Refer to page 4 24 e Allocate 06 JG to the desired multi function input BJogging Frequency JG w tl Output frequency i i we tJ ___ e Setting a high jogging frequency causes the Inverter to easily trip Adjust the set value of jogging frequency A038 to prevent the Inverter from tripping 4 18 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Jogging Stop Selection Note To perform the jogging operation turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal Do the same if the RUN command source is set to the Digital Operator Example 1 pal l FW D E SS out NN frequency Example 2 Se b Fw Deceleration Normal 7 i operation Jogging operation O gt Output frequency Free running Accelerates according to the b088 setting W
392. play screen the PRG LED indicator is lit 4 141 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 8G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 The current position is set to the area corresponding to the position command source set in teaching selection P074 However the P074 setting is not stored After the power is shut off or after reset this parameter is indicated as 00 x00 P074 set values Position commands to be set 00 P060 Multi step position command 0 01 P061 Multi step position command 1 02 P062 Multi step position command 2 03 P063 Multi step position command 3 04 P064 Multi step position command 4 05 P065 Multi step position command 5 06 P066 Multi step position command 6 07 P067 Multi step position command 7 Servo ON Function This function brings the Inverter into speed servo lock status via an input terminal when 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 Allocate 54 SON to the desired multi function input The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the SON terminal is turned on when SON is allocated If the SON terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter goes into free run status When the SON terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free run stop se lection b088 This function cannot be simultaneously used with the preliminary excitation function 55 FOC If FOC and SON are both allocated to multi func
393. position command 1 P061 02 Multi step position command 2 P062 4 131 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 ROE Meagning selection 04 Multi step position command 4 P064 00 mee 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 P109 Drive programmin io user E 3 0 to 65535 0 P131 p P160to Option I F cmd W P169 register 1 to 10 0090 toT 999g P170to Option I F cmd R P179 register 1 to 10 Some as 0009 P180 Profibus node 0 to 125 0 address 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 56 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter s Default Granges N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation P181 Profibus clear mode 2 Cigar 00 01 Last value f 00 PPO P182 R ER 01 Conventional 00 02 Flexible mode CompoNet Node P190 address 0 to 63 0 P192 DeviceNet Node 00 63 0 address 00 32 bytes P195 ML2 frame length 01 17 bytes 00 P196 ML2 node address 21 to 3E21 U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P196 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P196 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P196 no U004 User 4 selection no d001 to P196 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P196 no oO E U006 User 6 selection no d001 to
394. put AL2 AL1 05 function selection C026 4 106 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reverse Run Signal e This signal is output while the Inverter is running in reverse While the Inverter is running forward or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 52 RVR reverse run signal 05 Output frequency KHz Signal during forward operation Signal during reverse operation Fatal Fault Signal L es a ey Le ea Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 53 MJA fatal fault signal 05 In addition to an alarm this signal is output if any of the following trips occurs These trips are caused by hardware No Error code Description 1 E10 CT error 2 E11 CPU error 3 E14 Grounding protection 4 E20 Abnormal temperature due to cooling fan stop 5 E23 Gate array communications error 6 E25 Main circuit error 4 107 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal ON Delay OFF Delay e You can set ON OFF delay times for each output terminal
395. quency reference To use this command set A001 to 03 RS485 e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 9i igoa ang FF Communication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 01 Data Transmission data Decimal ASCII 6 bytes code Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D To set 5 Hz for station 01 STX 01 01 000500 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D gt 4 148 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 149 Note 1 Data is a value obtained by mulplying the set value by 100 Example 5 Hz 500 000500 ASCII conversion 30 30 30 35 30 30 Note 2 To use the data as PID control feedback data set 1 in the MSB of the data Example 5 500 100500 ASCII conversion 31 30 30 35 30 30 e Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 160 Error response Refer to page 4 160 lt Command 02 gt Sets multi function input terminal status e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Star
396. r including terminals P N and between h the resistor U T1 V T2 W T3 and i Start Stop P N in the range 6 3 Cycle 10 of tester x 1Q Check that there is o Capacity no liquid leakage No faults meter Smoothing Check that the f Reference of capacitor safety valve has Visual inspection the replacement not come out and O period 10 years that there are no ae bulges Check that there is no abnormal O Acoustic inspection No faults sound during Relay operation Check that there is no rough surface O Visual inspection No faults on the contact 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 4 soueUs UIeWY pue uons dsul Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check the balance Measure the voltage Phase topnase voltage balance of output voltage between Inverter 200 V class levels between
397. r L key for moving between the Day Month Year Hour etc data When the cursor is over the selected data pressing A or key to change the value The change will be stored after pressing the key Format 3 DD The settings available in this mode are Language l OPTION MODE Date and Time Read Lock 2 Date and Time INV Type Select R W Storage Mode Backlight Auto off Backlight Flicker Operator Reset Check Mode OOANDAARWDND gt Use A or for moving between the Option Mode Menu 3 7 3 4 Operation 3 Details of Option Mode 4 Read lock Disable 5 R W Storage Mode Quad 6 Backlight Auto Off Off 7 Backlight Flicker Enable After this date and time setting is required 01 English 02 German 03 French 04 Spanish Language Setting language OS alian 01 06 Portuguese 07 Japanese 08 Chinese 09 Turkish 10 Russian i DA Date 2000 1 1 2099 12 31 2009 01 01 Date and Time Setting Date and Time for the LCD digital Time 00 00 23 59 00 00 operator Format 1 3 1 Set Read lock enable to disable in order 01 Enable Read Lock to protect the parameter saved in LCD 2 Disabl 02 digital operator from being overwritten 02 Disable Please select the correct INV type using INV Type Select LCD digital operator otherwise COM Ae i LX RX 01 ERROR will be d
398. r is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 5 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting LCD Digital Operator Error Message Resetting Display Cause Check item Action ead Avoid issuing the RESET Reset the inverter signal continuously for AiG signal iereceived Han Check inverter type more than 5 sec COM ERROR Sig ae Check the connector for Change the correct the inverter within 4 sec 3 loseness disconnection inverter type Check the cable for break Replace the cable and the connector Check ifthe WRITE key iS The WRITE key should be The WRITE key is pressed pressed while the inverter A i pressed only while the INV in RUN while the inverter is is running inverter stops Press mode running Check if the WRITE key is Release E Soft Lock of STOP Soft lock is turned ON pressed while soft lock is RESET the inverter ON key INV in TRIP WRITE key is pressed Check if the inverter trips Reset the inverter from mode while inverter trips trip status An attempt was made ht r INV Type writing parameters h d apata a Un match between different inverter i yP inverters type Read lock In case of display READ _ enabled LOCK Release the Read Lock EEPROM of LCD digital If the same error appears Data Check Sum operator is overloaded It a after the power is supplied Error reaches the EEPROM s several times the operator Write Limitat
399. rain position control is dis abled The absolute position control mode disables the orientation function However the ORT terminal is used for teaching as described later Multi step Position Switching Function CP1 CP2 CP3 By allocating 66 to 68 CP1 to CP3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select multi step positions 0 to 7 Set position commands in multi step position commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 If no position command is allocated to the terminals multi step position command 0 P060 is de fined as the position command Position command CP3 CP2 CP1 Multi step position 0 0 0 0 Multi step position 1 0 0 1 Multi step position 2 0 1 0 Multi step position 3 0 1 1 Multi step position 4 1 0 0 Multi step position 5 1 0 1 Multi step position 6 1 1 0 Multi step position 7 1 1 1 When you input a multi step position command you can set the wait time until the terminal input is determined This prevents the transition status from being applied before it is determined 4 138 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used You can adjust the determination time in multi step speed position determination time C169 If no input is made during the time set in C169 the data is determined after the set time elapses Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination With determ
400. rake confirmation wait time after Has the brake confirmation signal been the Inverter outputs the brake input release signal Wiring check Shuts off the hardware output and Did any error occur in the external Emergen i cy anutor displays an error when the EMR E37 0 devices when the emergency shutoff 2 10 H terminal S3 is turned on with SW1 function was selected on the logic board ON Correct the external device error If an overload is detected in the lowest speed range of 0 2 Hz max Overload saree trip in low an electronic therma trip inside the Is the load too large Reduce the loading Inverter works to shut off the Inverter E38 0 i speed factor tande output 2nd electronic thermal 9 However a higher frequency could remain in the error history ModBus eee pes eal e Is the communication speed correct communic 9 E41 0 Is the wiring distance appropriate 4 146 ations error Modbus RTU communication Trip by the C076 setting Connection check 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 4 suoeiado sdueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Name Description Error Code Check point and remedy eres Option 1 Detects an error on the board has ial Poara D
401. raking 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 No s Q delay time hone DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No aos5 PC injection braking 0 to 60 0 0 5 No s dD time E DC injection braking 00 Edge operation k pose method selection 01 Level operation a Hp T Goh a 5 Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW gt amp A057 raking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW De Ne 4 oO eT A aosg Startup DC injection 9 4 to 60 0 0 0 No s braking time ran DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max frequency 0 00 3 2nd frequency 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max No Hz A261 he 0 00 2 upper limit frequency E 7 A062 Frequency lower limit aoe frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 4 28 3 7 No Hz 3 A262 2nd frequency lower 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 2 limit upper limit 5 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 8 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Is Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation A063 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Jump frequency A
402. ram start NO no allocation 011 12 18 02 03 06 08 no No 4 77 1 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 41 3 9 Parameter List Parameter 5 Default ie Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation Cott Multi function input 1 00 operation selection C012 Multi function input 2 00 operation selection Multi function input 3 cots operation selection 00 Cc E C014 Multi function input 4 00 2 operation selection Q j H i n co15 Multi function input 5 00 NO 00 No 4 79 operation selection 01 NC g C016 Multi function input 6 00 2 operation selection 5 7 ae coi7 Multi function input 7 00 operation selection C018 Multi function input 8 00 operation selection C019 FW terminal m operation selection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 42 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Mon
403. ration deceleration time during both actions You can set up to three points for the jump frequency Output frequency TA AO ey AENA A065 A063 Acceleration Stop Function Frequency reference eWhen the moment of inertia of a machine load is large this function delays acceleration until the motor starting slip is reduced Use this function if an overcurrent trip occurs during startup e Does not depend on acceleration pattern selection A097 and works with all acceleration patterns Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A069 Acceleration stop frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 Hz A070 Acceleration stop time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 s Output frequency A069 Frequency reference 4 30 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode PID Function e This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate air volume and pressure Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 s A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 s A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Time 00 OI L 4 to 20 mA 01 O L 0 to 10 V A076 PID feedback selection 02 RS485 communication 00 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 Deviation Target value Feedback value A077 Reverse PID function 0
404. ration where the control volume increases linearly according to time Target value Control volume D Operation Operation where the control volume is proportional to the variation ratio of the target value Target value Control volume PI operation is the combination of the above P and operations PD is P and D operations PID is P and D operations Feedback Selection e Select a terminal used for feedback signals in PID feedback selection A076 e The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference selection A001 other than that in A076 When A001 is set to 01 terminal the setting of O OI selection A005 is disabled When analog input is selected for PID feedback and A001 is set to 01 terminal the PID target value is selected depending on the A006 set value as shown in the following table PID target value PID feedback selection A076 A006 00 A006 01 A006 02 A006 03 00 OI L O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 01 O L Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol Ol included in operands O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 10 O included in operands Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol operation result oland O are me O2 Reversible operands e To select R8485 for PID feedback transfer data as described below 4 32 suoioun Functions 4 2 Function Mode lt ASCII C078 00
405. rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd acceleration time deceleration time base frequency maximum frequency multi step speed reference 0 torque boost selection manual torque boost voltage manual torque boost frequency V f characteristics selection automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain automatic torque boost slip compensation gain frequency upper limit frequency lower limit acceleration time 2 deceleration time 2 2 step acceleration deceleration selection 2 step acceleration frequency 2 step deceleration frequency electronic thermal level electronic thermal characteristics selection motor parameter selection motor capacity selection motor pole number selection speed response stabilization parameter motor parameter R1 motor parameter R2 motor parameter L motor parameter 10 motor parameter J motor parameter R1 auto tuning motor parameter R2 auto tuning motor parameter L auto tuning motor parameter 10 auto tuning motor parameter J auto tuning PI proportional gain PI integral gain P proportional gain Limit at 0 Hz Parameters changeable during
406. reduencevadditi n 00 Add A145 value to output frequency 4 41 A146 ISAJ OnEy 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 No direction i requency ISO ee uE rmo T lgi Eg 10 No T during acceleration x A g Sh NE aeure aiea ig i50 10 No D during acceleration A 4 39 5 EL S curve ratio 1 Q o T A192 during deceleration 01050 19 No 6 D x y 2 Asa Wee ete A oto 10 No lt x during deceleration 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 11 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ie N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page o setting operation 00 Alarm 01 0 Hz start 5 i S b001 Retry selection De Frequency matching start o No p 03 Trip after frequency matching mi deceleration stop 4 42 04 Active Frequency Matching restart S Allowable momentary 2 b002 power interruption 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 No s 5 time b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 87 5 Momentary power 00 Disabled gt b004 interruption 01 Enabled 00 No S g undervoltage trip 02 Disabled during stop and deceleration 2 during stop selection stop 4 42 O s Momentary power b005 interruption retry time oo 16 umes 00 No 01 No limit selection Input phase loss 00 Disabled 9006 protection selection 01 Enabled oi Ne _ oe 5 Frequenc
407. ree setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 A current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 C061 Thermal warning level 0 to 100 80 Related functions C021 to C025 C026 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 1 Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value When the value reaches 100 an overload trip E05 occurs 4 46 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Electronic Thermal Level Motor Protection Level Example 3G3RX A2150 Rated current 64 A Setting range 12 8 A 20 to 64 0 A 100 e The graph on the right shows the time limit characteristics with the electronic thermal level b012 set to 64 A Trip time s 0 69 8 96 128 Motor current A 109 150 200 Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter Electronic Thermal Characteristics e The frequency characteristics are integrated with the above b012 b212 b312 set values A general purpose motor requires reduced load current because the lower the output frequency is the lower the cooling capability of its self cooling fan The reduced torque characteristics are designed to fit the heat radiation of a general purpose motor Reduced Torque Characteristics Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012 b212 b312 for each frequency
408. rent flows through the thermistor the thermistor connection cable must be separated from the main circuit cable power cable The thermistor connection cable should be 20 m or less PLC QOOOOCOOOOC K K DOOOCKK e To use a relay for the multi function output terminal connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the coil e Do not short circuit the analog power supply terminals between H and L and or the interface power supply terminals between P24 and CM1 Doing so may result in failure of the Inverter Arrangement of the Control Circuit Terminal Block H 02 AM FM TH FW 8 CM1 5 3 1 14 13 11 AL1 L O Ol AMI P24 PLC CM1 7 6 4 2 15 CM2 12 ALO AL2 Terminal screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 7 N m 0 8 max E Selecting the Input Control Logic By factory default the terminal FW and the multi function input terminal are set to source logic PNP To change the input control logic to sink logic PNP remove the short circuit bar between the terminals PLC and CM1 on the control circuit terminal block and connect it between the terminals P24 and PLC 2 21 2 2 Wiring E Selecting the Sequence Input Method Sink Source Logic When the Inverter s internal interface power supply is used When external power supply is used Remove the short circuit bar from the control terminal block
409. requency setting monitor User parameter 00 Disabled factory default automatic setting b039 function selection 01 Enabled 3 18 uoiei9do Operation 3 8 Parameter Transition 3 8 Parameter Transition Operation Example for Complete Display Default b037 00 Displays all parameters fon p aSsSSaSs2 5 i A001 Frequency source _ C fE rerminal L y r aa e SET ion Sarre omana 1 me IOLL b001 b180 C001 C169 H001 H073 FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL P001 P196 U001 012 FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL F001 F004 3 8 Parameter Transition E User Functions The extended function mode U is the parameter to optionally register or automatically record other extended function codes and differs in operation from other extended function modes FUNCTION M1 STOP ALL U001 A Moo LLL i Fuser function 1 y z ieee e onl cone ea U012 es tes senna ses EN J Tao nol A001 Extended function mode A lt L A153 b001 Extended function mode B lt b180 C001 Extended function mode C lt LC169 H001 Extended function mode H lt L H073 P001
410. resis width for the upper and lower Window comparator aiit levels LY b065 npa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes D Ol hysteresis width re ta Pag om Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit O level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 pegs O2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 100 xe width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 i z 0067 O2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 190 mes width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limitievels b068 par Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes O2 hysteresis width at ee anes Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Analog operation 4 63 b070 level at O 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b071 level at Ol 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b072 level at O2 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 37 3 9 Parameter List Parameter 9 Default ae N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation b078 Integrated power Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes E clear 01 4 4 bo7
411. rmal sound from the motor Make sure that the output current output current monitor d002 is not excessive 3 16 uoiei9do 3 7 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Operation LCD display REMOTE LED ENABLED LED Part Names and Descriptions RUN LED POWER LED OMRON HITA HI WARNING LED ALARM LED e o POWER RUN WARNING ALARM KEY ENABLED OPERATION KEY Name Function PORER POWER LED indicator Light on when the power is supplied to the LCD digital operator RIN RUN LED indicator Light on when the Inverter is runing O WARNING LED Light on when set value is incorrect WARNING x indicator rer ALARM LED indicator Light on when the Inverter trips O Remote LED Light on when the REMOTE key makes the compulsion operation function effective It doesn t light when the compulsion operation function is effective by input terminal OPE Press the key more than 2 seconds O Key Enabled LED Light on only when operation command is set in LCD digital operator LCD Display Displays relevant data such as frequency reference output current and set values LOCAL REMOTE key It changes from Local to Remote mode Press the key during 2 seconds to change from Local to Remote or Remote to Local When it is in Local the OPE led will be ON Use Local to control the motor with LCD digital oper
412. rminals are turned off e Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system e After checking the above turn on the power y Display Status Check Make sure that there are no faults in the Inverter e When the power is turned on normally the display shows e RUN LED indicator OFF ALARM LED indicator OFF e POWER LED indicator ON e Data display Displays the set value in d001 e If an error occurs the error code is displayed on the data display In this case refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations and make the necessary changes to remedy Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters e Set parameter No b084 to 2 and set parameter No b180 to 1 Parameter Settings Set the parameters required for a test run y e Set the motor capacity selection H003 and the motor pole number selection H004 No load Operation Start the no load motor via the Digital Operator Y e Display parameter No F001 set the output frequency using the key A key and the key and press the key to confirm the change Then press the key to rotate the motor Actual Load Operation Connect the mechanical system and operate via the Digital Operator l e If there are no difficulties with the no load operation connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate via
413. rned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned off 6 The Inverter runs forward at the low speed zero return frequency 7 The Inverter performs positioning at the first Z pulse position after the ORL signal is turned on 4 140 suoioun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Forward Reverse Run Stop Function FOT ROT With a signal from the control range limit switch this function prevents the Inverter from running out side the specified operation range The torque limit is set to 10 on the forward side when the FOT terminal is turned on and on the reverse side when the ROT terminal is turned on This function can be used as the limit switch at the machine end To do so allocate 71 FOT and 72 ROT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Position Range Setting Function Set a forward reverse position control range in position range setting forward P072 and position range setting reverse P073 If the current position counter exceeds the setting range a position control range trip E63 or E73 occurs and the Inverter goes into free run status The upper limit setting of multi step position commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 is limited by this con trol range setting You cannot set a position command beyond the position range Teaching Function This func
414. rogramming Selection 0 Disabling 1 PRG Terminal 2 Always 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 25 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Desau gies Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting 4 operation Multi step speed 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals i A019 selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals Ro bi Ci aozo Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 2nd multi step TS A220 speed tatersneed 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz 4 16 A320 Stemi tssteh Speed 0 0 Starting frequency to 3rd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A021 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 1 A022 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 2 A023 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 3 A024 Multi step speed 0 00 5 reference 4 5 z S ao25 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 5 5 3 A026 Multi step speed 0 00 Q reference 6 Q a 2 A027 Multi step speed 0 00 E reference 7 S j ao2g Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 16 reference 8 A029 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 9 A030 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 10 A031 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 11 A032 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 12
415. rom C001 to C008 App 10 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default as No Function name Monitor or data range eetin during Unit Page i 9 operation A101 Ol start frequency 0 00 No Hz 2 0 00 to 400 00 A102 Ol end frequency 0 00 No Hz T A103 Ol start ratio 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No 4 14 a A104 Ol end ratio Ol start ratio to 100 100 No B A105 Olstartselection 97 82 0 start frequency A101 00 No A111 O2 start frequency monea 0 00 No Hz 2 00 to wy A112 O02 end frequency 0 00 No Hz 3 A113 O2 start ratio 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No 5 4 15 oO A114 02 end ratio O2 start ratio to 100 100 No EA ui p A131 Acceleration curve 02 No _ D parameter Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 3 A A132 Deceleration curve 02 No S lt parameter 00 Digital Operator F001 A141 Operation frequency 01 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 02 No a input A setting Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 Input O 03 Input Ol o tion f 04 RS485 communication S a142 l peration requency 05 Option 1 03 No ar 4 41 a input B setting 06 Option 2 D 07 Pulse train frequency 5 00 Addition A B w A143 Operator selection 01 Subtraction A B 00 No a 02 Multiplication A x B Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 G00 eee PR F
416. ron voltmeter All 200 V class 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz voltage 5 mi effective 490 V class 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Ein 9 Er Es Er PE Rectifier voltmeter values Owe All When the input current is not supply Current R S T ea Moving iron ammeter effective balanced current IR Is IT IIN values lin IR Is I1 3 eae Peiween R S S Trand Electrodynamic Al eaves T R aa effective Three wattmeter method p Wit Wie Wis values WIN Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage Input Ein power supply current lin and input electric power Win power factor Pfin ___ Win 9 Pfin J3 EN IN 100 Effective a a Between U V V W W U yy sapte ae below value of Eout Ev Ev Ew Rectifier voltmeter aE Output Current U V W TENG es current gt Moving iron ammeter effective lu Iv Iw lout values Output Between U V V W Electrodynamic Al Two wattmeter method power effective Wo1 Wo2 wattmeter or three wattmeter method Wout values Output Calculated from the measured values of output voltage Eour power output current lout and output power Wout factor WouT 5 Pfout PfouUT Je Eou sour x 100 6 9 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 For output voltage use a measurement device that displays effective values of fundamental wave For current and electric power use a Power supply measurement device that displays all
417. ror 2 1 Error 004Dh Parity error R 0 No error 2 004Eh Checksum error R 1 Error 0 No error 2 004Fh Not used WCO 1 ON oge0n window comparator O R 0 OFF WCOI 1 ON 0050h window comparator Ol R 0 OFF WCO2 1 ON ogeen window comparator O2 i 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 177 4 4 Communication Function lt Holding Register Number List Frequency Reference and Trip Monitor gt Register Function N Function name R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution O code 0001h hon RW Output frequency setting monitor Bae 20000 a io ate eae ee F001 Enabled when A001 03 Hz 0002h LOW R W 0 Initial status 1 2 Stop 3 RUN 0003h Inverter status A R 4 Freerun Stop 5 Jogging 6 DC injection braking 7 Retry 8 Trip 9 During UV 0 During stop 0004h Inverter status B R 1 During RUN 2 During trip 0 1 Stop 2 Deceleration 3
418. ror 04H Overrun error 05H Protocol error 06H ASCII code error 07H Receiving buffer overrun error 08H Receiving timeout error 11H Command invalid error 12H 13H Execution disabled error 14H 15H 16H Parameter invalid error 17H During communication with all stations the Inverter sends no response 4 4 Communication Function MBCC Block Check Code Calculation Method Example To set 5 Hz using command 01 frequency reference setting When the target station No is 01 Transmission Frame Structure STX Station No Command ASCII code gt 0x 02 gt 01 Ox 30 31 gt 01 Ox 30 31 gt 000500 0x 303030 35 30 30 gt 05 Ox 30 35 gt 0x 00 To determine BCC the Inverter performs ASCII conversion from the station No to data and calcu lates a result of the exclusive OR Xor per byte For the above transmission frame BCC is calculated as follows 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 _Xor_ Fx s Xor 00 Xor 30 Xor o Xor a Xor 05 Xor Xor 05 sais This value is BCC Appendix ASCII Code Conversion Table Text data ASCII code Text data ASCII code STX 2 A 41 ACK 6 B 42 CR oD C 43 NAK 15 D 44 0 30 E 45 1 31 F 46 2 32 H 48 3 33 P 50 4 34 b 62 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 9 39 4 162 suoioun Functions 4
419. rsrnsrsereerrene 4 83 communication fUNCTION 0 cee eee errereen 4 139 constant torque characteristics VC ee 4 22 control circuit terminal eee eee eee reece etree 2 7 control gain switching Control methods o aitt Cooling fan control sessessessesseieererieernernsrrernsrnsrnereee cooling fan speed drop signal ee 4 102 current position MONItOF eee eee eee teeter terete 4 5 Index 1 D SS 2 0 0 N NSE Eee SSS ae data comparison display 0 eee 4 53 4 55 DC injection braking eee eee eee eee eeeeteaes 4 24 DC voltage Monitor eee eee eee eee eee teeta 4 6 deceleration time 2 oo ee eee ee eee eee eeeee terete 4 37 electronic GOAL miiie nisgilini 4 125 electronic thermal Monitor eee eee eee eee 4 7 EMG icons tasea Mek on eas 2 15 2 16 2 17 emergency Shutoff eee eee eee ees 2 9 2 10 end frequency end TatiOw innn ainn Miter aie OXCOSS SPCC nrinn eh ac gia EXT a shasiee heath cA es ee extended function MOE ee cece eee eeeeceeeeenetees 3 14 external analog input eee eee ceeeeeeeees 4 12 external DC injection braking 0 eee 4 25 external thermistor cee este eee eeeeeteeeeneeeees 4 73 external trip EXT c cdeeeestesieaee cee edenesteel eevee 4 82 F gt gt E _i i _ _ i Ss F R sian Mae Ain AeAL ae ae 4 86 fatal fault signal ee eee ee eee eeeeeteeeeeeee
420. rt 1309h Trip retry selection b008 R W 3 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 4 Active Frequency Matching restart 130Ah Undervoltage retry time b009 R W 16 times selection 1 No limit 130Bh Overvoltage overcurrent b010 RW 11103 feo retry time selection 130Ch Trip retry wait time b011 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 s 130Dh Electronic thermal level b012 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 Electronic thermal 0 Reduction characteristics 130Eh ae b013 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection 2 Free setting 130Fh Not used 1310h Free setting electronic b015 R W 0 to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 1 sith ee setting electronic b016 R W Oto Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 1 4312h Fee setting electronic b017 R W 0to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 2 1313h Free setting electronic b018 R W Oto Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 2 4314h Tee setting electronic b019 R W 0to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 3 1315h Free setting electronic b020 R W Oto Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 3 4 191 4 4 Communication Function Regji Function name Puede R W Monitor and setting parameters Re olur No code tion 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during acceleration constant speed 1316h Overload limit selection b021 R W 2 Enabled during constant speed 3 Enabled during acceleration constant speed acce
421. rter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring 2 1 2 1 Installation Safety Information Winstallation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places eLocations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration HTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sur
422. rts inside the Inverter Checking the Inverter and Converter e The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester Preparation Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires R L1 S L2 T L3 the motor connection wires U T1 V T2 W T3 and the regenerative braking resistance P RB Prepare a tester Usable range is 1 Q measurement resistance Checking method e The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal blocks R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RB P and N while alternating the tester polarity Note 1 Before checking measure the voltage between P and N at DC voltage range in advance and confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged 6 7 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Note 2 A nearly infinite value is shown in a no conduction state However the value may not be infinite if the momentary conduction occurs through the influence of the smoothing capacitor The value shown ranges from a few to a few dozen Q in a conduction state The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers Note 3 The regenerative braking circuit is provided for Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or lower Tester
423. ruption 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes b056 Integral time setting of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 000 to 65 535 0 100 Yes 4 63 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 16 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter F Default oa 7 N Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page o setting operation Set an upper limit level b060 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 100 Yes O upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 5 ne O lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 0 xes R width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator imit eves b062 mpa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes O hysteresis width ate ee ty Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level b063 Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 l 100 Yes 4 66 Ol upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 pues Ol lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 9 ues 4 width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator aiit levels LY b065
424. s exception responses without performing any operation e To determine the cause of an error check the function code of the response The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added e Check the details of the error with the exception code Exception code Code Description Oih An unsupported function has been specified 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register The Inverter does not allow this function e Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation 22h e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil lt No Response gt The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if e The broadcast is received eA communication error is detected in receiving a query e The query slave address does not correspond with the slave address set for the Inverter e The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3 5 character length Query data length is inappropriate Note If the timer is set in the master to monitor response but no response is returned within the set time period send the same query again 4 166 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function
425. s communication 04 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 1 05 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 2 06 Set a frequency as a pulse train by using 3G3AX PG01 07 Drive Programming 10 The operation result of the frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference 4 10 suoioun4 4 2 Function Mode RUN Command Selection Select the method for using the RUN STOP command Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 A002 REN command 03 ModBus communication 02 selection 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 Related functions F004 C001 to C008 C019 RUN command source Turn on off the FW or RV allocated to terminals The STOP command is activated if both Forward Reverse commands are input simultaneously Use the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator Use the ModBus communication Use option board 1 01 02 S 03 D 04 c 5 05 LL Use option board 2 Base Frequency e Match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Be careful especially if you set a base frequency below 50 Hz Otherwise the motor may burn out Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency A004 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd max frequency A204 50 0 Hz A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd max frequenc
426. s may not match the Inverter s command In this case you can invert the deviation polarity by setting A077 to 01 Example To control a refrigerator compressor If the specified temperature range of a temperature sensor is 20 C to 100 C at 0 to 10 V the target value is 0 C and the current temperature is 10 C the Inverter reduces the frequency under normal PID control since the feedback value is higher than the target value Set A077 to 01 so that the Inverter increases the frequency PID target value PID operation PID feedback value 4 33 4 2 Function Mode EPID Output Limit Function e This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value e To use this function set PID output limit function A078 The output frequency will be limited within a range of target value A078 with the maximum frequency defined as 100 With A078 set to 0 0 this function is disabled PID output a PID output range PID target ae S Ne PID variable range A078 PID variable range A078 Time s EPID Reverse Output When a PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control the frequency reference to the Inverter is limited at 0 Hz However if PID selection A071 is set to 02 reverse output enabled reverse output can be provided for the Inverter when the PID operation result is a negative value When A071 02 the above mentioned PID var
427. saving response Moge Rw loto1000 0 1 accuracy adjustment 126Fh to Not used 1273h A092 1274h HIGH R W Acceleration time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1275h RUIA R W LOW A093 1276h HIGH R W Deceleration time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1277h ne R W LOW 1278h 2 step acceleration A094 R W 0 Switched via terminal 2CH A deceleration selection 1 Switched by setting 4 188 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Register A Function F Resolu No Function name Hoge R W Monitor and setting parameters oe 1279h ick R W 2 step acceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 frequency A095 aha Hz 127Ah LOW 127Bh tien R W 2 step deceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 frequency A096 on Hz 127Ch LOW 0 Line Acceleration pattern TS Slaps curve 127Dh P A097 R W 2 U shape curve selection 3 Inverted U shape curve 4 EL S shape curve 0 Line Deceleration pattern Te shape cule 127Eh P A098 R W 2 U shape curve selection i 3 Inverted U shape curve 4 EL S shape curve 127Fh Not used 1280h Not used 1281h ATOT R W HIGH 0 01 Ol start frequency rene 0 to 40000 Hz 1282h LOW R W 1283h A192 R W HIGH 0 01 Ol end frequency KU 0 to 40000 Hz 1284h LOW R W 1285h Ol start ratio A103 R W Oto Ol end ratio 1 1286h Ol end ratio A104 R W Ol start ratio to 100 1 1287h Ol start selection aios
428. size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 8 bytes j Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Inverter status data includes the following three elements A B and C Data Status A Status B Status C 00 Reserved Inverter status A Inverter status B Inverter status C Code Status Code Status Code Status 00 Initial status 00 During stop 00 01 01 During RUN 01 Stop 02 During stop 02 During trip 02 Deceleration 03 During RUN 03 Constant speed 04 During FRS 04 Acceleration 05 During JG 05 Forward 06 During DB 06 Reverse 07 During retry 07 Forward to reverse 08 During trip 08 Reverse to forward 09 During UV 09 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start lt Command 05 gt Reads trip data 4 154 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 05 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1
429. speed by using a commercial power supply e Allocate 14 CS to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 When the CS terminal is turned on and then off with the RUN command turned on the Inverter starts acceleration in synchronization with the motor rpm during free running after the retry wait time b003 elapses frequency matching start Note that the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The motor rpm is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base rom e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e If frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 is set the Inverter starts at 0 Hz when the motor rpm lowers to the frequency set in b007 Refer to page 4 38 e Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked e If the earth leakage breaker ELB has tripped because of ground fault the commercial power supply circuit does not work either If you need backup supply power from a commercial power supply circuit ELBC For FWY RVY and CSY use low current relays Refer to the following sequence for timing f an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching extend the retry wait time b003 e For commercial switching operation refer to the following examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation e At power on the Inverter can automatically perform retry operation This does not require the following CS terminal For details refer to Reset page 4 87 Examples of connections and timing of c
430. splay is given higher priority After removing the cause of a trip perform the auto tuning again If the auto tuning is interrupted by STOP command input by pressing the STOP key or by turning off the RUN command the parameters for auto tuning may remain in the Inverter To perform the auto tuning again initialize the parameters and then set each parameter again This also applies when you restart ordinary operation If the offline auto tuning is performed with free V f setting selected as the control method the Inverter displays an error message and stops processing Even if auto tuning is completed normally the Inverter cannot be operated with the tuning data To do so be sure to set motor parameter selection H002 to 01 Online Auto Tuning Function Online auto tuning compensates for changes in motor parameters resulting from a motor temperature rise or other factor thus ensuring stable operation e This function is applicable to 1st 2nd control not to 3rd control Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H002 H202 Motor parameter selection 00 Standard motor parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning data enabled 00 Note the following before use e Be sure to perform the offline auto tuning before the online auto tuning e This function calculates online auto tuning data during offline auto tuning Even with a general purpose motor
431. t The circuit is not electrically turned off While the power supply is ON do not touch the Inverter terminals and power cable e g motor cable Doing so may result in electric shock injury or ground fault eWhen this function is enabled the multi function input terminals 1 and 3 are exclusively used for this function No other function can be allocated to these terminals If another function has been allocated it will automatically be disabled and terminals 1 and 3 are changed to the emergency shutoff terminals Function of multi function input terminal 1 Reset signal RS NO contact Fixed This signal is used to reset the Inverter and to reset the emergency shutoff trip E37 Function of multi function input terminal 3 Emergency shutoff signal EMR NC contact Fixed This signal is used to turn off the Inverter output without using the built in CPU With this signal input the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 If multi function input terminal 3 has not been connected or disconnected or if the signal logic is not matched the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 After checking the cable connection and the signal logic input the reset signal RS Emergency shutoff trip E37 can be reset only by the reset signal RS via multi function input terminal 1 It cannot be reset with the Digital Operator eTo enable this function set the slide switch SW1 lever in the Inverter to
432. t of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes oo ae and FE Communicationiwith all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 02 Data Transmission data 16 bytes i Exclusive OR from station No to data BCC Block check code 2 bytes Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals For details refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 79 Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 FW _ Forward 0000000100000000 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 1 0000000000000002 RV __ Reverse 0000000200000000 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 0000000000000004 CF1_ Multi step speed setting binary 1 0000000400000000 SF3__ Multi step speed setting bit 3 0000000000000008 CF2__ Multi step speed setting binary 2 0000000800000000 SF4 _ Multi step speed setting bit 4 0000000000000010 CF3 __ Multi step speed setting binary 3 0000001000000000 SF5 _ Multi step speed setting bit 5 0000000000000020 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 0000002000000000 SF6 _ Multi step speed setting bit 6 0000000000000040 JG Jogging 0000004000000000 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 0000000000000080 DB _ External DC injection braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload limit switching 0000000000000100 SET 2nd control 0000010000000000
433. tant speed 5 operation Accelerates during g regeneration 6 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 if 0 4 to 55 kW x E as Overload limit level z 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No 8 75 to 132 kW current gt poze oada 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s O parameter 2 Overcurrent 00 Disabled poe suppression function 01 Enabled 0o No r FOI 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Active Frequency 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 4 43 b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No S 4 69 parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 No Matching restart 02 Set frequency 00 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed x when terminal SFT is ON S a 9 Bit eel lock selection 02 Data other than b031 cannot be changed 0 No Fal 03 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 34 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List
434. target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 06 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes j Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D All parameters except F001 and U001 to U012 are retrieved e Response frame Positive response 4 156 suonun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Frame format STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data Decimal ASCII code 8 bytes s Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D If the data is a selected item the corresponding code data is received transmitted Data on H003 and H203 motor capacity selection are the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 EU mo
435. tarting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 68 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No kHz Derating enabled 4 68 b083 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 120 i 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 Clears the trip monitor 01 Initializes data b084 Initialization selection m Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 00 No ee 03 Clears the trip monitor and parameters 04 Clears trip monitor parameters and Drive 4 69 program b085 Initialization l 0 01 No parameter selection Do not change Frequency 6086 conversion coefficient t 99 9 1 0 yes 2 00 Enabled n 0087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 No 4 70 S 02 Disabled only during stop O Freesun sto 00 0 Hz start b088 selection P 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 71 02 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 00 Disabled b089 reduction 01 Enabled 0g No g FS Usage rate of b090 regenerative braking 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 74 function b091 Stop selection BO Dees elon Sap 00 No 4 70 01 Free run stop 00 Always ON b092 Cooling fan control 01 ON during RUN 01 No Regenerative braking 00 Disabled b095 function operation 01 Enabled Disabled during stop 00 No 4 74 selection 02 Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 360 pane function ON level 660 to 760 720 No y 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selection 01 PTC enabled 00 No 02 NTC enabled 4 75 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999
436. te when the power supply is turned on in the case of a complete power discharge t0 Momentary power interruption time t1 Allowable momentary power interruption time b002 t2 Retry wait time 6003 Example 1 Duration of momentary power interruption lt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption 0002 Power supply Inverter output p Free running Motor rpm 4 43 Example 2 Duration of momentary power interruption gt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption 0002 Power supply Inverter l output Free running Motor rpm kate ells 4 2 Function Mode Example 3 Motor frequency rom gt b007 Example 4 Motor frequency rpm lt b007 Power supply St i Power supply T ft ft Inverter Inverter output j output i i Freerunning Free running N lo Motor frequency Frequency rpm Yj matching start 2o i lt gt lt _ gt Motor frequency rpm fs o T N Q D a E Alarm Output for Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage During Stop e Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage An alarm output continues while Inverter control power supply remains Alarm output for momentary power interruption undervoltage during stop Standard examples 5 to 7 Operation where DC P N is supplied to control po
437. teristics V f optionally changeable at base frequencies of 30 to 400 Hz V f braking constant torque reduction torque sensor less vector control sensor less vector control at 0 Hz Speed fluctuation 0 5 under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz Overload current rating 150 60s 200 3s for CT and 120 60s for VT Acceleration Deceleration time 0 01 to 3600 0 s line curve selection Starting torque 200 0 3 Hz under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz 150 Torque at 0 Hz under sensor less vector control at 0 Hz when a motor size one rank lower than specified is connected DC injection braking Operates when the starting frequency is lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command when the frequency reference is lower than the operation frequency or via an external input braking power time and frequency are variable Standard Digital Operator Setting via A keys External signal 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC Input impedance 10 kQ 4 to 20 mA Input impedance 100 Q External port Setting through RS485 communication Standard Digital Operator RUN STOP Forward reverse switched via the parameter settings External signal Forward Stop Reverse Stop available at the time of multi functional input terminal allocation 3 wire input available at the time of control circuit ter
438. ters Hee ol No code tion Operation selection at 0 Trips rope option 1 error P991 PUAN 1 Continues operating 1602h Operation selection at P002 R W 0 Trips l _ option 2 error 1 Continues operating 1603h to Not used 160Ah 160Bh Encoder pulses P011 R W 128 to 65535 1 0 ASR 160Ch V2 control mode selection P012 R W Tan 2 APR2 _ 3 HAPR 0 Mode 0 160Dh Pulse train mode selection P013 R W 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 160Eh Orientation stop position P014 R W 0 to 4095 1 j Starting frequency to 1st max frequency 0 01 160Fh Orientation speed setting P015 R W upper limit 12000 Hz Orientation direction 0 Forward a setting BONG pA 1 Reverse _ 1611h Position ready range Po17 Rw loto10000 1 setting 1612h Position ready delay time poig Rw oto999 0 01 s setting 1613h Electronic gear setting P019 R W S Feedback side Bs position selection 1 Command side 4614h Electronic gear ratio Pozo R W 1 to9999 numerator 4615h Electronic gear ratio P021 R W 1 to 9999 denominator 1616h Position control Po22 Rw 0to 65535 0 01 feedforward gain 1617h Position loop gain P023 R W 0 to 10000 0 01 1618h Position bias amount P024 R W 2048 to 2048 Secondary resistance yew 1619h compensation enable P025 pw 0 Disabled 1 Enabled disable selection 161Ah ore error detection lt po2g Rw 0to 1500 0 1 161Bh Speed deviation error P027 R W 0 to 12000 0 01 detection level Hz 161
439. th 22 kW or Lower Capacity When running cables cut the points between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with nippers or a wire cutter and remove 2 Q A if s Connecting points f lt Unnecessary portion E Inverter with 30 kW or Higher Capacity For Connection Without Cable Conduit Make a cut in the rubber bushing of the backing plate with nippers or a wire cutter and insert a ca ble lt _ _ Backing plate Rubber bushing For Connection With Cable Conduit Remove the rubber bushing from the conduit connecting portions and connect the cable conduit Do not remove the rubber bushing unless you connect a cable conduit Otherwise the cable sheath may be damaged by the inner edge of the backing plate resulting in short circuit or ground fault 2 2 Wiring 2 2 Wiring Standard Connection Diagram DC reactor _ Braking resistor optional t J i gor teed optional PD 1 P N 3 phase 200 V AC QO O O O O OO 5 Do 3 phase 400 V AC Short circuit J51 8 wire i Oo o To wire the control circuit power Q E supply and main circuit power supply separately be sure to remove the J51 connector wire first Relay output 1 Control circuit power supply Common Multi function output 1 Multi function output 2 O 1 O og Multi function output Multi fu
440. th an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals 2 23 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Operation Method s eccccecesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 3 E a as 3 4 Test Run Procedure ccccccssseeeeeteeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 Opelo ce tecetatecacereters 3 6 Read Write function and operation 3 13 Test RUN Operation scccccccssseeseeettseseesseeeeees 3 14 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital oJ o E 3 17 Parameter Transition 0 cccccsssseeeeeeeeseseeeeees 3 19 Parameter Sta eaae ea eeraa Eaa eai 3 21 Operation N WARNING Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated CAUTION
441. the Digital Operator Operation Refer to Chapter 4 Functions and set the necessary parameters 3 4 Operation 3 4 Operation 1 Changing the Display Modes LCD digital operator has four display modes which can be changed from one to another by pressing the amp or 2 key at Navigation level Moreover there are 3 other models called Read mode Write mode and Option mode In any display mode it moves to Read mode or Write mode via key or key and moves to Option mode after pressing _ J A and at the same time It returns to display modes via E key Each mode has its own layers where contents and parameters settings cannot be changed at Navigation level When pressing key at Navigation level a cursor will appear on below layer LCD Navigation levels aa To move among the different Navigation levels press keys The outline of each mode is shown below Monitor Mode A The d group inverter parameters and F U group inverter parameter are displayed on the same screen in this mode The content of d group parameter is displayed with big font characters The function code such as F001 and contents of F U parameters are displayed without the function name Monitor Mode B Monitor x 4 In this mode four d group inverter parameters can be displayed at the same screen Th
442. the desired multi function input When this monitor is used to display a target value of the PID function the monitor value is displayed as a percentage 100 Max frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Output frequency KOOI setting monitor A020 Multi step speed reference 0 0 0 Starting frequency to Hz 2nd multi step 1st 2nd 3rd max frequency A220 6 0 speed reference 0 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 Related functions A001 A020 A220 A320 C001 to C008 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Acceleration Deceleration Time e Set an acceleration deceleration time for the motor For a slow transition set to a large value and for a fast transition set to a small one Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F002 Acceleration time 1 F202 2nd acceleration time 1 F302 3rd acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 30 00 s F003 Deceleration time 1 F203 2nd deceleration time 1 F303 3rd deceleration time 1 i 00 Input via the Digital Operator P031 e a 01 Input via option 1 00 put typ 02 Input via option 2 Related functions A004 A204 A304 P031 C001 to C008 To switch to 2nd 3rd acceleration time 1 or 2nd 3rd deceleration time 1 allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it
443. this function allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs The A145 value is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A145 Frequency addition oto 400 0 0 00 Hz amount Frequency addition 00 Add A145 value to output frequency A146 q y 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 direction frequency Related functions C001 to C008 ADD input Note 1 If the sign of the frequency reference is changed rotation direction will be inverted or gt as a result of operation the Note 2 When the PID function is used the frequency addition function is enabled for a PID target value Note that A145 is displayed in in increments of 0 01 4 41 4 2 Function Mode lt Group B Detailed Function Parameters gt Momentary Power Interruption Trip Retry Restart Restart During Momentary Power Interruption e You can set whether the Inverter trips or retries restarts when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs e If the retry function is selected in retry selection b001 the Inverter retries for the number of times set in b005 for momentary power interruption or b009 for undervoltage and trips on the next time Under the limitless retry setting the Inverter doesn t trip eYou can use b004 to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption or undervo
444. ting at 95 ignore of No communications error s 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop wn 6 0 Basic speed I O 6 1 Extended speed I O 2 Extended speed and Torque control 3 Special I O P046 Instance Number 4 Extended control I O 1 No 5 Extended control I O and multifunction I O monitor 6 Flexible format 7 Extended speed and Acceleration control 00 Trip f 01 Trip after deceleration stop po4g Operation setting at 95 ignore o No idle mode detection i 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 No Pa Fai rotation speed 32 34 36 38 poss use train frequency 4 gig 50 0 25 0 No kHz scale pose use train frequency 001 to 2 00 0 10 No s filter time constant l 4 138 POST Pulse train frequency 400 to 100 o No bias amount P058 fea train frequency 0 to 100 100 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 55 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default ioe N Function name Monitor or data range Laa during Unit Page 2 9 operation Po60 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 command 0 Position range specification forward side Po61 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 0 com
445. tion 01 PTC enabled 00 No 02 NTC enabled 4 73 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 3000 No Q 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 38 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciemas 7 No Function name Monitor or data range setting during Unit Page operation b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz b101 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz b103 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz D b105 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V D b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz Po D b107 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz b109 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz b111 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 No Hz b113 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 39 3 9 Parameter List Parameter
446. tion command 4 P064 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 1656h to Not used 1665h 1666h Drive programming user 2100 to tae 9 to R W 0 to 65535 1 1685h P P131 1686h to Not used E 16A1h 16A2h i P160 to Se VE cmo register to R W 0000 to FFFF 16ABh P169 16ACh f i P170 to oe VERE PEregIster to R W 0000 to FFFF 16B5h P179 4 211 4 4 Communication Function Regiei Function name Funika R W Monitor and setting parameters Re olur No code tion 16B6h Profibus node address P180 R W 0 to 125 16B7h Profibus clear mode P181 pani Ieee Cear 01 Last value 00 PPO 16B8h_ Profibus map selection P182 R W 01 Conventional 02 Flexible mode 16C0h CompoNet node address P190 R W 0to 63 16C2h DeviceNet node address P192 R W 0 to 63 00 32 bytes 16C5h ML2 frame length P195 R W 01 17 bytes 16C6h ML2 node address P196 R W 21 to 3E21 Data on H003 motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity k
447. tion decelerated UP DOWN function 4 90 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE Forced operator Forced operator function 4 91 32 SF1 _ Multi step speed setting bit 1 33 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 34 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 3 Peart 35 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 C008 36 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 5 37 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 6 38 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 39 OLR Overload limit switching Overload limit 4 49 40 TL Torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit function 4 57 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 43 PPI P PI switching P PI switching function 4 92 44 BOK Brake confirmation Brake control function 4 76 45 ORT Orientation Orientation function 4 134 46 LAC LAD cancel LAD cancel function 4 9 47 PCLR Position deviation clear 48 STAT Pulse train position command input V2 control mode selection 4 125 permission 50 ADD Frequency addition Set frequency addition function 4 41 51 F TM Forced terminal block Forced terminal function 4 93 52 ATR Torque command input permission Torque control 4 127 53 KHC Integrated power clear Integrated power 4 4 54 SON Servo ON Servo ON function 4 142 4 80 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode eee Data Function name Reference item Page 55 FOC Prelimin
448. tion input terminals priority is given to FOC and SON is disabled SON ON ON FW RV ON Does not operate because the SON Output terminal is OFF frequency A gt Restarts according to b088 Speed servo lock status Related functions A044 C001 to C008 4 142 suonun4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Pulse Train Frequency Input This function allows you to use a pulse train input to the SAP SAN terminals as frequency reference or PID feedback value in each control mode This function can be used in all control modes Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in pulse train frequency scale P055 The analog input start end function cannot be used To limit the input frequency use pulse train fre quency bias amount P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P055 Pulse train frequency scale 10 to 50 0 Sel thie put reg ency atihe 25 0 kHz maximum frequency P056 Pulse train frequency filter 0 01 to 2 00 Set a filter time constant for 0 10 time constant pulse train input P057 Pulse train frequency bias 100 to 100 0 amount P058 Pulse train frequency limit 0 to 100 100 A A001 Frequency Terrence 06 Pulse train frequency 02 selection A076 PID feedback selection 03 Pulse train frequency 00 A141 Operation frequency input 97 Pulse train frequency 0
449. tion starts or stops the motor at a desired position and stores the current position as a po sition command in a desired position command area Allocate 45 ORT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 When V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 absolute position control or 03 high reso lution absolute position control the relevant terminal serves as a teaching terminal Related functions C001 to C008 P012 P074 lt Teaching Procedure gt 1 In teaching selection P074 select the position command you want to set 2 Move the workpiece e Input the RUN command with the ORT terminal turned on At this time the speed command and acceleration deceleration time conform to the currently selected parameters ORT terminal RUN command Output frequency Depends on the speed command selected Position If the Inverter control circuit Ro To is turned on teaching is enabled The current position counter operates even if the workpiece is moved by an external device Teaching is therefore enabled even while the Inverter is stopped Note Make sure that the power supplies R L1 S L2 T L3 for the Inverter power circuit are shut off or that the Inverter s outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 are disconnected from the motor Not doing so may result in injury and or damage to the equipment 3 When the target position is reached press the Enter key on the Digital Operator Press the key on the data dis
450. tion wait time b122 starts at the brake release signal ON timing The stop wait time b123 starts at the brake release signal OFF timing eTo use the brake control function allocate the following functions to multi function I O terminals as required eTo input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter allocate the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 76 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Allocate the brake release signal 19 BRK to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 Also to use a brake error output signal allocate the brake error signal 20 BER e To use the brake control function you are recommended to select sensorless vector control A044 03 O Hz sensorless vector control A044 04 or sensor vector control A044 05 so that the Inverter outputs high torque during startup Refer to page 4 21 Parameters Required for Brake Control Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled b120 Brake control selection 01 Enabled 00 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a time required for the output current to b121 0 00 s release reach the rate of the release current after reaching the release frequency 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b122 f 0 00 s acceleration release signal
451. tions 7 1 Standard Specification List M Three phase 400 V Class Class 3 phase 400 V Model name 3G3RX A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185 Max at CT 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 applicable kW motor 4P atVT 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 at CT 1 0 1 7 2 5 3 6 6 2 9 7 13 1 17 3 22 1 26 3 400 V Rated output at VT 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 6 7 7 11 0 15 2 20 9 25 6 30 4 capacity kVA atcT 1 2 20 31 43 74 11 6 15 8 20 7 26 6 31 5 480 V at VT 1 5 2 5 4 0 5 5 9 2 13 3 18 2 24 1 30 7 36 5 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage at CT 1 5 2 5 3 8 5 3 9 0 14 19 25 32 38 Rated output current A at VT 1 9 3 1 4 8 6 7 11 1 16 22 29 37 43 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 Regenerative braking Built in braking resistor circuit discharge resistor Braking ini i Minimum connection 400 iog 160 400 zo For as a Bae Ba resistance Q Class 3 phase 400 V Model name 3G3RX A4220 ARSO AES Aane Geaa Eiye l S ak EAEk 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max applicable ay at CT 22 30 37 45 55 7
452. to 400 00 Hz 1002h LOW 1003h Output current monitor d002 R 0 0 to 9999 0 A 0 Stop 1004h Rotation direction monitor d003 R 1 Forward 2 Reverse 4 181 4 4 Communication Function Regji Function name Punake R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code 1005h Gn PID feedback value monitor R 0 00 to 999000 0 0 1006h ete LOW F ee i 2 0 Terminal 1 to 2 7 Terminal 8 1007h Multi function input monitor d005 R 2 8 Terminal FW z 7 an Wwe 1008h Multi function output doos R 2 a Terminal 11 to 2 4 Terminal 15 monitor 2 6 Relay terminal 1009h 0 i en TIPU SA Heney monitor R 0 00 to 39960 00 0 01 TAR after conversion d007 LOW d008 100Bh HIGH R Real frequency monitor 400 00 to 400 00 Hz 100Ch qoop R LOW 100Dh Torque reference monitor d009 R 200 to 200 100Eh Torque bias monitor d010 R 200 to 200 100Fh_ Not used 1010h Output torque monitor d012 R 200 to 200 1011h Output voltage monitor d013 R 0 0 to 600 0 V 1012h Input power monitor d014 R 0 0 to 999 9 kW d015 1013h HIGH Integrated power monitor R 0 0 to 999999 9 0 1 h 1014h ets LOW d016 1015h HIGH Total RUN time R 0 to 999999 h 1016h a016 LOW d017 1017h HIGH Power ON time monitor R 0 to 999999 1 h 1018h aoir LOW 1019h Fin temperature mon
453. to any of multi A function input terminals 1 to 8 set 43 in any of C001 to C008 via the Digital Operator and turn on the terminal If you choose to 100 enable proportional control set a KPP value in H052 P proportional gain The relationship between the KPP value and speed change ratio is expressed broadly in the following formula rpm 0 10 KPP set value Speed change ratio The relationship between speed change ratio and speed error is expressed broadly in the following formula Speed error at rated torque A Speed change ratio x 100 Synchronous rpm at base frequency 4 92 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Terminal Block Function F TM e This function forcibly enables operation via the control terminal block by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the control terminal block Data Symbol Function name Description 51 F TM Multi function input selection Forced terminal Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 e f the Forced Terminal Block function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the
454. to the release frequency 2 After the release frequency is reached the Inverter outputs the brake release signal BRK after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses However if the Inverter s output current is less than the current value set in release current b126 the Inverter does not output the brake release signal In this case the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER 3 If the brake confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi function input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without accelerating after the brake release signal is output If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 4 after the brake release signal is output 4 After the brake confirmation signal is input or after the brake release signal is output if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts acceleration up to a set frequency after the period set in acceleration wait time b122 elapses 5 After the RUN command is turned off the Inverter decelerates to the brake release frequency b125 and turns off the brake release signal BRK 6 If the brak
455. top Deceleration stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output Communication error C076 selection Communication error 10 00 to 99 99 Sorg timeout Time before receiving timeout 0 00 0 to 1000 Wait time until response starts C078 Communication wait time after reception is completed excluding silent 0 interval Response from the Inverter Frame 2 is output as return after the Inverter receives the query Frame 1 not output independently 4 163 4 4 Communication Function Below is each frame format command Message Configuration Query Header Silent interval Slave address Function code Data Error check Trailer Silent interval lt Slave Address gt e Pre set numbers ranging from 1 to 247 in each Inverter slave Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query takes in the corresponding query e Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to 0 e Data call or loop back cannot be performed while broadcasting lt Data gt e Sends the function command e The RX corresponds with the following data formats used in the ModBus Data name Description Coil 2 value data 1 bit long that can be referred to or changed Holding register 16 bit long data that can be referred to or changed lt Function Code gt e Specifies the function for the Inverter to perform e Below are the fu
456. tor List page 4 180 0032h Fault monitor 4 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 i 0033h Fault monitor 4 frequency LOW Hz 0034h Fault monitor 4 current d084 R Puput a Me unee 0 1 A tripping 0035h Fault monitor 4 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0036h Fault monitor 4 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0037h Fault monitor 4 RUN time LOW 0038h Fault monitor 4 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0039h Fault monitor 4 ON time LOW Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 179 4 4 Communication Function eas Function name ca R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution 003Ah_ Fault monitor 5 factor See NINETY EN actors page 4 180 003Bh Fault monitor 5 Inverter status See Weer Trips acior hist page 4 180 003Ch Fault monitor 5 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 H 003Dh Fault monitor 5 frequency LOW Hz 003Eh Fault monitor 5 current dogs R Output current value at the time of 0 1 A tripping i 003Fh Fault monitor 5 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0040h Fault monitor 5 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0041h Fault monitor 5 RUN time LOW 00
457. trol is selected with a single Inverter this function controls two motors of the same type to drive a single load eTo use this function you set the same parameters as when you select Sensorless Vector Control page 4 116 or O Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 117 However set the motor parameters as follows e Set motor parameters R1 R2 and L to one half of the set value for one motor e Set motor parameter lo to be twice the set value for one motor e Set motor parameter J to one half of the total moment of inertia of two motors and loads connected to these motors e Select the motor capacity value closest to the total capacity of two motors eWhen different loads are driven with two motors a fluctuation in one load affects the operating condition of the other which may hinder normal control To prevent this be sure to operate a system in a way that the load driven by two motors is regarded as one load A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 Related functions H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 4 119 4 2 Function Mode Stabilization Parameter e This function adjusts to reduce motor hunting eIn case of motor hunting check whether motor capacity H003 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 match your motor If they do not match them If the motor s primary resistance is smaller than that of the standard m
458. trol gain switching 0400000000000000 MI3 Not used 0000000008000000 UP Remote operation accelerated 0800000000000000 Ml4 Not used 0000000010000000 DWN Remote operation decelerated 1000000000000000 MI5 Not used 0000000020000000 UDC Remote operation data clear 2000000000000000 MI6 Not used 0000000040000000 7 4000000000000000 MI7 Not used 0000000080000000 OPE Forced operator 8000000000000000 MI8 Not used 4 150 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals corresponding to 12 commands For details refer to Multi function Input Terminal Function Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD Analog command on hold 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 Position command selection 1 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 CP2 Position command selection 2 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP3 Position command selection 3 0000001000000000 0000000000000020 ORL Zero return limit signal 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 ORG Zero return startup signal 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 FOT Forward driving stop 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ROT Reverse driving stop 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 SPD Speed Position switching 00
459. trol is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 50 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default oa N Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page o setting operation H006 Stabilization 100 parameter Hage 2ndstablization g to 255 100 Yes 4 118 parameter H306 3rd stabilization 100 parameter Depends H020 Motor parameter R1 oni motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q Depends H220 2nd motor on the parameter R1 motor capacity Depends H021 Motor parameter R2 onne motor capacity 0 001 to 65 535 No Q 4 113 Depends 2nd motor on the 2 nee parameter R2 motor z capacity T Depends H022 Motor parameter L onthe 5 motor O capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No mH Depends H222 2nd motor on the parameter L motor capacity Depends H023 Motor parameter lo oning motor capacity 0 01 to 655 35 No A Depends H223 2nd motor on the parameter lo motor capacity 4 113 Depends H024 Motor parameter J onte motor capacity 5 0 001 to 9999 000 No kgm Depends H224 2nd motor on the parameter J motor capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 51 3 9 Parameter List Parameter i Default Mie
460. tructions Precautions for Correct Use p R l omron HITACHI O O o POWER RUN WARNING ALARM LOCAL Remove READ write ESC A id lt gt FWD Rev sToP RUN RUN RESET A DET BEOSTNMSOET A WARNING Risk of electric shock ih ORBAN BRON CIAMINBRABESTY FAL RETR Behe 1 ODA IOV N AEREE FAL e Read manual before installing e WaitiO minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply Checking Before Unpacking Checking Before Unpacking Checking the Product On delivery be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter RX model that you ordered Should you find any problems with the product immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office Checking the Nameplate Inverter model Lype name RX A4004 EF Model SJ700 OO4HFEF 2 _ INVERTER a kW HP 0 4 1 2 pz Input specifications ___ Input Entree 50Hz 60Hz VIPh _ A as 50Hz 60Hz 380 480 V 3Ph 1 7 A Output specifications Output Sortie 0 400Hz 380 480 V 3Ph_ 1 5A S N 16210820000003 DATE 0902 ir a ena i td pment Mape in sapan NE18001 021 Sy C t For Service Please contact Omror L oaee EEE d Checking the Model 3G3RX A2055 EF F Built
461. ts a frequency equal to or lower than the frequency matching lower limit frequency setting 6007 e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to b029 while keeping the output current at the b028 set value e When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again and then output frequency is restored to the original level e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 set value 4 72 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function e This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current e This function is enabled when automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 is set to 01 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled 01 Enabled b089 Automatic carrier reduction 00 e When output current exceeds 60 72 84 and 96 of the rated current the carrier frequency is reduced to 12 9 6 and 3 kHz respectively When the output current falls below 5 of each level this function will be reset Carrier frequency reduction starting level Reduced carrier frequency kHz Recovery level Less than 60 of the rated current 15 0 60 55 of the rated current 12 0 72 67 of the rated current 9 0 84 79 of the rated current 6 0 96
462. tting Data and Time for the LCD digital operator d060 Inverter mode 00 to 01 dogo Faultfrequency 9 to 65535 Time 45 monitor d081 Fault monitor 1 Latest 4 7 d082 Fault monitor 2 Error code condition of occurrence 4 7 d083 Fault monitor 3 Output frequency Hz gt Output current A 4 7 Internal DC voltage V m d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 7 d085 Fault monitor 5 gt ON time h 4 7 d086 Fault monitor 6 4 7 f Warning code d090 Warning monitor 0 to 385 4 7 d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 7 Regenerative d103 braking load rate 0 0 to 100 0 4 7 monitor diga COME INEIMAY 5 510 100 0 hese I oR monitor App 2 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default BL 8 N Function name Monitor or data range i during Unit Page o setting operation 0 0 Starting frequency to 1st 2nd 3rd max F001 Pa ta frequency Yes Hz 4 8 9 0 00 to 400 00 F002 Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 F202 2nd acceleration 9 04 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F302 3rd acceleration 4 44 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F003 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 F203 2nd deceleration 9 44 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s 4 8 time 1 F303 3rd deceleration 9 41 to 3600 00 30 00 Yes s
463. ty VT these terminals are not available Intelligent input terminal that cannot set Normal Duty Code Intelligent input terminal name 44 BOK Braking confirmation 45 ORT Orientation 47 PCLR Clearance of position deviation 48 STAT Permission of 90 shift phase 52 ATR Permission of torque command input 54 SON Servo on 55 FOC Pre excitation 66 CP1 Multistage position settings selection 1 67 CP2 Multistage position settings selection 2 68 CP3 Multistage position settings selection 3 4 61 4 2 Function Mode Code Intelligent input terminal name 69 ORL Zero return limit function 70 ORG Zero return trigger function 71 FOT Forward operate stop 72 ROT Reverse operate stop 73 SPD Speed Position switching e Intelligent output terminal that cannot set Normal Duty Code Intelligent output terminal name 19 BRK Brake release 20 BER Braking error 22 DSE Speed deviation maximum 23 POK Positioning completed When the parameter becomes outside a set range when changing to Heavy Duty gt Normal Duty it changes to an initial value An initial value of the following parameters is different in Heavy Duty ratings and Normal Duty ratings When Heavy Duty Normal Duty is changed with b049 items other than H003 H203 are changed to an initial value ltem Function code Heavy Duty Initial value Normal Duty Initial value 1st 2nd 3rd V f charact
464. u have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR N Read and Understand this Manual Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall
465. ueddy Multi function input terminals Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page co01 Multi function input 1 selection C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection C004 Multi function input 4 selection C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging l DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed settin
466. ult EMC filter disabled 3G3RX A2300 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 3G3RX A4300 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M6 3G3RX A2370 3G3RX A4370 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 2 16 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model Fo CHARGE LED indicator 7 G PD 1 Pig short circuit bar Ground terminal with short circuit bar shaded area When not using the DC k aes for EMC filter function switching reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached EMC filter function switching method EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 3G3RX A2450 3G3RX A4450 3G3RX A4550 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 Pa re CHARGE LED indicator ee W T3 o V R L1 S L2 T L3 PD 1 P N U T1 w short circuit bar When not using the DC shaded area for EMC reactor keep the PD 1 P filter function switching short circuit bar attached G PD 1 P S short circuit bar Ground terminal with EMC filter function switching method G 3G3RX A2550 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M10 2 17 m Recommended Cable Size Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal 2 2 Wiring For Inverter wiring crimp terminal and terminal screw tightening torque refer to the table below
467. ulti step position HIGH 1 command 2 P062 1643h LOW R W 1644h POS R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 3 P063 1645h LOW R W 1646h FOGA R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 4 P064 1647h LOW R W 4 210 suoioun4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Registar Function name Funen R W Monitor and setting parameters R ole No code tion 1648h P069 R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 5 P065 1649h LOW R W 164Ah POG R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 6 PO66 164Bh LOW R W 164Ch F067 R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 7 P067 164Dh LOW R W 164Eh Zero return mode P068 R W 0 Low 1 Hi1 2 Hi2 464Fh Zero return direction P069 R W 0 FW 1 RV selection 1650h Low speed zero return P070 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 frequency Hz 1651h High speed zero return P071 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 frequency Hz 1652h fica R W Position range HIGH 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 specification forward P072 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 1653h LOW R W 1654h uke R W Position range HIGH 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 specification reverse P073 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 1655h LOW R W 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 01 Multi step position command 1 P061 02 Multi step position command 2 P062 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 Jesenic reaching selection PONS RW 04 Multi step posi
468. unction you can change the acceleration deceleration time during acceleration deceleration Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A092 Acceleration time 2 S A292 2nd acceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 10 0 S A392 3rd acceleration time 2 S A093 Deceleration time 2 S A293 2nd deceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 00 10 0 S A393 3rd deceleration time 2 s A094 2 step acceleration 00 Switched via multi function input 09 deceleration selection 2CH example 1 7 l 01 Switched by setting example 2 00 A294 2nd 2 step acceleration 02 Enabled only when switching forward deceleration selection reverse example 3 A095 2 step acceleration frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 0 Hz A295 2nd 2 step acceleration frequency A096 2 step deceleration frequency 0 00 to 400 00 00 Hz A296 2nd 2 step deceleration frequency Related functions F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 C001 to C008 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 37 4 2 Function Mode e Select an acceleration deceleration time switching method from the following three Switching via a multi function input Automatic switching at a specified frequency Automatic switching only when switching between forward reverse If the 3rd control function is selected however switching by the 2 step acceleration decel
469. unction output selection the torque limit signal is turned on when the above torque limit function is activated e The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 00 four quadrant separate setting selected in torque limit selection b040 Torque Regeneration Power running b042 b041 Forward FW Reverse RV Power running Regeneration b043 b044 e The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 01 terminal switching selected in torque limit selection b040 They can be switched with torque limit switchings 1 and 2 allocated to multi function inputs Example When torque limit switching 1 41 and torque limit switching 2 42 are allocated to multi function input terminals 7 and 8 respectively Multi function input terminals 41 42 7 8 6 o m OFF OFF gt b041 ON OFF gt b042 OFF ON b043 ON ON b044 e To use the torque limit function in a low speed range also use the overload limit function P24 4 58 suoioun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reverse Rotation Prevention Function e This function is enabled when 03 Sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 e Because of the Inverter s control characteristics the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the direction opposite to that of the RUN command e g in a low speed range If the motor s reverse rotatio
470. unctions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Analog Input O O2 Ol e The Inverter has three types of external analog input terminals O L terminal 0 to 10 V OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input Q2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input voltage input e Below are the settings for this function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A005 O OI selection 00 Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 03 04 Switches between O OI via terminal AT Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between Ol FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 A006 O2 selection 00 01 03 O2 only Auxiliary frequency reference of O and Ol not reversible Auxiliary frequency reference of O and Ol reversible O2 disabled 03 4 12 suooun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Related functions A005 A006 C001 to C008 e The frequency reference and reversibility depend on whether 16 AT is allocated to a multi function input and depend on the combination of A
471. upplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated SPPObSE Safety Precautions Z CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in th
472. urve cssss App 38 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output ce App 39 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Appendix 1 Parameter List Monitor Mode d e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 Changes el Function name Monitor or data range Peru during Unit Page o setting operation doo1 OVtput frequency 9 99 to 400 00 Yes Hz 4 1 monitor doo2 Culpa current 0 0 to 9999 0 a ie A 44 monitor F FWD Forward doog Rotation direction STOP Stop 4 1 REV Reverse doo4 PID feedback value 0 00 to 999000 00 4 1 monitor Enabled when the PID function is selected Example MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL a g incaran eee doos eras input pretin i 6 5 4 3 4 2 peers HLHLLLLHH I FWw8 76543 2 1 I fao WFE 3 Example MONITOR A M1 STOP ALL ff Multi function saan aes coe ene iD ay d006 e R E NE en AE T 4 2 output monitor Hi I Al215141312 Tl 2001 _00 0FF L J Output frequency 9 99 to 39960 00 d007 monitor Yes 4 2 Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 after conversion done Peal frequency 400 00 to 400 00 Hz 43 monitor doog TOrgue reference 200 to 200 4 3 monitor doro TOrgue bias 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do12 Output torque 200 to 200 ae 43 monit
473. use of momentary power interruption the Inverter immediately shuts off the output and stops operating this function The subsequent power recovery depends on the setting of retry selection b001 With b050 03 the Inverter can be restored to normal operation if a momentary power interruption occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off Note that the Inverter may decelerate to a stop depending on the b051 setting Below are the details b050 b051 Operation b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 02 without recovery b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop normal operation example 2 power recovery b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 03 with recovery b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at power recovery Operation normal operation example 2 elf operation of this function results in deceleration stop the Inverter is forced to stop even if the FW command is ON To restart the Inverter make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered and input the FW command again 4 Make sure that the b051 b052 set values are larger than the undervoltage level 200 V class 210 V 400 V class 410 V If undervoltage occurs this function is disabled Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052 If the proportional gain setting
474. used 4 199 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code R W Resolu Monitor and setting parameters Hen 1415h Multi function output terminal 11 selection C021 R W 1416h Multi function output terminal 12 selection C022 R W 1417h Multi function output terminal 13 selection C023 R W 1418h Multi function output terminal 14 selection C024 R W 1419h Multi function output terminal 15 selection C025 R W 141Ah Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection C026 R W RUN signal during RUN FA1 constant speed arrival signal FA2 over set frequency arrival signal OL overload warning OD excessive PID deviation gt AL alarm output FA3 set frequency only arrival signal OTQ overtorque IP signal during momentary power interruption 9 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ signal during torque limit 11 RNT RUN time exceeded 12 ONT ON time exceeded ONoahWN O 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog OI disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnect
475. ut Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value 0041 to b044 amp x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 Torque Monitor Function e This function allows you to monitor an estimated motor output torque when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Vit characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 sel ction 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank C027 FM selection 02 Output torque C028 AM selection 00 C029 AMI selection 11 Output torque signed C028 only H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory default kW H004 H204 Motor pole number 34 6 80 4 Pole selection eTo use the monitor via the Digital Operator select display code d012 e To use the monitor with a signal from the control terminal block refer to Digital FM Terminal page 4 109 or Analog Output AM AMI Terminals page 4 110 e If VC special VP or free V f setting is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 this function is disabled and the display or the output si
476. vel C063 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output Le terminal selection 21 ZS 0 Hz signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection 0 00 to 100 00 Hz 6063 O ti detection level Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz 0 09 Related functions A044 A244 A344 e Enabled when 21 ZS is allocated to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 When VC special VP free V F sensorless vector control or 0 Hz sensorless vector control is selected as the control method this function works for the Inverter s output frequency When the control method is sensor vector control this function works for the motor rotation frequency Alarm Code Output ACO to AC3 e This function outputs a 3 bit or 4 bit code signal to indicate the cause of an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C062 Alarm code selection 00 Disabled 01 3 bit code 02 4 bit code 00 e If 01 3 bit or 02 4 bit is selected in alarm code selection C062 multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forced to output an alarm code The following table shows the output alarm codes Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor c
477. verters with 22 kW or lower capacity P N Regenerative braking Connect optional regenerative braking units unit connection terminal G Ground terminal Inverter case ground terminal Connect this terminal to the ground type D 200 V class type C 400 V class E Control Circuit Terminal EA Terminal Terminal name Description Specifications symbol H Frequency reference 10 V DC power supply for the O terminal Allowable load current power supply output 20 mA max O Frequency reference With a 0 to 10 V DC voltage input the Input impedance 10 kQ input frequency reaches the maximum at 10 V Allowable input voltage Voltage Set at A014 if the maximum frequency range needs to be achieved at lower than 10 V 0 3 to 12 VDC 2 02 Auxiliary frequency With a 0 to 10 V DC voltage input the O2 Input impedance 10 kQ S reference input signal is added to the frequency reference Allowable input voltage 8 Voltage signal of the O or Ol terminal By changing range D 2 the setting the frequency reference canbe 0 to 12 V DC ca 3 k wl D input even with the O2 terminal lt gt independently S Ol Frequency reference With a 4 to 20 mA DC current input the Input impedance 100 Q a input maximum frequency is set at 20 mA The OI Allowable max current ic Current signal is only active when the AT terminalis 24 mA ON Allocate the AT function to the multi function input terminal L Frequency r
478. we 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 MO1 Drive programming output 1 45 MO2 Drive programming output 2 46 MOS Drive programming output 3 aa oe 47 MO4 Drive programming output 4 48 MO5 Drive programming output 5 49 MO6 Drive programming output 6 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 63 OPO Option board output no Not used When C062 is used to select the alarm code output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 21 03 07 01 05 No 4 93 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 43 3 9 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C027 FM selection When a inverter is in sensor vector control A044 0
479. wer This parameter is expressed as a ratio of the output current to the Inverter s rated current eIn 0 Hz SLV startup boost amount H061 H261 you can set a current boost amount at startup in the 0 Hz range A current value expressed as a ratio to the Inverter s rated current is added to the current value set in HO60 H260 at startup only Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H060 H260 Limit at 0 Hz 0 0 to 100 0 O Current limit in low frequency range 190 9 H061 H261 Boost amount at SLV 0 to 50 Current boost amount at startup 50 startup 0 Hz eNote the following before use e Select an Inverter with one rank higher in capacity than the motor s e Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size eIn the 0 Hz sensorless control mode the digital command board 83GAX DI01 cannot be used lf 0 Hz sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Operenion Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio isa Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power negative value parameter x 1 2 running Speed change ratio isa Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set j i494 14904 H031 positive value parameter x 0 8 Incre
480. wer supply terminal Ro To examples 8 to10 suoioun4 Example 5 b004 00 Inverter is stopped Inverter is running Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 6 b004 01 Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 7 b004 02 Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP 4 44 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Example 8 b004 00 Power supply Inverter is stopped RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Example 9 b004 01 Power supply RUN command OFF ON Undervoltage OFF ON A l_ OFF Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Example 10 b004 02 Inverter is stopped Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Inverter is running Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Power supply RUN command Inverter output
481. width g range ee T S b068 02 Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit 02 level x 2 b070 O 0 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input application value used for WCO WCOIl b071 Ol Analog operation level at WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output i O OI O2 disconnection 100 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input b072 02 application value used for WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output e You can set hysteresis widths for the window comparator upper and lower limit levels e You can set limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for O Ol and O2 inputs For the WCO WCOI WCO2 output you can fix the analog input application value to the desired value Set values in O Ol O2 disconnection operation levels b070 b071 b072 If no is set the analog input value is directly reflected ODc OlDc O2Dc outputs are the same as WCO WCOI WCOz2 respectively O Ol O2 inputs Max 100 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 Min O OI 0 O2 100 4 67 Analog input value Analog application value a WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc Window comparator upper limit level 6061 b064 b067 Analog operating level on disconnection 6070 b071 b072 Window comparator lower limit level 6060 b063 b066 4 2 Function Mode Starting Frequency e Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on Parameter No Function name Data
482. y A304 Related functions A004 A204 A304 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on For the base frequency and motor voltage selections match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Output voltage AVR voltage selection A082 Base frequency A003 A203 A303 gt Output frequency Hz lf you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz a special motor is required This may require the Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor e Set the motor voltage selection according to the motor specifications If the voltage exceeds the specified level the motor may burn out 4 2 Function Mode Maximum Frequency e Set the maximum value of the output frequency e The value set here is the maximum value e g 10 V in the range from 0 to 10 V of the external analog input frequency reference e The maximum Inverter output voltage from base to maximum frequencies is the voltage set in AVR voltage selection A082 e The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage Output voltage AVR voltage selection A082 Base frequency Max frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A004 Maximum frequency A204 2nd maximum frequency 30 to 400 50 0 Hz A304 8rd maximum frequency Related f
483. y matching 4 42 2 b007 lower limit frequency 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 No Hz 4 70 2 setting 4 87 sa 00 Trip 2 01 0 Hz start 02 Frequency matching start _ D BOE Tapreryseecton 03 Trip after frequency matching 99 No 4 42 deceleration stop g 04 Active Frequency Matching restart O a i gt b009 Undervoltage retry oo 16 times 00 No S Ss time selection 01 No limit Cc 3 Overvoltage b010 overcurrent retry time 1 to 3 3 No Time 4 42 selection b011 Trip retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 12 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level b312 3rd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced torque characteristics 01 Constant torque characteristics 02 Free setting 00 No 4 46 b015 Electronic Thermal Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setti
484. y the Inverter Be sure to provide 3 5 characters 24 bits as the wait time If the length does not reach 3 5 characters the Inverter does not respond e The actual communication wait time is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting Message Configuration Response lt Total Communication Time gt e The time from receiving query to the response by the Inverter is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting e If sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response be sure to provide the silent interval length 3 5 characters at the minimum lt Normal Response gt e If the query is the loop back function code 08h the Inverter sends back a response of the same content as the query lf the query is the function code to be written into the holding register or coil 05h 06h OFh 10h the Inverter sends back the query as it is in response e f the query is the function code to be read from the holding register or coil 01h 03h the Inverter makes the slave address and function code the same as the query and attaches the read data to the query 4 165 4 4 Communication Function lt Abnormal Response gt Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 lf an error aside from a communication error is found in the query content the Inverter return
485. y with a resolution of 0 1 Hz via BCD input and setting the acceleration deceleration time with a resolution of 0 1 sec via BCD in put in the dividing input mode DIV TYPE CODE 1 2 ON BCD ON DIV For the communication option boards refer to the specific user manual of each option 5 8 suoieiedo 3vueuaueN Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Trip Monitor Display TRIP M1 STOP ALL E12 1 p I I IEX TELD i 111006 11 05__ Stop i t aJ 4 gt ERRI Pl Ext Trip ee Pi 22 2222 Miii0de 11 05_ Stop Foutput_Fo__ _ 50 00Hz 4 output current_ 4 00A TRIP M1 STOP ALL INEXT PAGE gt M1 STOP ALL 8hr oe ee ee i 50 00Hz 2 Output frequency Hz at the time of tripping l A Y i 4 00A 3 Output current A at the time of tripping A Y gt 400 2 Vdc 4 P N DC voltage V at the time of tripping 4 1 Aly v 15hr 5 Total RUN time h before the trip 4 AY v 8hr 6 Total power ON time h before the trip 1 Trip factor Explanation of display E 12 1 FA Indicates the cause of the trip WON A UBRWN OO Indicates the Inverter status at the time of tripping During initialization at power on or with the
486. yp 02 Option 2 PUEDE 03 Drive Programming f 00 Digital Operator pos2 Orentation stop llot Option 4 GO Nos ese ne P put typ 02 Option 2 00 Terminal O 01 Terminal Ol Torque reference 02 Terminal O2 HEE input selection 03 Digital Operator ve Ne _ 06 Option 1 07 Option 2 4 122 Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW r P034 Setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW BE ee a lt 2 Polarity selection at 00 Signed pogs oe rererence via 01 Depends on the RUN direction ue Ne E 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 54 uoneiado Operation 3 9 Parameter List Parameter Default orate Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 None 01 Digital Operator P036 Torque bias mode 02 Terminal O2 00 No 05 Option 1 06 Option 2 4 122 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW Tl P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Yes o Torque bias polarity 00 Signed a E088 selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction 00 XO Speed limit value in P039 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz forward 4 122 Speed limit value in P040 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz reverse DeviceNet comm P044 Watch dog timer 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 No s 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop po45 Operation set
487. ytes Decimal ASCII code a Output voltage monitor V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power monitor kW x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 00000000 is stored 8 bytes Preliminary data storage area RUN time monitor h x 1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ON time monitor h x 1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 1 Multi function input terminal monitor Item Data 1 terminal 00000001 2 terminal 00000002 3 terminal 00000004 4 terminal 00000008 5 terminal 00000010 6 terminal 00000020 7 terminal 00000040 8 terminal 00000080 FW terminal 00000100 2 Multi function output terminal monitor Item 11 terminal 00000001 12 terminal 00000002 13 terminal 00000004 14 terminal 00000008 15 terminal 00000010 Relay terminal 00000020 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 04 gt Reads the Inverter status e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 04 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 162 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data

RX USER`S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents